Programme Specification
MM BEng (Hons) Manufacturing Engineering (2018 and 2019 Entry)
Academic Year: 2019/20
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET) |
Final award | BEng/ BEng +DIS /BEng + DIntS/ BEng + DPS |
Programme title | Manufacturing Engineering |
Programme code | WSUB01 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is 6 semesters, or 8 semesters if students undertake the additional period of study, normally between Parts B and C, leading to the award of the Diploma in Industrial Studies, the Diploma of International Studies or the Diploma of Professional Studies. |
UCAS code | H710, HH1T |
Admissions criteria | BEng -
BEng + DIntS/DPS -
|
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The overall aim of this programme is to develop students with core knowledge, skills and attributes able to work effectively and progress rapidly in manufacturing industries. This is undertaken through taught courses that cover the essential engineering and management disciplines supported by practical and transferable skills development.
Specific aims are:
• A1. To produce engineering graduates ready to play a substantial role in manufacturing companies through a combination of technical, commercial and social awareness.
• A2. To provide a foundation for graduates wishing to progress to professional engineering status.
• A3. To deliver core subjects in engineering science, mathematics, manufacturing processes and technologies that underpin a career in manufacturing engineering.
• A4. To provide a high quality educational experience for students in a programme of study which combines wide ranging aspects of manufacturing technologies, manufacturing management, design for manufacture and engineering design
• A5. To develop analytical and transferable skills that will enable graduates to solve problems individually and in teams, and gain employment in a wide variety of professions, and thereby make a valuable contribution to society and wealth creation.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
-
UK Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education (QAA) – ‘Subject Benchmark Statement for Engineering’, (Feb.2015).
-
Engineering Council (UK). ‘UK-SPEC, UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence’, 3rd Edition, Jan.2014.
-
Engineering Council (UK). ‘The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes’, 3rd Edition, May 2014.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
- K1. The underpinning science, mathematics and other disciplines associated with a career in manufacturing engineering;
- K2. Engineering principles, quantitative methods, mathematical and computer models;
- K3. Codes of practice, industry standards and quality issues applicable to a career in manufacturing engineering;
- K4. Management techniques to organise manufacturing engineering activities and an understanding of the commercial and economic context of an engineering business;
- K5. The importance of sustainable development, legal, ethical and intellectual property issues within the modern industrial world;
- K6. The characteristics of engineering materials, manufacturing processes and technologies.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- C1. Identify a manufacturing related problem, evaluate its requirements and generate innovative solutions that consider a range of constraints including production capabilities, sustainability and economics;
- C2. Apply appropriate methods (including analytical and computational methods) to model and assess such solutions;
- C3. Apply mathematical and scientific methods to the analysis of manufacturing related problems making appropriate allowance for uncertainty in the available data;
- C4. Appreciate the role and constraints of engineers in other disciplines.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- P1. Use appropriate computer software and computational techniques;
- P2. Use appropriate laboratory and mechanical workshop equipment competently and safely;
- P3. Research information relating to manufacturing technologies and their management;
- P4. Prepare engineering drawings and technical reports and give technical presentations;
- P5. Demonstrate organisational and management skills.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- T1. Apply creative and structured approaches to problem solving;
- T2. Gather and collate key technical information from a range of sources;
- T3. Communicate effectively through written, graphical, interpersonal and presentation skills;
- T4. Operate and apply a range of computer based information systems;
- T5. Monitor and adjust a personal programme of work on an on-going basis and learn independently;
- T6. Work in a team and understand the different roles;
- T7. Structure, plan and manage individual and group projects and activities.
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
MAA306 | Mathematics for Manufacturing Engineering | 20 | 1+2 | C |
WSA102 | Engineering Science 1 | 20 | 1+2 | C |
WSA604 | Materials & Manufacturing Processes | 20 | 1+2 | C |
WSA400 | Application of CAD for Engineering Designers | 10 | 1 | C |
WSA501 | Integrating Studies 1a | 10 | 1 | C |
WSA610 | Manufacturing Technology | 10 | 1 | C |
WSA210 | Manufacturing Management | 10 | 2 | C |
WSA504 | Integrating Studies 1b | 10 | 2 | C |
WSA900 | Electronics and Electrical Technology 1 | 10 | 2 | C |
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
WSB501 | Integrating Studies | 20 | 1+2 | C |
WSB600 | Manufacturing Process Technology | 20 | 1+2 | C |
WSB112 | Engineering Science 2 | 10 | 1 | C |
WSB310 | Engineering and Management Modelling | 10 | 1 | C |
WSB201 | Digital Manufacturing and Discrete Event Simulation | 10 | 1 | C |
WSB505 | Manufacturing Design | 10 | 1 | C |
MAB206 | Statistics | 10 | 2 | C |
WSB203 | Manufacturing Planning and Control | 10 | 2 | C |
WSB301 | Software Engineering | 10 | 2 | C |
WSB413 | Machine Design | 10 | 2 | C |
4.3 Part I – Optional Placement Year
Code | Title |
WSI010 | Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS) (non-credit bearing) |
WSI020 | Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) (non-credit bearing) |
WSI035 | Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) (non-credit bearing) |
For candidates who are registered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS), Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) or Diploma in International Studies (DintS), Part I will be followed between Parts B and C and will be in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XI and Regulation XX.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
Students MUST choose 20 credits of options (O) in Semester One and 20 credits in Semester Two.
TWO modules (20 credits) must be selected from Groups A, B or C with no more than ONE module from each group.
TWO modules (20 credits) must be selected from Groups D, E, F or G with no more than ONE module from each group.
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
WSC500 | Individual Project | 40 | 1+2 | C |
WSC200 | Engineering Management: Finance, Law and Quality | 10 | 1 | C |
WSC600 | Advanced Manufacturing Processes and Technology 1 | 10 | 1 | C |
WSC602 | Sustainable Manufacturing | 10 | 1 | C |
WSD203 | Lean Operations and Supply Chain Management | 10 | 2 | C |
WSC606 | Additive Manufacturing for Product Development | 10 | 1 | OA |
WSC201 | Organisation Structure & Strategy | 10 | 1 | OB |
WSC205 | International Project Management | 10 | 1 | OB |
WSC400 | Design for Assembly | 10 | 1 | OB |
WSC108 | Manufacturing Automation and Control | 10 | 1 | OC |
WSC206 | Product Innovation Management | 10 | 2 | OD |
WSC300 | Product Information Systems - Computer Aided Design | 10 | 2 | OD |
WSC603 | Metrology | 10 | 2 | OE |
WSC911 | Industrial Machine Vision | 10 | 2 | OE |
WSC610 | Healthcare Engineering | 10 | 2 | OF |
WSC700 | Sports Engineering | 10 | 2 | OF |
WSC106 | Finite Element Analysis | 10 | 2 | OG |
MPC012 | Polymer Engineering : Processing and Manufacture | 10 | 2 | OG |
All module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.
4.5 Studies Overseas
Students may choose to study Part C - Semester One at an approved Overseas Higher Education Institution. The Mix of subjects of the learning programme must be approved in advance by the Programme Director.
The proposed programme of learning will normally include work on an individual project with a modular weight of 10 credits.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B, and from Part B to Part C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and Part C, in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The overall average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 40: Part C 60, to determine the degree classification.
Programme Specification
MM BEng (Hons) Manufacturing Engineering (Students undertaking Part C in 2019)
Academic Year: 2019/20
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET) |
Final award | BEng/ BEng +DIS /BEng + DIntS/ BEng + DPS |
Programme title | Manufacturing Engineering |
Programme code | WSUB01 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is 6 semesters, or 8 semesters if students undertake the additional period of study, normally between Parts B and C, leading to the award of the Diploma in Industrial Studies, the Diploma of International Studies or the Diploma of Professional Studies. |
UCAS code | H710, HH1T |
Admissions criteria | BEng - BEng + DIntS/DPS -
|
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The overall aim of this programme is to develop students with core knowledge, skills and attributes able to work effectively and progress rapidly in manufacturing industries. This is undertaken through taught courses that cover the essential engineering and management disciplines supported by practical and transferable skills development.
Specific aims are:
• A1. To produce engineering graduates ready to play a substantial role in manufacturing companies through a combination of technical, commercial and social awareness.
• A2. To provide a foundation for graduates wishing to progress to professional engineering status.
• A3. To deliver core subjects in engineering science, mathematics, manufacturing processes and technologies that underpin a career in manufacturing engineering.
• A4. To provide a high quality educational experience for students in a programme of study which combines wide ranging aspects of manufacturing technologies, manufacturing management, design for manufacture and engineering design
• A5. To develop analytical and transferable skills that will enable graduates to solve problems individually and in teams, and gain employment in a wide variety of professions, and thereby make a valuable contribution to society and wealth creation.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
-
UK Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education (QAA) – ‘Subject Benchmark Statement for Engineering’, (Feb.2015).
-
Engineering Council (UK). ‘UK-SPEC, UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence’, 3rd Edition, Jan.2014.
-
Engineering Council (UK). ‘The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes’, 3rd Edition, May 2014.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
- K1. The underpinning science, mathematics and other disciplines associated with a career in manufacturing engineering;
- K2. Engineering principles, quantitative methods, mathematical and computer models;
- K3. Codes of practice, industry standards and quality issues applicable to a career in manufacturing engineering;
- K4. Management techniques to organise manufacturing engineering activities and an understanding of the commercial and economic context of an engineering business;
- K5. The importance of sustainable development, legal, ethical and intellectual property issues within the modern industrial world;
- K6. The characteristics of engineering materials, manufacturing processes and technologies.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- C1. Identify a manufacturing related problem, evaluate its requirements and generate innovative solutions that consider a range of constraints including production capabilities, sustainability and economics;
- C2. Apply appropriate methods (including analytical and computational methods) to model and assess such solutions;
- C3. Apply mathematical and scientific methods to the analysis of manufacturing related problems making appropriate allowance for uncertainty in the available data;
- C4. Appreciate the role and constraints of engineers in other disciplines.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- P1. Use appropriate computer software and computational techniques;
- P2. Use appropriate laboratory and mechanical workshop equipment competently and safely;
- P3. Research information relating to manufacturing technologies and their management;
- P4. Prepare engineering drawings and technical reports and give technical presentations;
- P5. Demonstrate organisational and management skills.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- T1. Apply creative and structured approaches to problem solving;
- T2. Gather and collate key technical information from a range of sources;
- T3. Communicate effectively through written, graphical, interpersonal and presentation skills;
- T4. Operate and apply a range of computer based information systems;
- T5. Monitor and adjust a personal programme of work on an on-going basis and learn independently;
- T6. Work in a team and understand the different roles;
- T7. Structure, plan and manage individual and group projects and activities.
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
MAA306 | Mathematics for Manufacturing Engineering | 20 | 1+2 | C |
MMA102 | Engineering Science 1 | 20 | 1+2 | C |
MMA604 | Materials & Manufacturing Processes | 20 | 1+2 | C |
MMA400 | Manufacturing Design 1 | 10 | 1 | C |
MMA501 | Integrating Studies 1a | 10 | 1 | C |
MMB610 | Manufacturing Technology | 10 | 1 | C |
MMA210 | Manufacturing Management | 10 | 2 | C |
MMA504 | Integrating Studies 1b | 10 | 2 | C |
MMA900 | Electronics and Electrical Technology 1 | 10 | 2 | C |
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
WSB501 | Integrating Studies | 20 | 1+2 | C |
WSB600 | Manufacturing Process Technology | 20 | 1+2 | C |
WSB112 | Engineering Science 2 | 10 | 1 | C |
WSB310 | Engineering and Management Modelling | 10 | 1 | C |
WSB200 | Engineering Management: Finance, Law and Quality | 10 | 1 | C |
WSB505 | Manufacturing Design | 10 | 1 | C |
MAB206 | Statistics | 10 | 2 | C |
WSB203 | Manufacturing Planning and Control | 10 | 2 | C |
WSB301 | Software Engineering | 10 | 2 | C |
WSB413 | Machine Design | 10 | 2 | C |
4.3 Part I – Optional Placement Year
Code | Title |
WSI010 | DIS Industrial Placement (non-credit bearing) |
WSI020 | DPS Industrial Placement (non-credit bearing) |
WSI035 | DIntS Industrial Placement (non-credit bearing) |
For candidates who are registered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS), Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) or Diploma in International Studies (DintS), Part I will be followed between Parts B and C and will be in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XI and Regulation XX.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
Students MUST choose 20 credits of options (O) in Semester One and 20 credits in Semester Two.
TWO modules (20 credits) must be selected from Groups A, B or C with no more than ONE module from each group.
TWO modules (20 credits) must be selected from Groups D, E, F OR G with no more than ONE module from each group.
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
WSC500 | Individual Project | 40 | 1+2 | C |
WSC205 | International Project Management | 10 | 1 | C |
WSC600 | Advanced Manufacturing Processes and Technology 1 | 10 | 1 | C |
WSC602 | Sustainable Manufacturing | 10 | 1 | C |
WSD203 | Lean Operations and Supply Chain Management | 10 | 2 | C |
WSC606 | Additive Manufacturing for Product Development | 10 | 1 | OA |
WSC201 | Organisation Structure and Strategy | 10 | 1 | OB |
WSC400 | Design for Assembly | 10 | 1 | OB |
WSC108 | Manufacturing Automation and Control | 10 | 1 | OC |
WSC300 | Product Information Systems - Computer Aided Design | 10 | 2 | OD |
WSC206 | Product Innovation Management | 10 | 2 | OD |
WSC603 | Metrology | 10 | 2 | OE |
WSC911 | Industrial Machine Vision | 10 | 2 | OE |
WSC610 | Healthcare Engineering | 10 | 2 | OF |
WSC700 | Sports Engineering | 10 | 2 | OF |
WSC106 | Finite Element Analysis | 10 | 2 | OG |
MPC012 | Polymer Engineering : Processing and Manufacture | 10 | 2 | OG |
All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.
4.5 Studies Overseas
Students may choose to study Part C - Semester One at an approved Overseas Higher Education Institution. The Mix of subjects of the learning programme must be approved in advance by the Programme Director.
The proposed programme of learning will normally include work on an individual project with a modular weight of 10 credits.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B, and from Part B to Part C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and Part C, in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The overall average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 40: Part C 60, to determine the degree classification.
Programme Specification
MM BEng (Hons) Product Design Engineering (2018 and 2019 Entry)
Academic Year: 2019/20
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET) Institution of Mechanical Engineers (IMechE) Institution of Engineering Designers (IED) |
Final award | BEng/ BEng + DIS/BEng + DPS/ BEng + DInts |
Programme title | Product Design Engineering |
Programme code | WSUB02 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is 6 semesters, or 8 semesters if students undertake the additional period of study, normally between Parts B and C, leading to the award of the Diploma in Industrial Studies, the Diploma of International Studies, or the Diploma of Professional Studies. |
UCAS code | H715 / HH1R |
Admissions criteria | BEng - BEng + DPS/DInts - |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
This programme seeks to provide a fully accredited engineering degree course that bridges the disciplines of mechanical engineering, manufacturing engineering and product design.
The design content is interdisciplinary and applicable to products, processes and systems. It aims to support the acquisition of design engineering skills and provide an integrating theme to develop goal-directed thinking and problem-solving strategies applicable to a wide range of problems.
• A1. To deliver systematic knowledge and understanding of key aspects of engineering science, manufacturing engineering, innovation and appropriate management techniques.
• A2. To provide opportunities for students to develop appropriate design and project engineering skills.
• A3. To develop the ability to solve engineering problems, some complex, using contemporary ideas and techniques.
• A4. To enable students to manage their own learning, communicate effectively and make use of primary source materials.
• A5. To gain knowledge of human and project management theory.
• A6. To provide insight into engineering practice and commercial aspects of engineering.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
-
UK Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education (QAA) – ‘Subject Benchmark Statement for Engineering’, (Feb.2015).
-
Engineering Council (UK). ‘UK-SPEC, UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence’, 3rd Edition, Jan.2014.
-
Engineering Council (UK). ‘The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes’, 3rd Edition, May 2014.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
- K1. the underpinning science, mathematics and other disciplines associated with careers related to product design and manufacturing engineering;
- K2. engineering principles, quantitative methods, mathematical and computer models;
- K3. the design process and design methodologies;
- K4. codes of practice, industry standards and quality issues as applicable to a career in product design engineering;
- K5. management techniques and business practices and of the commercial and economic context of an engineering business;
- K6. intellectual property issues and of environmental, legal and ethical issues within the modern industrial world;
- K7. the characteristics of engineering materials, equipment and processes and an awareness of basic mechanical workshop practices.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- C1. define a design engineering problem and generate innovative solutions;
- C2. interpret numerical data and apply mathematical methods to the analysis of engineering design problems;
- C3. analyse, objectively evaluate and apply the principles of industrial design, engineering design and manufacturing design to product design and development;
- C4. demonstrate an awareness of form, function, fit, environment and safety as applied to design and manufacture;
- C5. show initiative, innovation and intellect in problem solving.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- P1. manage the design process taking account of customer constraints such as cost, health and safety, risk and environmental issues;
- P2. use appropriate computer software and laboratory equipment;
- P3. research information, generate and evaluate product design ideas;
- P4. communicate product design ideas through the presentation of concept drawings, computer visualisations and conventional sketching;
- P5. prepare engineering drawings, computer visualisations and technical reports and give technically competent oral presentations;
- P6. demonstrate an understanding of manufacturing technology in relation to design and production;
- P7. demonstrate basic organisational and management skills.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- T1. demonstrate a high level of numeracy;
- T2. apply creative and structured approaches to problem solving;
- T3. communicate effectively through written, graphical, interpersonal and presentation skills;
- T4. design and implement basic computer-based information systems;
- T5. work independently;
- T6. work in a team;
- T7. organise and manage time and resources effectively.
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
MAA306 | Mathematics for Manufacturing Engineering | 20 | 1+2 | C |
WSA102 | Engineering Science 1 | 20 | 1+2 | C |
WSA401 | Product Design (Ergonomics and Visualisation) | 20 | 1+2 | C |
WSA604 | Materials and Manufacturing Processes | 20 | 1+2 | C |
WSA400 | Application of CAD for Engineering Designers | 10 | 1 | C |
WSA501 | Integrating Studies 1a | 10 | 1 | C |
WSA504 | Integrating Studies 1b | 10 | 2 | C |
WSA900 | Electronic and Electrical Technology 1 | 10 | 2 | C |
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
WSB501 | Integrating Studies | 20 | 1+2 | C |
WSB504 | Application of Product Design | 20 | 1+2 | C |
WSB112 | Engineering Science 2 | 10 | 1 | C |
WSB310 | Engineering and Management Modelling | 10 | 1 | C |
WSB400 | Industrial Design | 10 | 1 | C |
WSB610 | Manufacturing Technology | 10 | 1 | C |
MAB206 | Statistics | 10 | 2 | C |
WSB210 | Manufacturing Management | 10 | 2 | C |
WSB301 | Software Engineering | 10 | 2 | C |
WSB413 | Machine Design | 10 | 2 | C |
4.3 Part I – Optional Placement Year
Code | Title |
WSI010 | Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS) (non-credit bearing) |
WSI020 | Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) (non-credit bearing) |
WSI035 | Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIntS) (non-credit bearing) |
For candidates who are registered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS), Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) or Diploma in International Studies (DintS), Part I will be followed between Parts B and C and will be in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XI and Regulation XX.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
Students MUST choose 20 credits of optional modules (O) in Semester One.
Students MUST choose 30 credits of optional modules (O) in Semester Two, with no more than 10 credits from each group.
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
WSC501 | Individual Project | 40 | 1+2 | C |
WSC200 | Engineering Management: Finance, Law and Quality | 10 | 1 | C |
WSC205 | International Project Management | 10 | 1 | C |
WSC602 | Sustainable Manufacturing | 10 | 1 | C |
WSC201 | Organisational Structure & Strategy | 10 | 1 | O |
WSC400 | Design for Assembly | 10 | 1 | O |
WSC401 | Design Methods and Communication | 10 | 1 | O |
WSC600 | Advanced Manufacturing Processes and Technology 1 | 10 | 1 | O |
WSC606 | Additive Manufacturing for Product Development | 10 | 1 | O |
WSC106 | Finite Element Analysis | 10 | 2 | OA |
MPC012 | Polymer Engineering - Processes and Manufacture | 10 | 2 | OA |
WSC203 | Manufacturing Planning & Control | 10 | 2 | OB |
WSC206 | Product Innovation Management | 10 | 2 | OB |
WSC300 | Product Information Systems - Computer Aided Design | 10 | 2 | OC |
WSC603 | Metrology | 10 | 2 | OC |
WSC610 | Healthcare Engineering | 10 | 2 | OD |
WSC700 | Sports Engineering | 10 | 2 | OD |
WSC911 | Industrial Machine Vision | 10 | 2 | OE |
All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.
4.5 Study Overseas
Students may choose to study Part C – Semester 1 at an approved Overseas Higher Education Institution. The mix of subjects of the learning programme must be approved in advance by the Programme Director. The proposed programme of learning will normally include work on an Individual Project with a modular weight of 10.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B, and from Part B to Part C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Part B and Part C, in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The overall average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 40: Part C 60, to determine the degree classification.
Programme Specification
MM BEng (Hons) Product Design Engineering (Students undertaking Part C in 2019)
Academic Year: 2019/20
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET) Institution of Mechanical Engineers (IMechE) Institution of Engineering Designers (IED) |
Final award | BEng/ BEng + DIS/BEng + DPS/ BEng + DInts |
Programme title | Product Design Engineering |
Programme code | WSUB02 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is 6 semesters, or 8 semesters if students undertake the additional period of study, normally between Parts B and C, leading to the award of the Diploma in Industrial Studies, the Diploma of International Studies, or the Diploma of Professional Studies. |
UCAS code | H715 / HH1R |
Admissions criteria | BEng - BEng + DPS/DInts - |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
This programme seeks to provide a fully accredited engineering degree course that bridges the disciplines of mechanical engineering, manufacturing engineering and product design.
The design content is interdisciplinary and applicable to products, processes and systems. It aims to support the acquisition of design engineering skills and provide an integrating theme to develop goal-directed thinking and problem-solving strategies applicable to a wide range of problems.
• A1. To deliver systematic knowledge and understanding of key aspects of engineering science, manufacturing engineering, innovation and appropriate management techniques.
• A2. To provide opportunities for students to develop appropriate design and project engineering skills.
• A3. To develop the ability to solve engineering problems, some complex, using contemporary ideas and techniques.
• A4. To enable students to manage their own learning, communicate effectively and make use of primary source materials.
• A5. To gain knowledge of human and project management theory.
• A6. To provide insight into engineering practice and commercial aspects of engineering.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
-
UK Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education (QAA) – ‘Subject Benchmark Statement for Engineering’, (Feb.2015).
-
Engineering Council (UK). ‘UK-SPEC, UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence’, 3rd Edition, Jan.2014.
-
Engineering Council (UK). ‘The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes’, 3rd Edition, May 2014.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
- K1. the underpinning science, mathematics and other disciplines associated with careers related to product design and manufacturing engineering;
- K2. engineering principles, quantitative methods, mathematical and computer models;
- K3. the design process and design methodologies;
- K4. codes of practice, industry standards and quality issues as applicable to a career in product design engineering;
- K5. management techniques and business practices and of the commercial and economic context of an engineering business;
- K6. intellectual property issues and of environmental, legal and ethical issues within the modern industrial world;
- K7. the characteristics of engineering materials, equipment and processes and an awareness of basic mechanical workshop practices.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- C1. define a design engineering problem and generate innovative solutions;
- C2. interpret numerical data and apply mathematical methods to the analysis of engineering design problems;
- C3. analyse, objectively evaluate and apply the principles of industrial design, engineering design and manufacturing design to product design and development;
- C4. demonstrate an awareness of form, function, fit, environment and safety as applied to design and manufacture;
- C5. show initiative, innovation and intellect in problem solving.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- P1. manage the design process taking account of customer constraints such as cost, health and safety, risk and environmental issues;
- P2. use appropriate computer software and laboratory equipment;
- P3. research information, generate and evaluate product design ideas;
- P4. communicate product design ideas through the presentation of concept drawings, computer visualisations and conventional sketching;
- P5. prepare engineering drawings, computer visualisations and technical reports and give technically competent oral presentations;
- P6. demonstrate an understanding of manufacturing technology in relation to design and production;
- P7. demonstrate basic organisational and management skills.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- T1. demonstrate a high level of numeracy;
- T2. apply creative and structured approaches to problem solving;
- T3. communicate effectively through written, graphical, interpersonal and presentation skills;
- T4. design and implement basic computer-based information systems;
- T5. work independently;
- T6. work in a team;
- T7. organise and manage time and resources effectively.
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
MAA306 | Mathematics for Manufacturing Engineering | 20 | 1+2 | C |
MMA102 | Engineering Science 1 | 20 | 1+2 | C |
MMA401 | Product Design (Ergonomics & Visualisation) | 20 | 1+2 | C |
MMA604 | Materials and Manufacturing Processes | 20 | 1+2 | C |
MMA400 | Manufacturing Design 1 | 10 | 1 | C |
MMA501 | Integrating Studies 1a | 10 | 1 | C |
MMA504 | Integrating Studies 1b | 10 | 2 | C |
MMA900 | Electronic and Electrical Technology 1 | 10 | 2 | C |
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
WSB501 | Integrating Studies | 20 | 1+2 | C |
WSB504 | Application of Product Design | 20 | 1+2 | C |
WSB112 | Engineering Science 2 | 10 | 1 | C |
WSB310 | Engineering and Management Modelling | 10 | 1 | C |
WSB400 | Industrial Design | 10 | 1 | C |
WSB610 | Manufacturing Technology | 10 | 1 | C |
MAB206 | Statistics | 10 | 2 | C |
WSB210 | Manufacturing Management | 10 | 2 | C |
WSB301 | Software Engineering | 10 | 2 | C |
WSB413 | Machine Design | 10 | 2 | C |
4.3 Part I – Optional Placement Year
Code | Title |
WSI010 | DIS Industrial Placement (non-credit bearing) |
WSI020 | DPS Industrial Placement (non-credit bearing) |
WSI035 | DIntS Industrial Placement (non-credit bearing) |
For candidates who are registered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS), Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) or Diploma in International Studies (DintS), Part I will be followed between Parts B and C and will be in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XI and Regulation XX.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
Students MUST choose 20 credits of optional modules (O) in Semester One.
Students MUST choose 30 credits of optional modules (O) in Semester Two, with no more than 10 credits from each group.
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
WSC501 | Individual Project | 40 | 1+2 | C |
WSC200 | Engineering Management: Finance, Law and Quality | 10 | 1 | C |
WSC205 | International Project Management | 10 | 1 | C |
WSC602 | Sustainable Manufacturing | 10 | 1 | C |
WSC201 | Organisational Structure & Strategy | 10 | 1 | O |
WSC400 | Design for Assembly | 10 | 1 | O |
WSC401 | Design Methods and Communication | 10 | 1 | O |
WSC600 | Advanced Manufacturing Processes and Technology 1 | 10 | 1 | O |
WSC606 | Additive Manufacturing for Product Development | 10 | 1 | O |
WSC106 | Finite Element Analysis | 10 | 2 | OA |
MPC012 | Polymer Engineering - Processes and Manufacture | 10 | 2 | OA |
WSC203 | Manufacturing Planning & Control | 10 | 2 | OB |
WSC206 | Product Innovation Management | 10 | 2 | OB |
WSC300 | Product Information Systems - Computer Aided Design | 10 | 2 | OC |
WSC603 | Metrology | 10 | 2 | OC |
WSC610 | Healthcare Engineering | 10 | 2 | OD |
WSC700 | Sports Engineering | 10 | 2 | OD |
WSC911 | Industrial Machine Vision | 10 | 2 | OE |
All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.
4.5 Study Overseas
Students may choose to study Part C – Semester 1 at an approved Overseas Higher Education Institution. The mix of subjects of the learning programme must be approved in advance by the Programme Director. The proposed programme of learning will normally include work on an Individual Project with a modular weight of 10.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B, and from Part B to Part C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Part B and Part C, in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The overall average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 40: Part C 60, to determine the degree classification.
Programme Specification
MM BEng (Hons) Mechanical Engineering (2018 and 2019 Entry)
Academic Year: 2019/20
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET) Institution of Mechanical Engineers (IMechE) |
Final award | BEng /BEng DIS/BEng DPS /BEng DInts |
Programme title | Mechanical Engineering |
Programme code | WSUB03 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is either 6 semesters, or 8 semesters if the students undertake the additional period of study, normally between Parts B and C, for the award of the Diploma of Industrial Studies, the Diploma of International Studies or the Diploma of Professional Studies. |
UCAS code | H300, H301 |
Admissions criteria | BEng -
BEng + DPS/DInts - |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
This fully accredited degree programme delivers the technical and business skills that are required for a successful career as a professional mechanical engineer. The curriculum has been designed to meet the needs of industry; providing a strong academic foundation while inspiring students to be creative and communicate their ideas clearly by way of industrially based design projects. On completion of the programme, students will have acquired a broad base of engineering knowledge and experience. They will be self-reliant and able to contribute productively in team situations. The programme provides the flexibility for students to choose a wide variety of career paths and specialisms in their final year.
Aims:
- A1. To prepare highly skilled graduates to pursue careers in Mechanical Engineering across a range of industries and activities including design, development, and analysis of complex systems;
- A2. To provide a high quality learning experience across a complete range of core subjects in order to give students the necessary technical skills to understand mechanical systems and solve engineering problems;
- A3. To promote high quality engineering practice by applying appropriate knowledge, skills, tools and techniques in the analysis, diagnosis and solution of industry-related problems;
- A4. To develop engineers capable of designing systems and managing the development process in order to deliver solutions that meet the requirements of customers;
- A5. To impart an appreciation of the essential practical and commercial, ethical, business, sustainability and legal constraints of professional engineering;
- A6. To support personal and professional development and foster creativity, develop design capability and teach the communication skills necessary to put ideas into practice.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- UK Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education (QAA) – ‘Subject Benchmark Statement for Engineering’, (Feb.2015)
- Engineering Council (UK). ‘UK-SPEC, UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence’, 3rd Edition, Jan.2014
- Engineering Council (UK). ‘The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes’, 3rd Edition, May 2014
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
- K1. The underpinning scientific mathematical and engineering principles associated with mechanical engineering;
- K2. The characteristics of engineering material, equipment and processes and an awareness of basic mechanical workshop practices;
- K3. Engineering principles, quantitative methods, mathematical and computer models;
- K4. Relevant codes of Practice and regulatory framework and operational practices for sale, operation of engineering processes;
- K5. Recognise the professional and ethical responsibilities of engineers;
- K6. Principles of industrial design, engineering design and manufacturing design;
- K7. Management techniques and an understanding of the commercial and economic context of the engineering business;
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- C1. Use the principles of engineering science in developing solutions to practical mechanical engineering problems;
- C2. Create new engineering components and processes through the synthesis of ideas from a range of sources using appropriate design principles, techniques and codes of practice;
- C3. Integrate, evaluate and make use of information from a wide variety of sources including other engineering disciplines;
- C4. Investigate and define engineering problems within the framework of economic, social, ethical and environmental issues and show the ability to assess risk;
- C5. Evaluate and respond to customer needs, including fitness for purpose and cost.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- P1. Apply computer-based and mathematical methods to the modelling and analysis of engineering systems, components and products;
- P2. Define and solve practical engineering problems;
- P3. Use laboratory and basic workshop equipment in an appropriate and safe manner;
- P4. Demonstrate the ability to manage the design process;
- P5. Prepare mechanical engineering drawings, computer graphics and technical reports and give technically competent oral presentations;
- P6. Apply relevant codes of practice and industry standards;
- P7. Demonstrate the ability to work with technical uncertainty;
- P8. Demonstrate basic organisational and project management skills.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- T1. Demonstrate a high level of numeracy;
- T2. Search and retrieve information, ideas and data from a variety of sources;
- T3. Select and analyse appropriate engineering techniques and tools;
- T4. Communicate effectively by means of technical reports, papers, graphical aids, interpersonal and presentation skills;
- T5. Design and implement basic computer based information systems;
- T6. Develop work plans, take responsibility for its execution, organise and manage time and resources effectively;
- T7. Plan self-learning and improve performance, as the foundation for lifelong learning/CPD.
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
MAA310 | Mathematics for Mechanical Engineering | 20 | 1+2 | C |
WSA101 | Statics and Dynamics | 20 | 1+2 | C |
WSA508 | Engineering Principles and Professional Skills | 20 | 1+2 | C |
WSA604 | Materials and Manufacturing Processes | 20 | 1+2 | C |
WSA800 | Thermodynamics and Fluid Mechanics | 20 | 1+2 | C |
WSA901 | Electronic Systems for Mechanical Processes | 10 | 1 | C |
WSA100 | Mechanics of Materials | 10 | 2 | C |
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
WSB300 | Engineering Computation | 10 | 1+2 | C |
WSB500 | Application of Engineering Design: Industry Based Project | 10 | 1+2 | C |
MAB110 | Mathematics for Mechanical Engineering 3 | 10 | 1 | C |
WSB100 | Mechanics of Materials 2 | 10 | 1 | C |
WSB101 | Engineering Dynamics 2 | 10 | 1 | C |
WSB104 | Control Engineering | 10 | 1 | C |
WSB800 | Thermodynamics 2 | 10 | 1 | C |
WSB045 | Electrical Power & Machines | 10 | 2 | C |
WSB403 | Design of Machine Elements | 10 | 2 | C |
WSB404 | Computer Aided Design, Manufacture and Test (CADMAT) | 10 | 2 | C |
WSB801 | Heat Transfer | 10 | 2 | C |
WSB802 | Fluid Mechanics 2 | 10 | 2 | C |
4.3 Part I – Optional Placement Year
Code | Title |
WSI010 | Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS) (non-credit bearing) |
WSI020 | Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) (non-credit bearing) |
WSI035 | Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) (non-credit bearing) |
For candidates who are registered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS), Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) or Diploma in International Studies (DintS), Part I will be followed between Parts B and C and will be in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XI and Regulation XX.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
Students MUST choose 20 credits of options (O) in Semester One and 30 credits in Semester Two.
TWO modules (20 credits) must be selected from Group A or Group B (both from the same group), OR ONE module from Group A or B and ONE module from Group C.
TWO or THREE modules (total 30 credits) must be selected from Group D, E, F or G. No more than ONE module must be selected from each group.
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
WSC500 | Individual Project | 40 | 1+2 | C |
WSC200 | Engineering Management: Finance, Law and Quality | 10 | 1 | C |
WSC504 | Applied Engineering Design & Analysis | 10 | 1 | C |
WSC900 | Computer Control and Instrumentation | 10 | 1 | C |
WSC801 | Advanced Heat Transfer | 10 | 1 | OA |
WSC804 | Energy Systems Analysis | 10 | 1 | OA |
WSC910 | Laser Materials Processing | 10 | 1 | OA |
WSC104 | Robotics and Control | 10 | 1 | OB |
WSC107 | Contacts Mechanics: Tribology | 10 | 1 | OB |
WSC602 | Sustainable Manufacturing | 10 | 1 | OC |
WSC606 | Additive Manufacturing for Product Development | 10 | 1 | OC |
WSC106 | Finite Element Analysis | 10 | 2 | OD |
WSC802 | Computation Fluid Dynamics | 10 | 2 | OD |
MPC012 | Polymer Engineering - Processing & Manufacture | 10 | 2 | OD |
WSC101 | Vibration and Noise | 10 | 2 | OE |
WSC105 | Kinematics and Dynamics of Machinery | 10 | 2 | OE |
MPC014 | Materials in Service | 10 | 2 | OF |
WSC301 | Computer Aided Engineering | 10 | 2 | OF |
WSC800 | Internal Combustion Engines | 20 | 2 | OF |
WSC803 | Ballistics and Rocket Propulsion | 10 | 2 | OF |
MPC102 | Fracture and Failure | 10 | 2 | OF |
WSC911 | Industrial Machine Vision | 10 | 2 | OG |
All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.
4.5 Studies Overseas
Students may choose to study Semester 1 (only) during their Part D, at an approved Overseas Higher Education Institution. The mix of subjects of the learning programme must first be approved by the programme director for their course. An acceptable learning programme should, where possible, include a group project and studies at an advanced/masters level.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to Part C and be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates' final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and Part C in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each part will be combined in the ratio Part B - 40 : Part C - 60 to determine the degree classification.
Programme Specification
MM BEng (Hons) Mechanical Engineering (Students undertaking Part C in 2019)
Academic Year: 2019/20
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET) Institution of Mechanical Engineers (IMechE) |
Final award | BEng /BEng DIS/BEng DPS /BEng DInts |
Programme title | Mechanical Engineering |
Programme code | WSUB03 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is either 6 semesters, or 8 semesters if the students undertake the additional period of study, normally between Parts B and C, for the award of the Diploma of Industrial Studies, the Diploma of International Studies or the Diploma of Professional Studies. |
UCAS code | H300, H301 |
Admissions criteria | BEng - BEng + DPS/DInts - |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
This fully accredited degree programme delivers the technical and business skills that are required for a successful career as a professional mechanical engineer. The curriculum has been designed to meet the needs of industry; providing a strong academic foundation while inspiring students to be creative and communicate their ideas clearly by way of industrially based design projects. On completion of the programme, students will have acquired a broad base of engineering knowledge and experience. They will be self-reliant and able to contribute productively in team situations. The programme provides the flexibility for students to choose a wide variety of career paths and specialisms in their final year.
Aims:
-
A1. To prepare highly skilled graduates to pursue careers in Mechanical Engineering across a range of industries and activities including design, development, and analysis of complex systems;
-
A2. To provide a high quality learning experience across a complete range of core subjects in order to give students the necessary technical skills to understand mechanical systems and solve engineering problems;
-
A3. To promote high quality engineering practice by applying appropriate knowledge, skills, tools and techniques in the analysis, diagnosis and solution of industry-related problems;
-
A4. To develop engineers capable of designing systems and managing the development process in order to deliver solutions that meet the requirements of customers;
-
A5. To impart an appreciation of the essential practical and commercial, ethical, business, sustainability and legal constraints of professional engineering;
-
A6. To support personal and professional development and foster creativity, develop design capability and teach the communication skills necessary to put ideas into practice.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- UK Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education (QAA) – ‘Subject Benchmark Statement for Engineering’, (Feb.2015).
- Engineering Council (UK). ‘UK-SPEC, UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence’, 3rd Edition, Jan.2014
- Engineering Council (UK). ‘The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes’, 3rd Edition, May 2014
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
- K1. The underpinning scientific mathematical and engineering principles associated with mechanical engineering;
- K2. The characteristics of engineering material, equipment and processes and an awareness of basic mechanical workshop practices;
- K3. Engineering principles, quantitative methods, mathematical and computer models;
- K4. Relevant codes of Practice and regulatory framework and operational practices for sale, operation of engineering processes;
- K5. Recognise the professional and ethical responsibilities of engineers;
- K6. Principles of industrial design, engineering design and manufacturing design;
- K7. Management techniques and an understanding of the commercial and economic context of the engineering business.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- C1. Use the principles of engineering science in developing solutions to practical mechanical engineering problems;
- C2. Create new engineering components and processes through the synthesis of ideas from a range of sources using appropriate design principles, techniques and codes of practice;
- C3. Integrate, evaluate and make use of information from a wide variety of sources including other engineering disciplines;
- C4. Investigate and define engineering problems within the framework of economic, social, ethical and environmental issues and show the ability to assess risk;
- C5. Evaluate and respond to customer needs, including fitness for purpose and cost.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- P1. Apply computer-based and mathematical methods to the modelling and analysis of engineering systems, components and products;
- P2. Define and solve practical engineering problems;
- P3. Use laboratory and basic workshop equipment in an appropriate and safe manner;
- P4. Demonstrate the ability to manage the design process;
- P5. Prepare mechanical engineering drawings, computer graphics and technical reports and give technically competent oral presentations;
- P6. Apply relevant codes of practice and industry standards;
- P7. Demonstrate the ability to work with technical uncertainty;
- P8. Demonstrate basic organisational and project management skills.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- T1. Demonstrate a high level of numeracy;
- T2. Search and retrieve information, ideas and data from a variety of sources;
- T3. Select and analyse appropriate engineering techniques and tools;
- T4. Communicate effectively by means of technical reports, papers, graphical aids, interpersonal and presentation skills;
- T5. Design and implement basic computer based information systems;
- T6. Develop work plans, take responsibility for its execution, organise and manage time and resources effectively;
- T7. Plan self-learning and improve performance, as the foundation for lifelong learning/CPD.
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
MAA310 | Mathematics for Mechanical Engineering | 20 | 1+2 | C |
MMA101 | Statics and Dynamics | 20 | 1+2 | C |
MMA508 | Engineering Principles & Professional Skills | 20 | 1+2 | C |
MMA604 | Materials & Manufacturing Processes | 20 | 1+2 | C |
MMA800 | Thermodynamics and Fluid Mechanics | 20 | 1+2 | C |
MMA901 | Electronic Systems for Mechanical Processes | 10 | 1 | C |
MMA100 | Mechanics of Materials | 10 | 2 | C |
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
WSB300 | Engineering Computation | 10 | 1+2 | C |
WSB500 | Application of Engineering Design: Industry Based Project | 10 | 1+2 | C |
MAB110 | Mathematics for Mechanical Engineering | 10 | 1 | C |
WSB100 | Mechanics of Materials 2 | 10 | 1 | C |
WSB101 | Engineering Dynamics 2 | 10 | 1 | C |
WSB104 | Control Engineering | 10 | 1 | C |
WSB800 | Thermodynamics 2 | 10 | 1 | C |
WSB045 | Electrical Power & Machines | 10 | 2 | C |
WSB403 | Design of Machine Elements | 10 | 2 | C |
WSB404 | Computer Aided Design, Manufacture and Test (CADMAT) | 10 | 2 | C |
WSB801 | Heat Transfer | 10 | 2 | C |
WSB802 | Fluid Mechanics | 10 | 2 | C |
4.3 Part I – Optional Placement Year
Code | Title |
WSI010 | DIS Industrial Placement (non-credit bearing) |
WSI020 | DPS Industrial Placement (non-credit bearing) |
WSI035 | DIntS Industrial Placement (non-credit bearing) |
For candidates who are registered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS), Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) or Diploma in International Studies (DintS), Part I will be followed between Parts B and C and will be in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XI and Regulation XX.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
Students MUST choose 20 credits of options (O) in Semester One and 30 credits in Semester Two.
TWO modules (20 credits) must be selected from Group A or Group B (both from the same group), OR ONE module from Group A or B and ONE module from Group C.
TWO or THREE modules (total 30 credits) must be selected from Group D, E, F or G. No more than ONE module must be selected from each group.
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
WSC500 | Individual Project | 40 | 1+2 | C |
WSC200 | Engineering Management: Finance, Law and Quality | 10 | 1 | C |
WSC504 | Applied Engineering Design & Analysis | 10 | 1 | C |
WSC900 | Computer Control and Instrumentation | 10 | 1 | C |
WSC801 | Advanced Heat Transfer | 10 | 1 | OA |
WSC804 | Energy Systems Analysis | 10 | 1 | OA |
WSC910 | Laser Materials Processing | 10 | 1 | OA |
WSC104 | Robotics and Control | 10 | 1 | OB |
WSC107 | Contacts Mechanics: Tribology | 10 | 1 | OB |
WSC602 | Sustainable Manufacturing | 10 | 1 | OC |
WSC606 | Additive Manufacturing for Product Development | 10 | 1 | OC |
WSC106 | Finite Element Analysis | 10 | 2 | OD |
WSC802 | Computation Fluid Dynamics 1 | 10 | 2 | OD |
MPC012 | Polymer Engineering - Processing & Manufacture | 10 | 2 | OD |
WSC101 | Vibration and Noise | 10 | 2 | OE |
WSC105 | Kinematics and Dynamics of Machinery | 10 | 2 | OE |
MPC014 | Materials in Service | 10 | 2 | OF |
WSC301 | Computer Aided Engineering | 10 | 2 | OF |
WSC800 | Internal Combustion Engines | 20 | 2 | OF |
WSC803 | Ballistics and Rocket Propulsion | 10 | 2 | OF |
MPC102 | Fracture and Failure | 10 | 2 | OF |
WSC911 | Industrial Machine Vision | 10 | 2 | OG |
All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.
4.5 Studies Overseas
Students may choose to study Semester 1 (only) during their Part D, at an approved Overseas Higher Education Institution. The mix of subjects of the learning programme must first be approved by the programme director for their course. An acceptable learning programme should, where possible, include a group project and studies at an advanced/masters level.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to Part C and be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates' final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and Part C in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each part will be combined in the ratio Part B - 40 : Part C - 60 to determine the degree classification.
Programme Specification
MM BEng (Hons) Engineering Management (2018 and 2019 Entry)
Academic Year: 2019/20
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET) Institution of Mechanical Engineers (IMechE) |
Final award | BEng / BEng + DPS / BEng + DIS / BEng + DInts |
Programme title | Engineering Management |
Programme code | WSUB04 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is 6 semesters, or 8 semesters if students undertake the additional period of study, between Parts B and C, leading to the award of the Diploma of Industrial Studies, Diploma of Professional Studies or the Diploma of International Studies. |
UCAS code | N290/N291 |
Admissions criteria | BSc - BSc + DPS/DIntS - |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
This programme is aimed at:
- A1. Educating engineering management graduates ready to play a substantial role in industrial companies through a substantive base of knowledge and understanding at the forefront of the discipline of engineering and manufacturing.
- A2. Providing a foundation for graduates wishing to progress to professional engineering management status.
- A3. Providing a high quality educational experience for students in a programme of study which combines wide ranging aspects of engineering design and technologies, management models and methodologies, marketing, finance, and business in engineering.
- A4. Preparing graduates to apply organisational and project management, team building, and leadership skills in engineering.
- A5. Developing analytical and transferable skills that will enable graduates to gain employment in a wide variety of professional roles and to take an ethical approach in making a valuable contribution to society.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
-
UK Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education (QAA) – ‘Subject Benchmark Statement for Engineering’, (Feb.2015).
-
Engineering Council (UK). ‘UK-SPEC, UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence’, 3rd Edition, Jan.2014.
-
Engineering Council (UK). ‘The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes’, 3rd Edition, May 2014.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
- K1. the engineering principles and their application to the analysis of key engineering processes;
- K2. the application of quantitative, analytical, modelling and computational methods in order to identify, classify and describe the performance of systems and components and to solve engineering problems and to implement appropriate actions;
- K3. the requirement for engineering activities to promote sustainable development and the application of quantitative techniques where appropriate;
- K4. working with information that may be incomplete or uncertain and quantify the effect of this on the design;
- K5. the evaluation of business, customer and user needs, including considerations such as the wider engineering context, public perception and aesthetics;
- K6. the engineering and business problems, identifying any constraints including environmental and sustainability limitations; ethical, health, safety, security and risk issues, intellectual property; codes of practice and standards;
- K7. the commercial, economic and social context of engineering processes;
- K8. the management techniques, including project management, that may be used to achieve engineering objectives, including the planning and managing the design process, including cost drivers, and evaluate outcomes;
- K9. awareness of relevant legal requirements governing engineering activities, including personnel, health & safety, contract, intellectual property rights, product safety and liability issues;
- K10. the risk issues, including health & safety, environmental and commercial risk, and risk assessment and risk management techniques.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- C1. appreciate the broad range of influences and activities within the engineering processes and explain their significance;
- C2. evaluate technical and commercial risk and make decision based on available information;
- C3. address human factors considerations in engineering processes and design;
- C4. analyse engineering problems to assist in the management of engineering processes;
- C5. identify solutions to engineering problems from a sustainable/environmental standpoint;
- C6. contribute to the innovation development of a new product and its introduction to the market.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- P1. use the design and manufacturing processes to plan and manage engineering projects;
- P2. plan and implement re-organisation of a company for increased effectiveness;
- P3. make effective use of graphical and modelling techniques for design development and communication;
- P4. adopt strategies for non-quantifiable engineering issues;
- P5. select suitable computer based techniques for engineering management problems;
- P6. generate new ideas and develop and evaluate a range of solutions;
- P7. knowledge of characteristics of particular materials, equipment, processes or products;
- P8. knowledge of relevant legal and contractual issues;
- P9. understanding of appropriate codes of practice and industry standards;
- P10. awareness of quality issues and their application to continuous improvement;
- P11. understanding of, and the ability to work in, different roles within an engineering team.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able:
- T1. plan and monitor multi-disciplinary projects;
- T2. appreciate the central role of management within engineering;
- T3. communicate effectively and make presentations of a technical/business nature to achieve maximum impact;
- T4. identify methods to assist in innovation, team-working and engineering communication;
- T5. demonstrate competence in using computer based engineering techniques;
- T6. adopt systematic approach to integrating design requirements, materials and structures;
- T7. use time and resources effectively;
- T8. exercise initiative and personal responsibility, which may be as a team member or leader.
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A – Introductory Modules
Code | Title | Modular Weight | Semester | C/O |
MAA307 | Engineering Mathematics | 20 | 1+2 | C |
WSA102 | Engineering Science 1 | 20 | 1+2 | C |
WSA604 | Materials & Manufacturing Processes | 20 | 1+2 | C |
BSA505 | Organisational Behaviour | 10 | 1 | C |
WSA400 | Application of CAD for Engineering Designers | 10 | 1 | C |
WSA501 | Integrating Studies 1a | 10 | 1 | C |
WSA210 | Manufacturing Management | 10 | 2 | C |
WSA504 | Integrating Studies 1b | 10 | 2 | C |
WSA900 | Electronics and Electrical Technology | 10 | 2 | C |
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
Code | Title | Modular Weight | Semester | C/O |
WSB600 | Manufacturing Process and Technology | 20 | 1+2 | C |
BSB030 | Marketing | 10 | 1 | C |
WSB201 | Digital Manufacturing and Discrete Event Simulation | 10 | 1 | C |
WSB310 | Engineering and Management Modelling | 10 | 1 | C |
WSB505 | Manufacturing Design | 10 | 1 | C |
WSB610 | Manufacturing Technology | 10 | 1 | C |
BSB135 | Consumer Behaviour | 10 | 2 | C |
MAB206 | Statistics | 10 | 2 | C |
WSB301 | Software Engineering | 10 | 2 | C |
WSB203 | Manufacturing Planning and Control | 10 | 2 | C |
WSB204 | Management of the Human Resource | 10 | 2 | C |
4.3 Part I – Optional Placement Year
Code | Title |
WSI010 | Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS) (non-credit bearing) |
WSI020 | Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) (non-credit bearing) |
WSI035 | Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) (non-credit bearing) |
For candidates who are registered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS), Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) or Diploma in International Studies (DintS), Part I will be followed between Parts B and C and will be in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XI and Regulation XX.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
Students MUST choose ONE optional module (10 credits).
Code | Title | Modular Weight | Semester | C/O |
WSC500 | Individual Project | 40 | 1+2 | C |
WSC200 | Engineering Management: Finance Law and Quality | 10 | 1 | C |
WSC201 | Organisational Structure & Strategy | 10 | 1 | C |
WSC602 | Sustainable Manufacturing | 10 | 1 | C |
WSD207 | Project Management | 10 | 1 | C |
WSC206 | Product Innovation Management | 10 | 2 | C |
WSD203 | Lean Operations and Supply Chain Management | 10 | 2 | C |
WSD407 | Sustainable Product Design | 10 | 2 | C |
WSC300 | Product Information System - Computer Aided Design | 10 | 2 | O |
WSC603 | Metrology | 10 | 2 | O |
WSC610 | Healthcare Engineering | 10 | 2 | O |
WSC700 | Sports Engineering | 10 | 2 | O |
All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.
4.5 Study Overseas
Students may choose to study Part C – Semester 1 at an approved Overseas Higher Education Institution. The mix of subjects of the learning programme must be approved in advance by the Programme Director. The proposed programme of learning will include work on an Individual Project.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to Part C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Part B and Part C, in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The overall average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 40: Part C 60, to determine the degree classification.
Programme Specification
MM BSc/BEng (Hons) Engineering Management (Students undertaking Part C in 2019)
Academic Year: 2019/20
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET) Institution of Mechanical Engineers (IMechE) |
Final award | BSc / BSc + DPS / BSc + DIS / BSc + DInts / BEng / BEng + DPS / BEng + DIS / BEng + DInts |
Programme title | Engineering Management |
Programme code | WSUB04 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is 6 semesters, or 8 semesters if students undertake the additional period of study, between Parts B and C, leading to the award of the Diploma of Industrial Studies, Diploma of Professional Studies or the Diploma of International Studies. |
UCAS code | N290/N291 |
Admissions criteria | BSc - BSc + DPS/DIntS - |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
This programme is aimed at:
- A1. Educating engineering management graduates ready to play a substantial role in industrial companies through a substantive base of knowledge and understanding at the forefront of the discipline of engineering and manufacturing.
- A2. Providing a foundation for graduates wishing to progress to professional engineering management status.
- A3. Providing a high quality educational experience for students in a programme of study which combines wide ranging aspects of engineering design and technologies, management models and methodologies, marketing, finance, and business in engineering.
- A4. Preparing graduates to apply organisational and project management, team building, and leadership skills in engineering.
- A5. Developing analytical and transferable skills that will enable graduates to gain employment in a wide variety of professional roles and to take an ethical approach in making a valuable contribution to society.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
-
UK Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education (QAA) – ‘Subject Benchmark Statement for Engineering’, (Feb.2015).
-
Engineering Council (UK). ‘UK-SPEC, UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence’, 3rd Edition, Jan.2014.
-
Engineering Council (UK). ‘The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes’, 3rd Edition, May 2014.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
- K1. engineering principles and the ability to apply them to analyse key engineering processes;
- K2. ability to apply quantitative, analytical, modelling and computational methods in order to identify, classify and describe the performance of systems and components and to solve engineering problems and to implement appropriate actions;
- K3. requirement for engineering activities to promote sustainable development and ability to apply quantitative techniques where appropriate;
- K4. ability to work with information that may be incomplete or uncertain and quantify the effect of this on the design;
- K5. ability to evaluate business, customer and user needs, including considerations such as the wider engineering context, public perception and aesthetics;
- K6. engineering and business problems, identifying any constraints including environmental and sustainability limitations; ethical, health, safety, security and risk issues, intellectual property; codes of practice and standards;
- K7. commercial, economic and social context of engineering processes;
- K8. management techniques, including project management, that may be used to achieve engineering objectives, including the planning and managing the design process, including cost drivers, and evaluate outcomes;
- K9. relevant legal requirements governing engineering activities, including personnel, health & safety, contract, intellectual property rights, product safety and liability issues;
- K10. risk issues, including health & safety, environmental and commercial risk, and risk assessment and risk management techniques.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- C1. understand the broad range of influences and activities within the engineering processes and explain their significance;
- C2. evaluate technical and commercial risk and make decision based on available information;
- C3. address human factors considerations in engineering processes and design;
- C4. analyse engineering problems to assist in the management of engineering processes;
- C5. identify solutions to engineering problems from a sustainable/environmental standpoint;
- C6. contribute to the innovation development of a new product and its introduction to the market.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- P1. use the design and manufacturing processes to plan and manage engineering projects;
- P2. plan and implement re-organisation of a company for increased effectiveness;
- P3. make effective use of graphical and modelling techniques for design development and communication;
- P4. adopt strategies for non-quantifiable engineering issues;
- P5. select suitable computer based techniques for engineering management problems;
- P6. generate new ideas and develop and evaluate a range of solutions;
- P7. knowledge of characteristics of particular materials, equipment, processes or products;
- P8. knowledge of relevant legal and contractual issues;
- P9. understanding of appropriate codes of practice and industry standards;
- P10. awareness of quality issues and their application to continuous improvement;
- P11. understanding of, and the ability to work in, different roles within an engineering team.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able:
- T1. plan and monitor multi-disciplinary projects;
- T2. appreciate the central role of management within engineering;
- T3. communicate effectively and make presentations of a technical/business nature to achieve maximum impact;
- T4. identify methods to assist in innovation, team-working and engineering communication;
- T5. demonstrate competence in using computer based engineering techniques;
- T6. adopt systematic approach to integrating design requirements, materials and structures;
- T7. use time and resources effectively;
- T8. exercise initiative and personal responsibility, which may be as a team member or leader.
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A – Introductory Modules
Code | Title | Modular Weight | Semester | C/O |
MAA307 | Engineering Mathematics | 20 | 1+2 | C |
MMA102 | Engineering Science | 20 | 1+2 | C |
MMA604 | Materials & Manufacturing Processes | 20 | 1+2 | C |
MMA505 | Organisational Behaviour | 10 | 1 | C |
MMA400 | Manufacturing Design 1 | 10 | 1 | C |
MMA501 | Integrating Studies 1a | 10 | 1 | C |
MMA210 | Manufacturing Management | 10 | 2 | C |
MMA504 | Integrating Studies 1b | 10 | 2 | C |
MMA900 | Electronics and Electrical Technology | 10 | 2 | C |
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
Code | Title | Modular Weight | Semester | C/O |
WSB600 | Manufacturing Process and Technology | 20 | 1+2 | C |
BSB030 | Marketing | 10 | 1 | C |
BSB580 | Operations Management | 10 | 1 | C |
WSB310 | Engineering Management and Modelling | 10 | 1 | C |
WSB505 | Manufacturing Design | 10 | 1 | C |
WSB610 | Manufacturing Technology | 10 | 1 | C |
BSB135 | Consumer Behaviour | 10 | 2 | C |
MAB206 | Statistics | 10 | 2 | C |
WSB301 | Software Engineering | 10 | 2 | C |
WSB203 | Manufacturing Planning and Control | 10 | 2 | C |
WSB204 | Management of the Human Resource | 10 | 2 | C |
4.3 Part I – Optional Placement Year
Code | Title |
WSI010 | DIS Industrial Placement (non-credit bearing) |
WSI020 | DPS Industrial Placement (non-credit bearing) |
WSI035 | DIntS Industrial Placement (non-credit bearing) |
For candidates who are registered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS), Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) or Diploma in International Studies (DintS), Part I will be followed between Parts B and C and will be in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XI and Regulation XX.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
Students MUST choose ONE optional module (10 credits).
Code | Title | Modular Weight | Semester | C/O |
WSC500 | Individual Project | 40 | 1+2 | C |
WSC200 | Engineering Management: Finance, Law and Quality | 10 | 1 | C |
WSC201 | Organisational Structure & Strategy | 10 | 1 | C |
WSC602 | Sustainable Manufacturing | 10 | 1 | C |
WSD207 | Project Management | 10 | 1 | C |
WSC206 | Product Innovation Management | 10 | 2 | C |
WSD203 | Lean Operations and Supply Chain Management | 10 | 2 | C |
WSD407 | Sustainable Product Design | 10 | 2 | C |
WSC300 | Product Information System - Computer Aided Design | 10 | 2 | O |
WSC603 | Metrology | 10 | 2 | O |
WSC610 | Healthcare Engineering | 10 | 2 | O |
WSC700 | Sports Engineering | 10 | 2 | O |
All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.
4.5 Study Overseas
Students may choose to study Part C – Semester 1 at an approved Overseas Higher Education Institution. The mix of subjects of the learning programme must be approved in advance by the Programme Director. The proposed programme of learning will include work on an Individual Project.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to Part C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX.
Students may choose to receive the award of BSc or BEng.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Part B and Part C, in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The overall average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 40: Part C 60, to determine the degree classification.
Programme Specification
MM BSc/BEng (Hons) Sports Technology (2018 Entry)
Academic Year: 2019/20
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET) Institution of Engineering Designers (IED) |
Final award | BSc / BSc + DIS / BSc + DPS / BEng / BEng + DIS / BEng + DPS |
Programme title | Sports Technology |
Programme code | WSUB05 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is 6 semesters, or 8 semesters if students undertake the additional period of study, normally between Parts B and C, leading to the award of the Diploma in Industrial Studies, the Diploma in Professional Studies, or the Diploma of International Studies. |
UCAS code | CH67/HC76 |
Admissions criteria | BSc - BSc + DPS/DIntS - |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
Sports Technology programme aims to:
- A1. Develop graduates with a detailed knowledge and understanding of sport-related product design, manufacture and test, human performance and business studies.
- A2. Develop graduates with the ability to conduct research and design in sports technology and solve associated problems using both established and contemporary ideas and techniques.
- A3. Produce graduates with the analytical and transferable skills that will enable employment in a wide variety of professions and to make a valuable contribution to society.
- A4. Support graduates to manage their own learning, communicate effectively and make use of primary source materials.
- A5. Provide graduates with an appreciation of the essential practical, commercial and broader societal aspects of engineering.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
-
UK Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education (QAA) – ‘Subject Benchmark Statement for Engineering’, (Feb.2015).
-
Engineering Council (UK). ‘UK-SPEC, UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence’, 3rd Edition, Jan.2014.
-
Engineering Council (UK). ‘The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes’, 3rd Edition, May 2014.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
- K1. the underpinning science, mathematics and other disciplines associated with careers related to the design of sports / engineering equipment;
- K2. the characteristics of engineering materials, equipment and processes and an awareness of basic mechanical workshop practices;
- K3. the role of instrumentation and measurement techniques within equipment evaluation and experimental protocol design;
- K4. principles of industrial design, engineering design and manufacturing design;
- K5. ergonomic and aesthetic considerations and how they impact on sports design;
- K6. the variability in human performance capability and methods of evaluation including fitness and training principles relating to sport and exercise;
- K7. principles governing the mechanics and biomechanics of sports movements;
- K8. the role of information technology in providing support of product design and manufacturing;
- K9. management techniques and business practices and the commercial and economic context of a sports / engineering business;
- K10. intellectual property issues and environmental, legal and ethical issues within the modern industrial world.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able:
- C1. identify and define a design or sports engineering problem and generate innovative solutions;
- C2. analyse, objectively evaluate and apply the principles of industrial design, and engineering design;
- C3. utilise the principles of engineering science in the development of solutions to problems;
- C4. apply appropriate methods to model such solutions;
- C5. apply biomechanics to the analysis of movement in sport;
- C6. demonstrate an awareness of form, function, fit, aesthetics, environment and safety;
- C7. select and apply appropriate IT tools to product design and manufacture problems;
- C8. evaluate commercial risk and market trends within the sports sector
- C9. apply general marketing principles to the sports sector.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able:
- P1. research information, generate and evaluate product design ideas;
- P2. communicate design ideas through the presentation of concept drawings, computer graphics and conventional sketching;
- P3. prepare engineering drawings and technical reports;
- P4. test design concepts via practical investigation;
- P5. use appropriate computer software and laboratory equipment;
- P6. use measurement and test equipment to complete experimental laboratory work and collect mechanical and biomechanical data;
- P7. use a variety of observation and test methods to appraise human function and movement
- P8. present technical and business information in a variety of ways;
- P9. manage the design process taking account of customer constraints such as cost, health and safety, risk and environmental issues.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able:
- T1. generate and manipulate data;
- T2. apply creative, structured and evidence-based approaches to problem solving;
- T3. communicate effectively through written, graphical, interpersonal and presentation skills;
- T4. organise and manage time and resources to meet deadlines;
- T5. work effectively both in a team and independently;
- T6. demonstrate organisational and management skills.
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
MAA307 | Engineering Mathematics | 20 | 1+2 | C |
WSA401 | Product Design (Ergonomics & Visualisation) | 20 | 1+2 | C |
WSA502 | Applied Sports Technology 1 | 20 | 1+2 | C |
WSA400 | Application of CAD for Engineering Designers | 10 | 1 | C |
WSA602 | Introduction to Materials and Manufacturing Processes | 10 | 1 | C |
PSA028 | Biomechanics of Sport | 10 | 1 | C |
WSA700 | Measurement Principles | 10 | 2 | C |
WSA701 | Mechanical Design in Sport | 10 | 2 | C |
WSA900 | Electronic and Electrical Technology 1 | 10 | 2 | C |
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
WSB302 | Engineering Computation for Sports Technology | 20 | 1+2 | C |
WSB502 | Applied Sports Technology 2 | 20 | 1+2 | C |
WSB503 | Application of Product Design in Sports | 20 | 1+2 | C |
BSB520 | Principles of Marketing for Sport and Leisure | 10 | 1 | C |
WSB700 | Sports Goods Design, Manufacturing and Test | 10 | 1 | C |
WSB701 | Measurement and Experimental Design | 10 | 1 | C |
MAB206 | Statistics | 10 | 2 | C |
PSB002 | Structural Kinesiology | 10 | 2 | C |
PSB028 | Methods of Analysis in Sports Biomechanics | 10 | 2 | C |
4.3 Part I – Optional Placement Year
Code | Title |
WSI010 | Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS) (non-credit bearing) |
WSI020 | Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) (non-credit bearing) |
For candidates who are registered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS) or Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS), Part I will be followed between Parts B and C and will be in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XI and Regulation XX.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
Students MUST choose 20 credits of optional modules (O) in Semester One, with no more than one module from each group.
Students MUST choose 30 credits of optional modules (O) in Semester Two, with no more than one module from each group.
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
WSC500 | Individual Project | 40 | 1+2 | C |
WSC200 | Engineering Management: Finance, Law and Quality | 10 | 1 | C |
WSC701 | Sports Surfaces, Footwear and Garments | 10 | 1 | C |
WSC702 | Sports Equipment Industry | 10 | 2 | C |
WSC600 | Advanced Manufacturing Processes and Technology 1 | 10 | 1 | OA |
WSC602 | Sustainable Manufacturing | 10 | 1 | OA |
WSC606 | Additive Manufacturing for Product Development | 10 | 1 | OA |
WSC201 | Organisation Structure & Strategy | 10 | 1 | OB |
WSC400 | Design for Assembly | 10 | 1 | OB |
WSC401 | Design Methods and Communication | 10 | 1 | OC |
PSC100 | Science and Elite Performance in Sport | 20 | 1+2 | OC |
PSC028 | Advanced Sports Biomechanics | 20 | 1+2 | OD |
WSC203 | Manufacturing Planning & Control | 10 | 2 | OE |
WSC204 | Management of the Human Resource | 10 | 2 | OE |
WSC300 | Product Information Systems - Computer Aided Design | 10 | 2 | OF |
MPC012 | Polymer Engineering - Processes and Manufacture | 10 | 2 | OF |
WSC610 | Healthcare Engineering | 10 | 2 | OF |
All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to Part C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX.
Students may choose to receive the award of BSc or BEng.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Part B and Part C in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The overall average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 40: Part C 60, to determine the degree classification.
Programme Specification
MM BSc/BEng (Hons) Sports Technology (Students undertaking Part C in 2019)
Academic Year: 2019/20
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET) Institution of Engineering Designers (IED) |
Final award | BSc / BSC + DIS / BSc + DPS / BSc DIntS / BEng / BEng + DIS / BEng + DPS / BEng DIntS |
Programme title | Sports Technology |
Programme code | WSUB05 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is 6 semesters, or 8 semesters if students undertake the additional period of study, normally between Parts B and C, leading to the award of the Diploma in Industrial Studies, the Diploma in Professional Studies, or the Diploma of International Studies. |
UCAS code | CH67/HC76 |
Admissions criteria | BSc - BSc + DPS/DIntS - |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The Sports Technology programme aims to:
- A1. Develop graduates with a detailed knowledge and understanding of sport-related product design, manufacture and test, human performance and business studies.
- A2. Develop graduates with the ability to conduct research and design in sports technology and solve associated problems using both established and contemporary ideas and techniques.
- A3. Produce graduates with the analytical and transferable skills that will enable employment in a wide variety of professions and to make a valuable contribution to society.
- A4. Support graduates to manage their own learning, communicate effectively and make use of primary source materials.
- A5. Provide graduates with an appreciation of the essential practical, commercial and broader societal aspects of engineering.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
-
UK Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education (QAA) – ‘Subject Benchmark Statement for Engineering’, (Feb.2015).
-
Engineering Council (UK). ‘UK-SPEC, UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence’, 3rd Edition, Jan.2014.
-
Engineering Council (UK). ‘The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes’, 3rd Edition, May 2014.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
- K1. the underpinning science, mathematics and other disciplines associated with careers related to the design of sports / engineering equipment;
- K2. characteristics of engineering materials, equipment and processes and an awareness of basic mechanical workshop practices;
- K3. the role of instrumentation and measurement techniques within equipment evaluation and experimental protocol design;
- K4. principles of industrial design, engineering design and manufacturing design;
- K5. ergonomic and aesthetic considerations and how they impact on sports design;
- K6. the variability in human performance capability and methods of evaluation including fitness and training principles relating to sport and exercise;
- K7. principles governing the mechanics and biomechanics of sports movements;
- K8. the role of information technology in providing support of product design and manufacturing;
- K9. management techniques and business practices and the commercial and economic context of a sports / engineering business;
- K10. intellectual property issues and environmental, legal and ethical issues within the modern industrial world.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able:
- C1. identify and define a design or sports engineering problem and generate innovative solutions;
- C2. analyse, objectively evaluate and apply the principles of industrial design, and engineering design;
- C3. utilise the principles of engineering science in the development of solutions to problems;
- C4. apply appropriate methods to model such solutions;
- C5. apply biomechanics to the analysis of movement in sport;
- C6. demonstrate an awareness of form, function, fit, aesthetics, environment and safety;
- C7. select and apply appropriate IT tools to product design and manufacture problems;
- C8. evaluate commercial risk and market trends within the sports sector
- C9. apply general marketing principles to the sports sector.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able:
- P1. research information, generate and evaluate product design ideas;
- P2. communicate design ideas through the presentation of concept drawings, computer graphics and conventional sketching;
- P3. prepare engineering drawings and technical reports;
- P4. test design concepts via practical investigation;
- P5. use appropriate computer software and laboratory equipment;
- P6. use measurement and test equipment to complete experimental laboratory work and collect mechanical and biomechanical data;
- P7. use a variety of observation and test methods to appraise human function and movement
- P8. present technical and business information in a variety of ways;
- P9. manage the design process taking account of customer constraints such as cost, health and safety, risk and environmental issues.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able:
- T1. generate and manipulate data;
- T2. apply creative, structured and evidence-based approaches to problem solving;
- T3. communicate effectively through written, graphical, interpersonal and presentation skills;
- T4. organise and manage time and resources to meet deadlines;
- T5. work effectively both in a team and independently;
- T6. demonstrate organisational and management skills.
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
MAA307 | Engineering Mathematics | 20 | 1+2 | C |
MMA401 | Product Design (Ergonomics & Visualisation) | 20 | 1+2 | C |
MMA502 | Applied Sports Technology 1 | 20 | 1+2 | C |
MMA400 | Manufacturing Design 1 | 10 | 1 | C |
MMA602 | Introduction to Materials and Manufacturing Processes | 10 | 1 | C |
PSA028 | Biomechanics of Sport | 10 | 1 | C |
MMA700 | Measurement Principles | 10 | 2 | C |
MMA701 | Mechanical Design in Sport | 10 | 2 | C |
MMA900 | Electronic and Electrical Technology 1 | 10 | 2 | C |
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
WSB302 | Engineering Computation for Sports Technology | 20 | 1+2 | C |
WSB502 | Applied Sports Technology 2 | 20 | 1+2 | C |
WSB503 | Application of Product Design for Sports | 20 | 1+2 | C |
BSB520 | Principles of Marketing for Sport & Leisure | 10 | 1 | C |
WSB700 | Sports Goods Design, Manufacturing and Test | 10 | 1 | C |
WSB701 | Measurement and Experimental Design | 10 | 1 | C |
MAB206 | Statistics | 10 | 2 | C |
PSB002 | Structural Kinesiology | 10 | 2 | C |
PSB028 | Methods of Analysis in Sports Biomechanics | 10 | 2 | C |
4.3 Part I – Optional Placement Year
Code | Title |
WSI010 | DIS Industrial Placement (non-credit bearing) |
WSI015 | Industrial Training Placement (DIS, non credit bearing) |
WSI020 | DPS Industrial Placement (non-credit bearing) |
WSI035 | DIntS Industrial Placement (non-credit bearing) |
For candidates who are registered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS), Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) or Diploma in International Studies (DintS), Part I will be followed between Parts B and C and will be in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XI and Regulation XX.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
Students MUST choose 20 credits of optional modules (O) in Semester One, with no more than one module from each group.
Students MUST choose 30 credits of optional modules (O) in Semester Two, with no more than one module from each group.
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
WSC500 | Individual Project | 40 | 1+2 | C |
WSC200 | Engineering Management: Finance, Law and Quality | 10 | 1 | C |
WSC701 | Sports Surfaces, Footwear and Garments | 10 | 1 | C |
WSC702 | Sports Equipment Industry | 10 | 2 | C |
WSC600 | Advanced Manufacturing Processes and Technology 1 | 10 | 1 | OA |
WSC602 | Sustainable Manufacturing | 10 | 1 | OA |
WSC606 | Additive Manufacturing for Product Development | 10 | 1 | OA |
WSC201 | Organisation Structure & Strategy | 10 | 1 | OB |
WSC400 | Design for Assembly | 10 | 1 | OB |
WSC401 | Design Methods and Communication | 10 | 1 | OC |
PSC100 | Science and Elite Performance in Sport | 20 | 1+2 | OC |
PSC028 | Advanced Sports Biomechanics | 20 | 1+2 | OD |
WSC203 | Manufacturing Planning & Control | 10 | 2 | OE |
WSC204 | Management of the Human Resource | 10 | 2 | OE |
WSC300 | Product Information Systems - Computer Aided Design | 10 | 2 | OF |
MPC012 | Polymer Engineering - Processes and Manufacture | 10 | 2 | OF |
WSC610 | Healthcare Engineering | 10 | 2 | OF |
All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to Part C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX.
Students may choose to receive the award of BSc or BEng.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Part B and Part C in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The overall average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 40: Part C 60, to determine the degree classification.
Programme Specification
EL BEng (Hons) Electronic and Electrical Engineering (2018 and 2019 Entry)
Academic Year: 2019/20
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET) |
Final award | BEng / BEng+DIS / BEng+DPS / BEng+DIntS |
Programme title | Electronic and Electrical Engineering |
Programme code | WSUB10 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is 6 semesters or 8 semesters if taken with the Diploma in Industrial Studies, Diploma in Professional Studies or Diploma in International Studies. The programme is only available on a full-time basis. |
UCAS code | H600, H604 |
Admissions criteria | BEng - BEng+DIS /DIntS - |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The BEng in Electronic and Electrical Engineering aims to:
- A1. Develop highly skilled graduates to pursue careers across the complete spectrum of activities which involve the application of Electronic and Electrical Engineering;
- A2. Provide a high-quality learning experience across a complete range of core subjects in order to give students the skills to investigate electronic and electrical engineering problems;
- A3. Develop engineers capable of designing systems and managing the development process in order to deliver solutions that meet the requirements of customers;
- A4. Produce engineers knowledgeable of engineering management and business practices and of relevant ethical, business, sustainability and legal constraints;
- A5. Promote high-quality engineering practice by applying appropriate knowledge, skills, tools and techniques in the analysis, diagnosis and solution of industry-related problems;
- A6. Support personal and professional development including problem solving, leadership and team work, both oral and written presentation skills.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence: Engineering Technician, Incorporated Engineer and Chartered Engineer Standard, Engineering Council UK, 3rd edition, 2013.
- UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence: The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes, Engineering Council UK, 3rd edition, 2014.
- Guidance Note on Academic Accreditation: Engineering Council UK, July 2014.
- The UK Quality Code for Higher Education: The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, April 2012.
- Subject Benchmark Statement: Engineering: The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, November 2010.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- K1. Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of scientific, mathematical and engineering principles appropriate to electronic and electrical engineering;
- K2. Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of general engineering principles;
- K3. Understand the commercial, economic and sustainable aspects in the application of engineering processes;
- K4. Demonstrate awareness of the relevant codes of practice and regulatory frameworks and the operational practices for safe operation of engineering processes;
- K5. Show knowledge of the management and business practices appropriate to engineering industries;
- K6. Recognise the professional and ethical responsibilities of engineers.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- C1. Apply engineering principles to the analysis of electronic and electrical engineering problems;
- C2. Apply mathematical and computer-based methods for modelling and analysing a range of practical and hypothetical engineering processes, components and products;
- C3. Investigate and define engineering problems within the framework of economic, social, ethical and environmental issues;
- C4. Evaluate and respond to customer needs, including fitness for purpose and cost;
- C5. Follow essential design principles appropriate to relevant components, equipment and associated software.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- P1. Apply design, modelling, simulation and analytical methods and tools appropriate to electronic and electrical engineering;
- P2. Define and solve practical engineering problems;
- P3. Demonstrate an ability to manage the design process;
- P4. Use conventional laboratory equipment and relevant test and measurement equipment in an appropriate and safe manner;
- P5. Apply relevant codes of practice and industry standards;
- P6. Demonstrate awareness of contractual issues and intellectual property rights;
- P7. Work with technical uncertainty;
- P8. Adopt a suitable systems engineering approach to the solution of electronic and electrical engineering problems;
- P9. Use appropriate management tools for project work.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- T1. Search and retrieve information, ideas and data from a variety of sources;
- T2. Select and analyse appropriate evidence and data to solve problems;
- T3. Apply skills in problem solving, communication, team working and in the use of general software tools;
- T4. Develop a personal work plan and take responsibility for its execution, both independently and as a member of a team;
- T5. Produce appropriate technical reports, papers, diagrams and drawings;
- T6. Plan self-learning as the foundation for lifelong learning.
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A
Code |
Title |
Weight |
Semester |
C/O |
WSA015 |
Industrial Project in Electronic and Electrical Engineering |
20 |
1 + 2 |
C |
WSA011 |
Electronic Circuits |
20 |
1 |
C |
WSA010 |
Programming and Software Design |
20 |
1 |
C |
MAA103 |
Core Mathematics 1 |
10 |
1 |
C |
WSA012 |
Electrical Science A |
20 |
2 |
C |
WSA013 |
Digital Systems |
20 |
2 |
C |
MAA203 |
Core Mathematics 2 |
10 |
2 |
C |
4.2 Part B
Code |
Title |
Weight |
Semester |
C/O |
WSB013 |
Engineering Project Management |
20 |
1 + 2 |
C |
WSB003 |
Electrical Science B |
20 |
1 |
C |
WSB010 |
Electronics |
20 |
1 |
C |
MAB103 |
Advanced Mathematics 1 |
10 |
1 |
C |
WSB002 |
Communications |
20 |
2 |
C |
WSB004 |
Control System Design |
20 |
2 |
C |
MAB203 |
Advanced Mathematics 2 |
10 |
2 |
C |
4.3 Part I
Code | Title |
WSI010 | Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS) (Non-credit bearing) |
WSI020 | Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) (Non-credit bearing) |
WSI035 | Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) (Non-credit bearing) |
For candidates who are registered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS) or Diploma in International Studies (DintS), Part I will be followed between Parts B and C and will be in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XI and Regulation XX.
4.4 Part C
Candidates must choose two options ‘o’ from each semester
Code |
Title |
Weight |
Semester |
C/O |
WSC025 |
Project |
30 |
1 + 2 |
C |
WSC200 |
Engineering Management: Finance, Law and Quality |
10 |
1 |
C |
WSC002 |
Digital Communications Theory and Practice |
20 |
1 |
O |
WSC003 |
Sustainable & Renewable Energy Systems |
20 |
1 |
O |
WSC018 |
Embedded Systems Design and Implementation |
20 |
1 |
O |
WSC039 |
Microwave Communications |
20 |
1 |
O |
WSC041 |
Digital and State Space Control |
20 |
1 |
O |
WSC004 |
Computer Networks |
20 |
2 |
O |
WSC014 |
Bioelectricity and Biophotonics Engineering |
20 |
2 |
O |
WSC022 |
Power Electronics |
20 |
2 |
O |
WSC054 |
Electronic Systems Design with FPGAs |
20 |
2 |
O |
WSC055 |
Digital Interfacing and Instrumentation |
20 |
2 |
O |
All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, studnet number resctrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements and other provisions set out in Regulation XX.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
A candidate's final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments at Parts B and C in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 40: Part C 60 to determine the final Programme Mark.
Programme Specification
EL BEng (Hons) Electronic and Electrical Engineering (Students undertaking Part C in 2019)
Academic Year: 2019/20
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET)
|
Final award | BEng/ BEng+DIS |
Programme title | Electronic and Electrical Engineering |
Programme code | WSUB10 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is 6 semesters or 8 semesters if taken with the Diploma in Industrial Studies. The programme is only available on a full-time basis. |
UCAS code | H600, H604 |
Admissions criteria | |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The BEng in Electronic and Electrical Engineering aims to:
- A1. provide a programme of study producing graduates that are attractive to the electronic and electrical engineering industry;
- A2. ensure a high quality educational experience in which knowledge and skills are developed, to an appropriate level, as preparation for a career in that industry;
- A3. provide a broad, well-balanced degree programme in which analytical skills are developed over the full range of core subject areas. Equipping graduates from the programme for employment across all fields appropriate to electronic and electrical engineering;
- A4. support students ability to apply their knowledge and skills effectively to solve engineering problems;
- A5. develop analytical and transferable skills to enable students to gain employment in a wide variety of professions, thus helping graduates of the programme to make a valuable contribution to society;
- A6. maintain an up-to-date curriculum that is responsive to developments both in higher education and in industry, and in a manner which is informed by the School’s research activities;
- A7. develop students skills in teamwork, self–learning, planning and communication.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence: Engineering Technician, Incorporated Engineer and Chartered Engineer Standard, Engineering Council UK, 3rd edition, 2013.
UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence: The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes, Engineering Council UK, 3rd edition, 2014.
Guidance Note on Academic Accreditation, Engineering Council UK, 2014.
The UK Quality Code for Higher Education. The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, April 2012.
Subject Benchmark Statement: Engineering, The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, November 2010.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate a knowledge and understanding of:
- K1. essential mathematical methods appropriate to electronic and electrical engineering;
- K2. essential principles of engineering and/or systems science appropriate to electronic and electrical engineering;
- K3. the role of Information Technology and communications;
- K4. essential design principles appropriate to relevant components, equipment and associated software;
- K5. relevant common engineering materials and components;
- K6. management and business practices appropriate to engineering industries;
- K7. relevant codes of practice and regulatory frameworks;
- K8. basic operational practices and requirements for safe operation relevant to electronic and electrical engineering;
- K9. the professional and ethical responsibilities of engineers.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate:
- C1. an understanding of standard mathematical and/or computer based methods for modelling and analysing a range of practical and hypothetical engineering problems, and the essential principles of modelling and analysing routine engineering systems, processes, components and products;
- C2. a competence in defining and solving practical engineering problems;
- C3. the ability to integrate, evaluate and use information, data and ideas from a range of sources in to project work;
- C4. the ability to apply systems processes in a range of different engineering contexts.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- P1. use conventional laboratory equipment and relevant test and measurement equipment in a safe manner;
- P2. use computational tools and packages (including programming languages where appropriate) in familiar situations;
- P3. design, and where appropriate construct, systems, components or processes;
- P4. search for and retrieve information, ideas and data from a variety of sources;
- P5. manage a project and produce technical reports, papers, diagrams and drawings.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- T1. demonstrate skills in problem solving, communication, group working, use of general software and information retrieval, which act as a foundation for life-long learning;
- T2. use an engineering and/or systems approach to the solution of problems;
- T3. use appropriate management tools including management of time and resources;
- T4. select and analyse appropriate evidence/data to solve engineering problems;
- T5. work independently or in a team.
4. Programme structure
In the following tables, ‘c’ indicates a compulsory module and ‘o’ indicates an optional module. The optional modules ‘oA’ and ‘oB’ should be considered along with the text following the table in which they appear.
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
ELA004 | Signals and Systems | 10 | 1+2 | C |
ELA007 | Introduction to Systems Engineering for Projects | 20 | 1+2 | C |
MAA303 | Mathematics A | 20 | 1+2 | C |
ELA001 | Circuits | 20 | 1+2 | C |
ELA003 | Electronics A | 20 | 1+2 | C |
ELA010 | Introduction to Programming | 20 | 1+2 | C |
ELA005 | Electromagnetism A | 10 | 2 | C |
The 20 credit module ELA001 Circuits is taught over both semesters, 2/3 of the module is taught in Semester 1 and 1/3 in Semester 2.
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
WSB002 | Communications | 15 | 1+2 | C |
WSB003 | Electrical Science B | 15 | 1+2 | C |
WSB004 | Control System Design | 15 | 1+2 | C |
WSB010 | Electronics | 20 | 1+2 | C |
WSB013 | Engineering Project Management | 20 | 1+2 | C |
MAB303 | Mathematics B | 20 | 1+2 | C |
WSB012 | Renewable Energy Systems Analysis | 15 | 1+2 | O |
WSB014 | Software Engineering | 15 | 1+2 | O |
WSB019 | Computer Architecture | 15 | 1+2 | O |
WSB140 | Mechanics | 15 | 1+2 | O |
Students should take ONE of the optional (o) modules indicated.
4.3 Part C - Degree Modules
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
WSC008 | Business Management | 15 | 1+2 | C |
WSC025 | Project | 30 | 1+2 | C |
WSC002 | Principles of Digital Communications | 15 | 1+2 | O |
WSC003 | Renewable Energy Sources | 15 | 1+2 | O |
WSC004 | Computer Networks | 15 | 1+2 | O |
WSC007 | Electromagnetism C | 15 | 1+2 | O |
WSC013 | Electromagnetic Compatibility | 15 | 1+2 | O |
WSC014 | Biophotonics Engineering | 15 | 1+2 | O |
WSC018 | Real-Time Software Engineering | 15 | 1+2 | O |
WSC022 | Power Electronics for Renewables | 15 | 1+2 | O |
WSC030 | Bioelectricity - Fundamentals and Applications | 15 | 1+2 | O |
WSC039 | Microwave Communication Systems | 15 | 1+2 | O |
WSC041 | Digital and State Space Control | 15 | 1+2 | O |
WSC054 | Electronic System Design with FPGAs | 15 | 1+2 | O |
WSC055 | Digital Interfacing and Instrumentation | 15 | 1+2 | O |
WSC056 | Fundamentals of Digital Signal Processing | 15 | 1+2 | O |
DSC502 | Human Factors in Systems Design | 15 | 1+2 | O |
MPC022 | Materials Properties and Applications | 15 | 1+2 | O |
Option modules with a total weight of 75 credits should be chosen.
All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.
4.4 Part I - Industrial Training
For candidates who are registered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS) or Diploma in International Studies (DintS), Part I will be followed between Parts B and C and will be in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XI and Regulation XX.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 Criteria for programme progression
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to Part I or Part C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX.
5.2 Criteria for progression to an MEng programme
For candidates who commence study on the programme before October, 2016:
Any candidate who has accumulated, at the first attempt, 100 credits, no module mark less than 30% and an overall average mark of at least 55% from modules taken in Part A would normally be allowed to transfer to Part B of any MEng Electronic, Electrical and Systems Engineering programme administered by the Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering should they so wish.
Any candidate who has accumulated, at the first attempt, 100 credits, no module mark less than 30% and an overall average mark of at least 55% from modules taken in Part B would normally be allowed to transfer to the MEng Part C or Part I of their current programme of study should they so wish.
Such transfers are subject to the prerequisite requirements of the MEng programme.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
A candidate's final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments at Parts B and C in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 20: Part C 80 to determine the final Programme Mark.
Programme Specification
EL BEng (Hons) Systems Engineering (2018 Entry)
Academic Year: 2019/20
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET) |
Final award | BEng/ BEng+DIS/ BEng+DPS/ BEng+DIntS |
Programme title | Systems Engineering |
Programme code | WSUB20 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is 6 semesters or 8 semesters if taken with the Diploma in Industrial Studies. The programme is only available on a full-time basis. |
UCAS code | H652, H650 |
Admissions criteria | |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The BEng in Systems Engineering aims to
- A1. Prepare highly skilled graduates to pursue careers in Systems Engineering across a range of industries and activities involving the design, development, and analysis of complex systems
- A2. Provide a high-quality learning experience across a complete range of core subjects in order to give students the skills to investigate systems engineering problems.
- A3. Develop engineers capable of designing systems and managing the development process in order to deliver solutions that meet the requirements of customers.
- A4. Produce engineers knowledgeable of engineering management and business practices and of the relevant ethical, business, sustainability and legal constraints.
- A5. Promote high-quality engineering practice by applying appropriate knowledge, skills, tools and techniques in the analysis, diagnosis and solution of industry-related problems.
- A6. Support personal and professional development, including problem solving, leadership and team work and both oral and written presentation skills.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence: Engineering Technician, Incorporated Engineer and Chartered Engineer Standard, Engineering Council UK, 3rd edition, 2013.
- UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence: The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes, Engineering Council UK, 3rd edition, 2014.
- Guidance Note on Academic Accreditation: Engineering Council UK, July 2014.
- The UK Quality Code for Higher Education: The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, April 2012.
- Subject Benchmark Statement: Engineering: The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, November 2010.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- K1. Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of scientific, mathematical and engineering principles appropriate to systems engineering;
- K2. Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of general engineering principles;
- K3. Understand the commercial, economic and sustainable aspects in the application of engineering processes;
- K4. Demonstrate awareness of the relevant codes of practice and regulatory frameworks and the operational practices for safe operation of engineering processes;
- K5. Show knowledge of the management and business practices appropriate to engineering industries;
- K6. Recognise the professional and ethical responsibilities of engineers.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- C1. Apply engineering principles to the analysis of electronic and electrical engineering problems;
- C2. Apply mathematical and computer-based methods for modelling and analysing a range of practical and hypothetical engineering processes, components and products;
- C3. Investigate and define engineering problems within the framework of economic, social, ethical and environmental issues;
- C4. Evaluate and respond to customer needs, including fitness for purpose and cost;
- C5. Follow essential design principles appropriate to relevant components, equipment and associated software.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- P1. Apply design, modelling, simulation and analytical methods and tools appropriate to systems engineering;
- P2. Define and solve practical engineering problems;
- P3. Demonstrate an ability to manage the design process;
- P4. Use conventional laboratory equipment and relevant test and measurement equipment in an appropriate and safe manner;
- P5. Apply relevant codes of practice and industry standards;
- P6. Demonstrate awareness of contractual issues and intellectual property rights;
- P7. Work with technical uncertainty;
- P8. Use appropriate management tools for project work.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- T1. Search and retrieve information, ideas and data from a variety of sources;
- T2. Select and analyse appropriate evidence and data to solve problems;
- T3. Apply skills in problem solving, communication, team working and in the use of general software tools;
- T4. Develop a personal work plan and take responsibility for its execution, both independently and as a member of a team;
- T5. Produce appropriate technical reports, papers, diagrams and drawings;
- T6.Plan self-learning as the foundation for lifelong learning.
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A
Code |
Title |
Semester |
Modular Weight |
C/O |
WSA016 |
Industrial Project in Systems Engineering |
1 + 2 |
20 |
C |
WSA011 |
Electronic Circuits |
1 |
20 |
C |
WSA010 |
Introduction to Programming |
1 |
20 |
C |
MAA103 |
Core Mathematics 1 |
1 |
10 |
C |
WSA012 |
Electrical Science A |
2 |
20 |
C |
WSA013 |
Digital Systems |
2 |
20 |
C |
MAA203 |
Core Mathematics 2 |
2 |
10 |
C |
4.2 Part B
Candidates must choose one option ‘O’ from semester 1
Code |
Title |
Semester |
Modular Weight |
C/O |
WSB006 |
Systems Integration |
1 + 2 |
20 |
C |
WSB007 |
Systems Methods |
1 |
20 |
C |
MAB103 |
Advanced Mathematics 1 |
1 |
10 |
C |
WSB004 |
Control System Design |
2 |
20 |
C |
WSB009 |
Mobile Robots |
2 |
20 |
C |
MAB203 |
Advanced Mathematics 2 |
2 |
10 |
C |
WSB010 |
Electronics |
1 |
20 |
O |
WSB014 |
Embedded Systems Programming |
1 |
20 |
O |
WSB140 |
Mechanics for Robots |
1 |
20 |
O |
4.3 Part I
Code | Title |
WSI010 | Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS) (Non-credit bearing) |
WSI020 | Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) (Non-credit bearing) |
WSI035 | Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) (Non-credit bearing) |
For candidates who are registered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS), Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) or the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS), Part I will be followed between Parts B and C and will be in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XI and Regulation XX.
4.4 Part C
Candidates must choose one option ‘O’ from each semester
Code |
Title |
Semester |
Modular Weight |
C/O |
WSC025 |
Project |
1 + 2 |
30 |
C |
WSC200 |
Engineering Management: Finance, Law and Quality |
1 |
10 |
C |
DSC502 |
Human Factors in Systems Engineering |
1 |
10 |
C |
WSC012 |
Systems Engineering Applications |
1 |
10 |
C |
WSC013 |
Systems Architecture, Simulation and Modelling |
2 |
20 |
C |
WSC018 |
Embedded Systems Design and Implementation |
1 |
20 |
O |
WSC002 |
Digital Communications Theory and Practice |
1 |
20 |
O |
WSC003 |
Sustainable & Renewable Energy Systems |
1 |
20 |
O |
WSC041 |
Digital and State Space Control |
1 |
20 |
O |
WSC004 |
Computer Networks |
2 |
20 |
O |
WSC014 |
Bioelectricity and Biophotonics Engineering |
2 |
20 |
O |
WSC054 |
Electronic Systems Design with FPGAs |
2 |
20 |
O |
WSC055 |
Digital Interfacing and Instrumentation |
2 |
20 |
O |
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements and other provisions set out in Regulation XX.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
A candidate's final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments at Parts B and C in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 40: Part C 60 to determine the final Programme Mark.
Programme Specification
EL BEng (Hons) Systems Engineering (Students undertaking Part C in 2019)
Academic Year: 2019/20
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body |
|
Final award | BEng / BEng + DIS |
Programme title | Systems Engineering |
Programme code | WSUB20 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is 6 semesters or 8 semesters if taken with the Diploma in Industrial Studies. The programme is only available on a full-time basis. |
UCAS code | H652, H650 |
Admissions criteria | BEng - BEng + DPS/DIS - |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The BEng in Systems Engineering aims to:
- A1. provide a programme of study producing graduate system engineering practitioners that are capable of gaining employment across a range of military and civilian sectors, working in domains as varied as engineering, manufacturing, transport, energy, commerce, financial, health etc where the development and operation of complex systems and systems of systems is a prime requisite;
- A2. ensure a high quality educational experience in which knowledge and skills are developed, to an appropriate level, as a preparation for a career in those sectors;
- A3. provide a broad, well-balanced degree programme in which research, analytical and practical skills are developed over the full range of core subject areas thus equipping graduates of the programme for employment as systems engineering practitioners across all fields appropriate to this area of engineering;
- A4. provide a range of contexts in which the students can, individually and in groups, apply the knowledge, skills, tools and techniques taught to analyse, diagnose and solve system problems and failures across different types of complex systems and system of systems in a range of domains;
- A5. develop transferable skills such as the ability to create concise technical reports, oral and written presentation skills, team-working, IT skills, critical thinking, problem solving and decision making skills etc which will enable graduates of the Programme to gain employment in a wide variety of professions, thus enabling them to make a valuable contribution to society;
- A6. Maintain an up-to-date curriculum that is responsive to developments in the delivery of higher education curricula, continues to meet the needs of industry and commerce and which is informed by the School’s on-going research activities;
- A7. Create an external interface between the students and their potential employers by the use of external lecturers where appropriate, involvement of industry and commerce in group and individual projects, School forums to channel advice and input on the curriculum content etc.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence; Engineering Technician, Incorporated Engineer and Chartered Engineer Standard, Engineering Council UK, 3rd edition, 2013.
UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence; The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes, Engineering Council UK, 3rd edition, 2014.
Guidance Note on Academic Accreditation, Engineering Council UK, 2014.
The UK Quality Code for Higher Education. The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, April 2012.
Subject Benchmark Statement: Engineering, The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, November 2010.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate a knowledge and understanding of:
- K1. the nature of systems and systems thinking and SE concepts and terminology;
- K2. the form and value of SE-based techniques, methods and methodologies and their use in the development and evaluation of complex systems and systems of systems (SoS) in a range of engineering/commercial domains;
- K3. the provenance and theory behind a range of systems and systems engineering tools, methods and processes;
- K4. the need for an integrated systems approach using appropriate and timely configurations of systems engineering methods, tools and processes;
- K5. the importance of integrating Requirements Specification, Systems Design and Validation and Verification approaches along the whole systems life cycle;
- K6. an overview of the importance of Systems Architecting approaches and models;
- K7. essential mathematical methods appropriate to the area of engineering;
- K8. essential appropriate principles of engineering and/or systems science;
- K9. the role of information technology and communications;
- K10. knowledge and information management techniques;
- K11. essential design principles appropriate to relevant components, equipment and associated software;
- K12. relevant common engineering materials and components;
- K13. management and business practices appropriate to engineering industries;
- K14. relevant codes of practice and regulatory frameworks;
- K15. basic operational practices and requirements for safe operation relevant to electronic and electrical engineering;
- K16. the professional and ethical responsibilities of engineers.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate:
- C1. an ability to apply a systems engineering approach to engineering, problem structuring and problem solving;
- C2. a capability to select and apply different systems engineering tools, methods and processes based on both an understanding of the theory behind the tools and an appreciation of their functionality and applicability to the system context;
- C3. an understanding of standard mathematical and/or computer based methods for modelling and analysing a range of practical and hypothetical engineering problems, and the essential principles of modelling and analysing routine engineering systems, processes, components and products;
- C4. an understanding of a range of areas dependent on modules studied eg control techniques used in industry, aeronautical considerations of aircraft design and performance, different renewable energy generation technologies, human factors in systems design etc.
- C5. a competence in defining and solving practical engineering problems;
- C6. the ability to integrate, evaluate and use information, data and ideas from a range of sources in their project work;
- C7. the ability to develop and apply system engineering processes in a range of different engineering contexts.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- P1. develop a viable systems engineering approach to the development of complex systems and systems of systems in a range of engineering and commercial environments;
- P2. analyse and identify a problem space, extract and formalize a requirements specification for a system of interest and select and apply appropriate systems engineering design / validation and verification methods within a defined systems engineering process along the whole system lifecycle;
- P3. use conventional laboratory equipment and relevant test and measurement equipment in a safe manner;
- P4. use computational tools and packages (including programming and modelling languages where appropriate) in familiar situations;
- P5. design, and where appropriate construct, systems, components or processes;
- P7. search for, locate, retrieve and reference correctly information, ideas and data from a variety of sources;
- P8. manage a project and the inherent technical and project management risks, and produce technical reports, papers, diagrams and drawings.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- T1. Self-management : Readiness to accept responsibility, flexibility, resilience, self-starting, appropriate assertiveness, time management, readiness to improve own performance based on feedback/reflective learning;
- T2. Team-working: Respecting others, co-operating, negotiating/persuading, contributing to discussions, interpersonal skills and awareness of interdependence with others;
- T3. Leadership: project and group management, delegation v control, verbal and written communication, creativity, problem solving and financial/time/risk management;
- T4. Analysis and investigation: use of tools and techniques to gather and analyse information systematically to aid decision-making and critical thinking skills;
- T5. Business and customer awareness: Basic understanding of the key drivers for business success – including the importance of innovation and taking calculated risks – and the need to provide customer satisfaction and build customer loyalty;
- T7. Problem solving: Analysing facts and situations and applying creative thinking to develop appropriate solutions;
- T8. Communication and literacy: Application of literacy, ability to produce clear, structured written work and oral literacy – including listening and questioning;
- T9. Positive attitude: A ‘can-do’ approach, self- motivation, a readiness to take part and contribute, openness to new ideas and a drive to make these happen;
- T10. Entrepreneurship and enterprise: Broadly, an ability to demonstrate an innovative approach, creativity, collaboration and risk taking. An individual with these attributes can make a huge difference to any business;
- T11. IT and networks: programming and application development, databases, modeling software, spreadsheets, word processing, graphics and multi- media;
- T12. Risk Management and mitigation.
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
Code |
Title |
Weight |
Semester |
C/O |
ELA005 |
Electromagnetism A |
10 |
2 |
C |
ELA004 |
Signals and Systems |
10 |
1+2 |
C |
ELA007 |
Introduction to Systems Engineering for Projects |
20 |
1+2 |
C |
MAA303 |
Mathematics A |
20 |
1+2 |
C |
ELA001 |
Circuits |
20 |
1+2 |
C |
ELA003 |
Electronics A |
20 |
1+2 |
C |
ELA010 |
Programming and Software Design |
20 |
1+2 |
C |
The 20 credit module ELA001 Circuits is taught over both semesters, 2/3 of the module is taught in Semester 1 and 1/3 in Semester 2.
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
WSB004 | Control System Design | 15 | 1+2 | C |
WSB006 | Systems Integration | 20 | 1+2 | C |
WSB007 | Systems Methods | 20 | 1+2 | C |
WSB008 | Aircraft Design | 15 | 1+2 | C |
MAB303 | Mathematics B | 20 | 1+2 | C |
WSB002 | Communications | 15 | 1+2 | O |
WSB003 | Electromechanical Systems | 15 | 1+2 | O |
WSB140 | Mechanics | 15 | 1+2 | O |
Students should take two of the optional (o) modules indicated.
4.3 Part C - Degree Modules
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
WSC012 | Systems Engineering Applications Theory | 15 | 1+2 | C |
DSC502 | Human Factors in Systems Design C | 15 | 1+2 | C |
MPC022 | Materials Properties and Applications | 15 | 1+2 | C |
WSC025 | Project | 30 | 1+2 | C |
WSC003 | Renewable Energy Sources | 15 | 1+2 | OA |
WSC007 | Electromagnetism C | 15 | 1+2 | OA |
WSC008 | Business Management | 15 | 1+2 | OA |
WSC013 | Electromagnetic Compatibility | 15 | 1+2 | OA |
WSC014 | Biophotonics Engineering | 15 | 1+2 | OA |
WSC030 | Bioelectricity - Fundamentals and Applications | 15 | 1+2 | OA |
WSC041 | Digital State Space Control | 15 | 1+2 | OA |
WSC056 | Fundamentals of Digital Signal Processing | 15 | 1+2 | OA |
XXXXXX | Optional Choice from University Catalogue | 30 | 1+2 | OB |
Optional modules to a total modular weight of 30 may be chosen from those offered by Schools comprising Engineering, Design or Science Departments. Students choosing optional modules from the University Catalogue should also choose at least one option from those listed oA. Modules are restricted to Part C level.
Total modular weight for the year is 120, which should be arranged as near to 60 per semester as possible. Different semester weightings are allowed subject to the approval of the Programme Director.
All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.
4.4 Part I - Industrial training
For candidates who are registered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS) or Diploma in International Studies (DintS), Part I will be followed between Parts B and C and will be in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XI and Regulation XX.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 Criteria for Programme Progression
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to Part I or Part C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX.
5.2 Criteria for progression to an MEng programme
For candidates who commence study on the programme before October, 2016:
Any candidate who has accumulated, at the first attempt, 100 credits, no module mark less than 30% and an overall average mark of at least 55% from modules taken in Part A would normally be allowed to transfer to Part B of any MEng Electronic, Electrical and Systems Engineering programmes administered by the Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering should they so wish.
Any candidate who has accumulated, at the first attempt, 100 credits, no module mark less than 30% and an overall average mark of at least 55% from modules taken in Part B would normally be allowed to transfer to the MEng Part C or Part I of their current programme of study should they so wish.
Such transfers are subject to the prerequisite requirements of the MEng programme.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
A candidate's final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments at Parts B and C in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 20: Part C 80 to determine the final Programme Mark.
Programme Specification
EL BEng (Hons) Electronic and Computer Systems Engineering (2018 and 2019 Entry)
Academic Year: 2019/20
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET) |
Final award | BEng / BEng+DIS/ BEng+DPS/ BEng+DIntS |
Programme title | Electronic and Computer Systems Engineering |
Programme code | WSUB30 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is 6 semesters or 8 semesters if taken with the Diploma in Industrial Studies, Diploma in Professional Studies or Diploma in International Studies. The programme is only available on a full-time basis. |
UCAS code | H611, H614 |
Admissions criteria | BEng - BEng+DIS /DIntS - |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The BEng in Electronic and Computer Systems Engineering aims to:
- A1. Cultivate skilled graduates who will shape the future of embedded systems across industries requiring expertise in electronics and software, such as aerospace, automotive, communications, entertainment, gaming and manufacturing.
- A2. Provide a high-quality learning experience across a complete range of core subjects in order to give students the skills to investigate electronic and computer systems engineering problems.
- A3. Develop engineers capable of designing systems and managing the development process in order to deliver solutions that meet the requirements of customers.
- A4. Produce engineers knowledgeable of engineering management and business practices and of the relevant ethical, business, sustainability and legal constraints.
- A5. Promote high-quality engineering practice by applying appropriate knowledge, skills, tools and techniques in the analysis, diagnosis and solution of industry-related problems.
- A6. Support personal and professional development, including problem solving, leadership and team work and both oral and written presentation skills.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence: Engineering Technician, Incorporated Engineer and Chartered Engineer Standard, Engineering Council UK, 3rd edition, 2013.
- UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence: The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes, Engineering Council UK, 3rd edition, 2014.
- Guidance Note on Academic Accreditation: Engineering Council UK, July 2014.
- The UK Quality Code for Higher Education: The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, April 2012.
- Subject Benchmark Statement: Engineering: The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, November 2010.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- K1. Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of scientific, mathematical and engineering principles appropriate to electronic and computer systems engineering;
- K2. Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of general engineering principles;
- K3. Understand the commercial, economic and sustainable aspects in the application of engineering processes;
- K4. Demonstrate awareness of the relevant codes of practice and regulatory frameworks and the operational practices for safe operation of engineering processes;
- K5. Show knowledge of the management and business practices appropriate to engineering industries;
- K6. Recognise the professional and ethical responsibilities of engineers.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- C1. Apply engineering principles to the analysis of electronic and computer systems engineering problems;
- C2. Apply mathematical and computer-based methods for modelling and analysing a range of practical and hypothetical engineering processes, components and products;
- C3. Investigate and define engineering problems within the framework of economic, social, ethical and environmental issues;
- C4. Evaluate and respond to customer needs, including fitness for purpose and cost;
- C5. Follow essential design principles appropriate to relevant components, equipment and associated software.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- P1. Apply design, modelling, simulation and analytical methods and tools appropriate to electronic and computer systems engineering;
- P2. Define and solve practical engineering problems;
- P3. Demonstrate an ability to manage the design process;
- P4. Use conventional laboratory equipment and relevant test and measurement equipment in an appropriate and safe manner;
- P5. Apply relevant codes of practice and industry standards;
- P6. Demonstrate awareness of contractual issues and intellectual property rights;
- P7. Work with technical uncertainty;
- P8. Adopt a suitable engineering lifecycle approach to the solution of embedded systems problems;
- P9. Use appropriate management tools for project work.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- T1. Search and retrieve information, ideas and data from a variety of sources;
- T2. Select and analyse appropriate evidence and data to solve problems;
- T3. Apply skills in problem solving, communication, team working and in the use of general software tools;
- T4. Develop a personal work plan and take responsibility for its execution, both independently and as a member of a team;
- T5. Produce appropriate technical reports, papers, diagrams and drawings;
- T6. Plan self-learning as the foundation for lifelong learning.
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A
Code |
Title |
Semester |
Modular Weight |
C/O |
WSA017 |
Industrial Project in Electronic and Computer Systems Engineering |
1 + 2 |
20 |
C |
WSA011 |
Electronic Circuits |
1 |
20 |
C |
WSA010 |
Programming and Software Design |
1 |
20 |
C |
MAA103 |
Core Mathematics 1 |
1 |
10 |
C |
WSA012 |
Electrical Science A |
2 |
20 |
C |
WSA013 |
Digital Systems |
2 |
20 |
C |
MAA203 |
Core Mathematics 2 |
2 |
10 |
C |
4.2 Part B
Candidates must choose one option ‘O’ from semester 2.
Code |
Title |
Semester |
Modular Weight |
C/O |
WSB013 |
Robotics Project Design and Management |
1 + 2 |
20 |
C |
WSB014 |
Embedded Systems Programming |
1 |
20 |
C |
WSB010 |
Electronics |
1 |
20 |
C |
MAB103 |
Advanced Mathematics 1 |
1 |
10 |
C |
MAB203 |
Advanced Mathematics 2 |
2 |
10 |
C |
WSB019 |
Computer Architecture |
2 |
20 |
C |
WSB002 |
Communications |
2 |
20 |
O |
WSB004 |
Control System Design |
2 |
20 |
O |
4.4 Part I
Code | Title |
WSI010 | Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS) (Non-credit bearing) |
WSI020 | Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) (Non-credit bearing) |
WSI035 | Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) (Non-credit bearing) |
For candidates who are registered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS), Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) or Diploma in International Studies (DIntS), Part I will be followed between Parts B and C and will be in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XI and Regulation XX.
4.3 Part C
Candidates must choose one option ‘O’ from semester 1.
Code |
Title |
Semester |
Modular Weight |
C/O |
WSC025 |
Project |
1 + 2 |
30 |
C |
WSC200 |
Engineering Management: Finance, Law and Quality |
1 |
10 |
C |
WSC018 |
Embedded Systems Design and Implementation |
1 |
20 |
C |
WSC054 |
Electronic Systems Design with FPGAs |
2 |
20 |
C |
WSC055 |
Digital Interfacing and Instrumentation |
2 |
20 |
C |
WSC002 |
Digital Communications Theory and Practice |
1 |
20 |
O |
WSC003 |
Sustainable & Renewable Energy Systems |
1 |
20 |
O |
WSC039 |
Microwave Communications |
1 |
20 |
O |
WSC041 |
Digital and State Space Control |
1 |
20 |
O |
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements and other provisions set out in Regulation XX.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
A candidate's final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments at Parts B and C in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 40: Part C 60 to determine the final Programme Mark.
Programme Specification
EL BEng (Hons) Electronic and Computer Systems Engineering (Students undertaking Part C in 2019)
Academic Year: 2019/20
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET)
|
Final award | BEng / BEng + DIS |
Programme title | Electronic and Computer Systems Engineering |
Programme code | WSUB30 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is 6 semesters, or 8 semesters if taken with the Diploma in Industrial Studies. The programme is only available on a full-time basis. |
UCAS code | H611, H614 |
Admissions criteria | BEng - BEng+DIS /DIntS - |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The BEng in Electronic and Computer Systems Engineering aims to:
- A1. provide a programme of study producing graduates that are attractive to the electronic and computer systems engineering industry;
- A2. ensure a high quality educational experience in which knowledge and skills are developed, to an appropriate level, as a preparation for a career in that industry;
- A3. provide a broad, well-balanced degree programme in which analytical skills are developed over the full range of core subject areas. Equipping graduates of the programme for employment across all fields appropriate to electronic and computer systems engineering;
- A4. support each student’s ability to apply their knowledge and skills effectively to solve engineering problems;
- A5. develop analytical and transferable skills to enable students to gain employment in a wide variety of professions, thus helping graduates of the programme to make a valuable contribution to society;
- A6. maintain up-to-date curriculum that is responsive to developments in both higher education and industry, and which is informed by the School’s research activities;
- A7. develop each student’s skills in teamwork, self–learning, planning and communication.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence: Engineering Technician, Incorporated Engineer and Chartered Engineer Standard, Engineering Council UK, 3rd edition, 2013.
UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence: The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes, Engineering Council UK, 3rd edition, 2014.
Guidance Note on Academic Accreditation, Engineering Council UK, July 2014.
The UK Quality Code for Higher Education. The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, April 2012.
Subject Benchmark Statement: Engineering, The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, November 2010.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate a knowledge and understanding of:
- K1. essential mathematical methods appropriate to the electronic and computer systems engineering industry;
- K2. essential principles of engineering appropriate to electronic and computer systems engineering;
- K3. the role of Information Technology and communications;
- K4. essential design principles appropriate to relevant components, equipment and associated software;
- K5. relevant common engineering components;
- K6. management and business practices appropriate to engineering industries;
- K7. relevant codes of practice and regulatory frameworks;
- K8. basic operational practices and requirements for safe operation relevant to electronic and electrical engineering;
- K9. the professional and ethical responsibilities of engineers.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate:
- C1. an understanding of standard mathematical and computer based methods for modelling and analysing a range of practical and hypothetical engineering problems, and the essential principles of modelling and analysing routine engineering systems, processes, components and products;
- C2. a competence in defining and solving practical engineering problems;
- C3. the ability to integrate, evaluate and use information, data and ideas from a range of sources into project work;
- C4. the ability to apply engineering processes in a range of practical contexts.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- P1. use conventional laboratory equipment and relevant test and measurement equipment in a safe manner;
- P2. use computational tools and packages (including programming languages where appropriate) in familiar situations;
- P3. design, and where appropriate construct, systems, components or processes;
- P4. search for and retrieve information, ideas and data from a variety of sources;
- P5. manage a project and produce technical reports, papers, diagrams and drawings.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- T1. demonstrate skills in problem solving, communication, group working, use of general software and information retrieval, which act as a foundation for life-long learning;
- T2. use an engineering and/or systems approach to the solution of problems;
- T3. use appropriate management tools including management of time and resources;
- T4. select and analyse appropriate evidence/data to solve engineering problems;
- T5. work independently or in a team.
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
ELA001 | Circuits | 20 | 1+2 | C |
ELA003 | Electronics A | 20 | 1+2 | C |
ELA004 | Signals and Systems | 10 | 1+2 | C |
ELA007 | Introduction to Systems Engineering for Projects | 20 | 1+2 | C |
ELA010 | Programme and Software Design | 20 | 1+2 | C |
MAA303 | Mathematics A | 20 | 1+2 | C |
ELA005 | Electromagnetism A | 10 | 2 | C |
The 20 credit module ELA001 Circuits is taught over both semesters, 2/3 of the module is taught in Semester 1 and 1/3 in Semester 2.
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
WSB014 | Software Engineering | 15 | 1+2 | C |
WSB019 | Computer Architecture | 15 | 1+2 | C |
WSB020 | Introduction to FPGA | 15 | 1+2 | C |
WSB010 | Electronics B | 20 | 1+2 | C |
MAB303 | Mathematics B | 20 | 1+2 | C |
WSB006 | Systems Integration | 20 | 1+2 | OA |
WSB013 | Engineering Project Management | 20 | 1+2 | OA |
WSB002 | Communications | 15 | 1+2 | OB |
WSB004 | Control System Design | 15 | 1+2 | OB |
Students should take one of the optional modules marked oA and one marked oB.
4.3 Part C - Degree Modules
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
WSC008 | Business Management | 15 | 1+2 | C |
WSC018 | Real Time Software Engineering | 15 | 1+2 | C |
WSC054 | Electronic System Design with FPGA's | 15 | 1+2 | C |
WSC055 | Digital Interfacing and Instrumentation | 15 | 1+2 | C |
WSC025 | Project | 30 | 1+2 | C |
WSC002 | Principle of Digital Communications | 15 | 1+2 | OB |
WSC004 | Computer Networks | 15 | 1+2 | OB |
WSC013 | Electromagnetic Compatibility | 15 | 1+2 | OB |
WSC014 | Biophotonics Engineering | 15 | 1+2 | OB |
WSC030 | Bioelectricity - Fundamentals and Applications | 15 | 1+2 | OB |
WSC039 | Microwave Communication Systems | 15 | 1+2 | OB |
WSC041 | Digital and State Space Control | 15 | 1+2 | OB |
WSC056 | Fundamentals of Digital Signal Processing | 15 | 1+2 | OB |
DSC502 | Human Factors in Systems Design C | 15 | 1+2 | OB |
MPC022 | Materials Properties and Applications | 15 | 1+2 | OB |
Option modules with a total weight of 30 credits should be chosen.
Options listed as oA will normally continue to be delivered throughout the Semester 1 examination period. The options listed as oB will normally be suspended during the Semester 1 examination period. Modules marked oA may only be chosen if they were not taken at Part B.
All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.
4.4 Part I - Industrial training
For candidates who are registered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS) or Diploma in International Studies (DintS), Part I will be followed between Parts B and C and will be in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XI and Regulation XX.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 Criteria for programme progression
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to Part I or Part C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX.
5.2 Criteria for progression to an MEng programme
For candidates who commence study on the programme before October, 2016:
Any candidate who has accumulated, at the first attempt, 100 credits, no module mark less than 30% and an overall average mark of at least 55% from modules taken in Part A would normally be allowed to transfer to Part B of any MEng Electronic, Electrical and Systems Engineering programme administered by the Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering should they so wish.
Any candidate who has accumulated, at the first attempt, 100 credits, no module mark less than 30% and an overall average mark of at least 55% from modules taken in Part B would normally be allowed to transfer to the MEng Part C or Part I of their current programme of study should they so wish.
Such transfers are subject to the prerequisite requirements of the MEng programme.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
A candidate's final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments at Parts B and C in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 20: Part C 80 to determine the final Programme Mark.
Programme Specification
EL BEng (Hons) Robotics, Mechatronics and Control Engineering
Academic Year: 2019/20
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET) |
Final award | BEng/BEng + DPS/BEng + DInts/BEng +DIS |
Programme title | Robotics, Mechatronics and Control Engineering |
Programme code | WSUB35 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is 6 semesters or 8 semesters if taken with the Diploma in Industrial Studies, Diploma of Professional Studies of Diploma of International Studies. The programme is only available on a full-time basis. |
UCAS code | H671, H672 |
Admissions criteria | BEng - BEng + DPS/DIntS - |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The BEng in Robotics, Mechatronics and Control Engineering aims to:
- A1. Prepare highly skilled graduates to pursue careers in Robotics, Mechatronics and Control Engineering across a range of industries and activities involving the design, development, and analysis of complex systems
- A2. Provide a high-quality learning experience across a complete range of core subjects in order to give students the skills to investigate robotics, mechatronics and control engineering problems;
- A3. Develop engineers capable of designing systems and managing the development process in order to deliver solutions that meet the requirements of customers.
- A4. Produce engineers knowledgeable of engineering management and business practices and of the relevant ethical, business, sustainability and legal constraints.
- A5. Promote high-quality engineering practice by applying appropriate knowledge, skills, tools and techniques in the analysis, diagnosis and solution of industry-related problems.
- A6. Support personal and professional development, including problem solving, leadership and team work and both oral and written presentation skills.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence: Engineering Technician, Incorporated Engineer and Chartered Engineer Standard, Engineering Council UK, 3rd edition, 2013.
- UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence: The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes, Engineering Council UK, 3rd edition, 2014.
- Guidance Note on Academic Accreditation: Engineering Council UK, July 2014.
- The UK Quality Code for Higher Education: The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, April 2012.
- Subject Benchmark Statement: Engineering: The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, November 2010.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- K1. Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of scientific, mathematical and engineering principles appropriate to robotics, mechatronics and control engineering;
- K2. Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of general engineering principles;
- K3. Understand the commercial, economic and sustainable aspects in the application of engineering processes;
- K4. Demonstrate awareness of the relevant codes of practice and regulatory frameworks and the operational practices for safe operation of engineering processes;
- K5. Show knowledge of the management and business practices appropriate to engineering industries;
- K6. Recognise the professional and ethical responsibilities of engineers.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- C1. Apply engineering principles to the analysis of robotics, mechatronic and control engineering problems;
- C2. Apply mathematical and computer-based methods for modelling and analysing a range of practical and hypothetical engineering processes, components and products;
- C3. Investigate and define engineering problems within the framework of economic, social, ethical and environmental issues;
- C4. Evaluate and respond to customer needs, including fitness for purpose and cost;
- C5. Follow essential design principles appropriate to relevant components, equipment and associated software.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- P1. Apply design, modelling, simulation and analytical methods and tools appropriate to robotics, mechatronics and control engineering;
- P2. Define and solve practical engineering problems;
- P3. Demonstrate an ability to manage the design process;
- P4. Use conventional laboratory equipment and relevant test and measurement equipment in an appropriate and safe manner;
- P5. Apply relevant codes of practice and industry standards;
- P6. Demonstrate awareness of contractual issues and intellectual property rights;
- P7. Work with technical uncertainty;
- P8. Adopt a suitable systems engineering approach to the solution of robotics, mechatronics and control engineering problems;
- P9. Use appropriate management tools for project work.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- T1. Search and retrieve information, ideas and data from a variety of sources;
- T2. Select and analyse appropriate evidence and data to solve problems;
- T3. Apply skills in problem solving, communication, team working and in the use of general software tools;
- T4. Develop a personal work plan and take responsibility for its execution, both independently and as a member of a team;
- T5. Produce appropriate technical reports, papers, diagrams and drawings;
- T6. Plan self-learning as the foundation for lifelong learning.
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A
Code |
Title |
Semester |
Modular Weight |
C/O |
WSA018 |
Industrial Project in Robotics, Mechatronics and Control Engineering |
1 + 2 |
20 |
C |
WSA011 |
Electronic Circuits |
1 |
20 |
C |
WSA010 |
Programming and Software Design |
1 |
20 |
C |
MAA103 |
Core Mathematics 1 |
1 |
10 |
C |
WSA012 |
Electrical Science A |
2 |
20 |
C |
WSA013 |
Digital Systems |
2 |
20 |
C |
MAA203 |
Core Mathematics 2 |
2 |
10 |
C |
4.2 Part B
Code |
Title |
Semester |
Modular Weight |
C/O |
WSB013 |
Robotics Project Design and Management |
1 + 2 |
20 |
C |
MAB103 |
Advanced Mathematics 1 |
1 |
10 |
C |
WSB010 |
Electronics |
1 |
20 |
C |
WSB140 |
Mechanics for Robot |
1 |
20 |
C |
WSB004 |
Control System Design |
2 |
20 |
C |
WSB009 |
Mobile Robots |
2 |
20 |
C |
MAB203 |
Advanced Mathematics 2 |
2 |
10 |
C |
4.3 Part I
Code | Title |
WSI010 | Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS) (Non-credit bearing) |
WSI020 | Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) (Non-credit bearing) |
WSI035 | Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) (Non-credit bearing) |
For candidates who are registered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS), Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) or the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS), Part I will be followed between Parts B and C and will be in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XI and Regulation XX.
4.4 Part C
Candidates must choose one option ‘O’ from semester 2
Code |
Title |
Semester |
Modular Weight |
C/O |
WSC025 |
Project |
1 + 2 |
30 |
C |
WSC200 |
Engineering Management: Finance, Law and Quality |
1 |
10 |
C |
WSC041 |
Digital and State Space Control |
1 |
20 |
C |
MMC108 |
Manufacturing Automation and Control |
1 |
10 |
C |
WSC012 |
Systems Engineering Applications |
1 |
10 |
C |
WSC055 |
Digital Interfacing and Instrumentation |
2 |
20 |
C |
WSC004 |
Computer Networks |
2 |
20 |
O |
WSC014 |
Bioelectricity and Biophotonics Engineering |
2 |
20 |
O |
WSC022 |
Power Electronics |
2 |
20 |
O |
WSC054 |
Electronic Systems Design with FPGAs |
2 |
20 |
O |
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements and other provisions set out in Regulation XX.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
A candidate's final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments at Parts B and C in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 40: Part C 60 to determine the final Programme Mark.
Programme Specification
MM MEng (Hons) Manufacturing Engineering (Students undertaking Part C in 2019)
Academic Year: 2019/20
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET) Institution of Mechanical Engineers (IMechE) |
Final award | MEng / MEng+DIS / MEng+DPS / MEng+DInts |
Programme title | Manufacturing Engineering |
Programme code | WSUM01 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is eight semesters, or ten semesters if students undertake the additional period of study normally between Parts B and C for the award of the Diploma of Industrial Studies, the Diploma of International Studies or the Diploma of Professional Studies. |
UCAS code | H701, H707 |
Admissions criteria | MEng -
MEng+DPS/DIntS - |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The overall aim of this programme is to equip students with the knowledge, understanding, key skills and attributes to make a substantial impact in manufacturing enterprises. To achieve this, the course provides the core engineering science background, supported by a broad knowledge of manufacturing processes and technology. This is combined with modules covering the management of manufacturing activities that, all together, allows students to understand, monitor and enhance existing processes, and develop new manufacturing methods. The depth offered by this MEng programme will enable students to progress rapidly both technically and managerially in a range of manufacturing organisations.
Specific aims are:
• A1. To deliver technical depth in core engineering subjects and specialist applications leading to a broad understanding of engineering knowledge, and a critical awareness of current insights in the fields of manufacturing engineering and manufacturing management.
• A2. To produce high quality MEng graduates with a strong academic background and excellent communication skills able to manage their own learning and solve complex problems individually and in teams.
• A3. To equip manufacturing engineering graduates with a broad appreciation of the essential practical, commercial and social aspects of engineering enabling them to progress rapidly to a position of responsibility, and to become future technical and managerial leaders.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- UK Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education (QAA) – ‘Subject Benchmark Statement for Engineering’, (Feb.2015).
- Engineering Council (UK). ‘UKSPEC, UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence’, 3rd Edition, Jan.2014.
- Engineering Council (UK). ‘The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes’, 3rd Edition, May 2014.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
- K1. the underpinning science, mathematics and other disciplines associated with a career in manufacturing engineering;
- K2. engineering principles and relevant numerical methods and an understanding of the role of information technology in providing support for manufacturing engineers;
- K3. codes of practice, industry standards and quality issues applicable to a career in manufacturing;
- K4. the management of manufacturing methods and the wider business background appropriate to the organisation of a manufacturing enterprise;
- K5. the commercial and economic context, together with the importance of sustainability, legal, ethical and intellectual property issues within the modern industrial world;
- K6. material properties, manufacturing processes and technologies, their limitations and applicability, with an awareness of new developments in these areas;
- K7. the design process related to the manufacturing arena.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
The MEng graduate will also be able to use such knowledge and understanding in a creative way and be able to:
- C1. define an unfamiliar manufacturing related problem, evaluate its technical and business requirements and generate innovative solutions that consider the system as a whole including constraints such as economics, production capabilities and sustainability;
- C2. apply appropriate methods (including analytical and computational methods) to model and critically assess such solutions making allowance for uncertainty in the information available;
- C3. investigate methods to continuously improve manufacturing processes for enhanced quality, sustainability and economics;
- C4. research data and fundamental knowledge from other disciplines and apply the relevant aspects in the solution of unfamiliar problems;
- C5. understand the role of other engineering disciplines and their technical and business constraints.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- P1. use appropriate computer software numerical modelling methods and/or computational techniques to solve engineering problems;
- P2. use laboratory and mechanical workshop equipment competently and safely;
- P3. research information from a wide range of sources;
- P4. prepare engineering drawings and other technical data and present it in alternative forms to create good understanding and/or impact;
- P5. manage the manufacturing related design process taking account of customer constraints such as cost, health and safety and risk.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- T1. critically evaluate an existing or proposed technology;
- T2. use a range of computer based systems and adapt them to other applications;
- T3. communicate effectively through written, graphical, interpersonal and presentation skills;
- T4. develop, monitor and update a personal programme of work for themselves and/or others, to reflect changing requirements and learn independently;
- T5. gather information from a range of sources, collate it and present its key findings;
- T6. undertake different roles within a team that may include leadership.
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
MAA306 |
Mathematics for Manufacturing Engineering |
20 | 1+2 | C |
WSA102 | Engineering Science 1 | 20 | 1+2 | C |
WSA604 | Materials and Manufacturing Processes | 20 | 1+2 | C |
WSA400 | Application of CAD for Engineering Designers | 10 | 1 | C |
WSA501 | Integrating Studies 1a | 10 | 1 | C |
WSA610 | Manufacturing Technology | 10 | 1 | C |
WSA210 | Manufacturing Management | 10 | 2 | C |
WSA504 | Integrating Studies 1b | 10 | 2 | C |
WSA900 | Electronics and Electrical Technology 1 | 10 | 2 | C |
4.2 Part B Degree Modules
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
WSB501 | Integrating Studies | 20 | 1+2 | C |
WSB600 | Manufacturing Process Technology | 20 | 1+2 | C |
WSB112 | Engineering Science 2 | 10 | 1 | C |
WSB200 | Engineering Management: Finance, Law and Quality | 10 | 1 | C |
WSB310 | Engineering and Management Modelling | 10 | 1 | C |
WSB505 | Manufacturing Design | 10 | 1 | C |
MAB206 | Statistics | 10 | 2 | C |
WSB203 | Manufacturing Planning and Control | 10 | 2 | C |
WSB301 | Software Engineering | 10 | 2 | C |
WSB413 | Machine Design | 10 | 2 | C |
4.3 Part I - Optional Placement Year
Code | Title |
WSI010 | Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS) (non-credit bearing) |
WSI020 | Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) (non-credit bearing) |
WSI035 |
Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) (non-credit bearing) |
For candidates who are reigstered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS), Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) or Diploma in International Studies (DIntS), Part I will be between Parts B and C or Parts C and D and will be in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XI and Regulation XX.
4.4 Part C Degree Modules
Some modules in Part C and D are paired together. For example, (1a) in part C is paired with (2a) in part D. All students MUST COMPLETE AT LEAST TWO of these specialist module pairs during part C or D. The second module of a pair (numbered 2) may not be taken without the prerequisite module (numbered 1) but the preliminary modules may be studied independently.
Students MUST choose 10 credits from Semester One and 10 credits from Semester Two.
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
WSD550 | Individual Project | 50 | 1+2 | C |
WSC600 | Advanced Manufacturing Processes and Technology 1 | 10 | 1 | C (1d) |
WSC602 | Sustainable Manufacturing | 10 | 1 | C (1c) |
WSC606 | Additive Manufacturing for Product Development | 10 | 1 | C (1e) |
WSC206 | Product Innovation Management | 10 | 2 | C |
WSC603 | Metrology | 10 | 2 | C |
WSC205 | International Project Management | 10 | 1 | O |
WSC900 | Computer Control and Instrumentation | 10 | 1 | O |
LAN*** | University Wide Language | 10 | 1 | O |
WSC106 | Finite Element Analysis | 10 | 2 | O (1a) |
WSC300 | Product Information Systems - Computer Aided Design | 10 | 2 | O |
MPC012 | Polymer Engineering - Processing and Manufacturing | 10 | 2 | O (1b) |
All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.
4.5 Part D Degree Modules
A number of modules are paired together. For example, the module marked (1a) in part C is paired with (2a) in part D. All students MUST COMPLETE AT LEAST TWO of these specialist module pairs during part C or D. The second module of a pair (numbered 2) may not be taken without the prerequisite module (numbered 1) but the preliminary modules may be studied independently.
Students MUST choose 20 credits from Semester One, with no more than 10 credits from each of the Groups A, B, C or D and 30 credits from Semester Two
When making selections, students must ensure that they choose at least 20 credits of optioanl D level modules.
Students may not select both WSC700 Sports Technology and WSC610 Healthcare Engineering.
Students cannot choose modules already studied in Part C.
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
WSD503 | Project Engineering - Total Product Design | 30 | 1+2 | C |
WSD207 | Project Management | 10 | 1 | C |
WSC400 | Design for Assembly | 10 | 1 | C |
WSC401 | Design Methods and Communication | 10 | 1 | C |
WSD203 | Lean Operations and Supply Chain Management | 10 | 2 | C |
WSC201 | Organisation Structure and Strategy | 10 | 1 | OA |
MPD014 | Polymer Engineering - Properties and Design | 10 | 1 | OB (2b) |
WSD100 | Structural Integrity | 10 | 1 | OB (2a) |
WSC108 | Manufacturing Automation and Control | 10 | 1 | OC |
WSC900 | Computer Control and Instrumentation | 10 | 1 | OC |
LAN*** | University Wide Language | 10 | 1 | OD |
WSC204 | Management of the Human Resource | 10 | 2 | O |
WSC610 | Healthcare Engineering | 10 | 2 | O |
WSC700 | Sports Technology | 10 | 2 | O |
WSC911 | Industrial Machine Vision | 10 | 2 | O |
WSD407 | Sustainable Product Design | 10 | 2 | O (2c) |
WSD601 | Advanced Manufacturing Processes and Technology 2 | 10 | 2 | O (2d) |
WSD606 | Additive Manufacturing and Reverse Engineering | 10 | 2 | O (2e) |
All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.
4.6 Studies Overseas
Students may choose to study Semester 1 only, during their Part D at an approved Overseas Higher Education Institution. The mix of subjects of the learning programme must first be approved by the Programmed Director. An acceptable learning programme must include a major group project and studies at an advanced/masters level with modular weight not less than 20.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 Criteria for Progression and Award of Degree
Progression from Part A to Part B, from Part B to Part C and from Part C to Part D will be subject to the provisions set out in Regulation XX and in addition candidates must accumulate 120 credits and achieve an overall average of 55% in each part.
To qualify for the Degree of Masters of Engineering, candidates must accumulate 100 credits from Part D, with no module mark below 30%.
5.2 Criteria for Candidates who do not meet the requirements for Progression or the Award of a Degree
Any candidate who fails to achieve the criteria for progression from Part A to Part B, Part B to Part C or Part C to Part D shall have the opportunity to repeat module assessments in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XX. Alternatively, the candidate may elect to enter the BEng Honours Degree programme in Manufacturing Engineering, provided that the candidate has satisfied the criteria for progression on the BEng programme at the appropriate point.
Any candidate who, having successfully completed Part C, is unable to commence or complete Part D or who fails to achieve the criteria necessary for the award of MEng may, at the discretion of the Programme Board, be awarded the degree of BEng in Manufacturing Engineering with a classification corresponding to the candidate’s achievements in the Part B and Part C assessments and determined on the basis of the weightings given for the BEng programme.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B, C and D in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The overall average percentage marks for each part will be combined in the ratio (Part B 20: Part C 40: Part D 40) to determine the overall average percentage mark for the Programme (the Programme Mark)
Programme Specification
MM MEng (Hons) Product Design Engineering (2018 Entry)
Academic Year: 2019/20
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | Institution of Engineering Designers (IED) Institution of Mechanical Engineers (IMechE) Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET) |
Final award | MEng/ MEng+DIS/ MEng+DPS/MEng+DInts |
Programme title | Product Design Engineering |
Programme code | WSUM02 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is 8 semesters, or 10 semesters if students undertake the additional period of study, normally between Parts B and C, leading to the award of the Diploma in Industrial Studies, the Diploma of International Studies, or the Diploma of Professional Studies. |
UCAS code | HHC7, HHD7 |
Admissions criteria | |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
This programme aims to bridge the disciplines of mechanical engineering, manufacturing engineering and product design. To provide design content which is applicable to products, processes and systems.
- A1. To deliver in-depth knowledge and understanding of key aspects of engineering science, manufacturing engineering, innovation and appropriate management techniques.
- A2. To provide opportunities for students to develop appropriate design and project engineering skills, including dealing with open-ended problems and elements of uncertainty and risk.
- A3. To develop the ability to solve a broad range of engineering problems, some complex and novel, using contemporary ideas and techniques.
- A4. To enable students to manage their own learning, communicate effectively and make use of primary source materials.
- A5. To put human and project management theory into practice through team-working and opportunities for leadership experience.
- A6. To provide insight into engineering practice and commercial aspects of engineering and design.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
-
UK Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education (QAA) – ‘Subject Benchmark Statement for Engineering’, (Feb.2015).
-
Engineering Council (UK). ‘UK-SPEC, UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence’, 3rd Edition, Jan.2014.
-
Engineering Council (UK). ‘The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes’, 3rd Edition, May 2014.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
- K1. the underpinning science, mathematics and other disciplines associated with careers related to product design engineering;
- K2. engineering principles, quantitative methods, mathematical and computer models;
- K3. the design processes and methodologies and the ability to manage a design project;
- K4. codes of practice, industry standards and quality issues, including new developments and limitations, as applicable to a product design engineering career;
- K5. intellectual property issues and of environmental, legal and ethical issues within the modern industrial world;
- K6. developing technologies in two areas of specialisation and an understanding of the broad range of concepts necessary for effective product design and manufacture;
- K7. management and business practices appropriate for a career in product design engineering and an understanding of the commercial and economic context and drivers of the engineering business;
- K8. the characteristics of engineering materials, equipment and processes and mechanical workshop practices.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
The MEng graduate will be able to use such knowledge and understanding in a creative way and be able to:
- C1. identify and define a design engineering problem in unfamiliar situations and generate innovative solutions:
- C2. apply and adapt appropriate methods to model such solutions and assess the limitations of each method;
- C3. analyse engineering solutions using contemporary computer-based systems and appreciate their limitations;
- C4. investigate new and emerging technologies using fundamental knowledge;
- C5. analyse, objectively evaluate and apply the principles of industrial design, engineering design and manufacturing design to product design and development;
- C6. extract, from given data, that which is pertinent to an unfamiliar problem and make use of it in finding a solution;
- C7. select appropriate data from a range of possible data sets and present them in alternative forms to create deeper understanding and/or greater impact;
- C8. integrate knowledge from all aspects of the programme, applying understanding to novel and challenging situations, while being aware of the limitations of solutions;
- C9. generate an innovative design for systems, components or processes to fulfil new needs.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- P1. manage and lead the design process taking account of customer constraints such as cost, health and safety, risk and environmental issues;
- P2. apply engineering techniques taking account of a range of commercial and industrial constraints;
- P3. communicate product design ideas through the presentation of concept drawings, computer visualisations and conventional sketching;
- P4. prepare engineering drawings, computer visualisations and technical reports and give technically competent oral presentations;
- P5. research information and use new methods required for novel situations;
- P6. use appropriate computer software and laboratory equipment;
- P7. recognise the capabilities and limitations of computer based methods for engineering problem solving.
- P8. demonstrate advanced organisational and management skills.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- T1. demonstrate a high level of numeracy;
- T2. apply creative and structured approaches to problem solving;
- T3. communicate effectively through written, graphical, interpersonal and presentation skills;
- T4. design and implement computer-based information systems;
- T5. work independently;
- T6. work in and lead a team;
- T7. organise and manage time and resources effectively;
- T8. learn new theories, concepts, methods etc. in an unfamiliar situation outside the discipline area.
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
MAA306 | Mathematics for Manufacturing Engineering | 20 | 1+2 | C |
WSA102 | Engineering Science 1 | 20 | 1+2 | C |
WSA401 | Product Design (Ergonomics & Visualisation) | 20 | 1+2 | C |
WSA604 | Materials and Manufacturing Processes | 20 | 1+2 | C |
WSA400 | Application of CAD for Engineering Designers | 10 | 1 | C |
WSA501 | Integrating Studies 1a | 10 | 1 | C |
WSA504 | Integrating Studies 1b | 10 | 2 | C |
WSA900 | Electronic and Electrical Technology 1 | 10 | 2 | C |
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
WSB501 | Integrating Studies | 20 | 1+2 | C |
WSB504 | Application of Product Design | 20 | 1+2 | C |
WSB112 | Engineering Science 2 | 10 | 1 | C |
WSB310 | Engineering and Management Modelling | 10 | 1 | C |
WSB400 | Industrial Design | 10 | 1 | C |
WSB610 | Manufacturing Technology | 10 | 1 | C |
WSB210 | Manufacturing Management | 10 | 2 | C |
WSB301 | Software Engineering | 10 | 2 | C |
WSB413 | Machine Design | 10 | 2 | C |
MAB206 | Statistics | 10 | 2 | C |
4.3 Part I – Optional Placement Year
Code | Title |
WSI010 | Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS) (non-credit bearing) |
WSI020 | Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) (non-credit bearing) |
WSI035 | Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) (non-credit bearing) |
For candidates who are registered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS), Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) or Diploma in International Studies (DintS), Part I will be between Parts B and C or Parts C and D and will be in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XI and Regulation XX.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
Students must choose 30 credits of Options (O). Students MUST select 10 credits from Group A (OA) and no more than 10 credits from each group.
Modules indicated with ** are paired together. For example, (1a) in part C is paired with (2a) in part D. Similarly (1e) in Part D is paired with (2e) also in part D. All students MUST COMPLETE AT LEAST TWO of these specialist module pairs during Part C or D. The second module of a pair (numbered 2) may not be taken without the prerequisite module (numbered 1) but the preliminary modules may be studied independently.
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
WSC551 | Individual Project | 50 | 1+2 | C |
WSC200 | Engineering Management: Finance, Law and Quality | 10 | 1 | C |
WSC401 | Design Methods and Communication | 10 | 1 | C |
WSC602 | Sustainable Manufacturing | 10 | 1 | C |
WSC606 | Additive Manufacturing for Product Development | 10 | 1 | C (1d) |
MPC012 | Polymer Engineering 1 - Processing and Manufacturing | 10 | 2 | OA (1b) |
WSC106 | Finite Element Analysis | 10 | 2 | OA (1c) |
WSC300 | Product Information Systems - Computer Aided Design | 10 | 2 | OB |
WSC203 | Manufacturing Planning & Control | 10 | 2 | OC |
WSC610 | Healthcare Engineering | 10 | 2 | OD |
WSC700 | Sports Engineering | 10 | 2 | OD |
All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.
4.5 Part D - Degree Modules
At least 70 weight of level 7 (D modules) must be taken in Part D.
Students must choose 70 credits of options (O). Students MUST select 10 credits from group A and 20 credits from group H. The remaining 40 credits should be no more than 10 credits from each group (B-G, I-L). Note there will be at least 20 weight of linked modules (follow on from pre-requisite modules in Part C) across both semesters.
Students who elect to study WSC900 (1e) must also study WSD900 (2e) in Part D.
Students can only choose WSD900 once (either from group F or Group H).
Students cannot choose modules already studied in Part C.
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
WSD503 | Project Engineering - Total Product Design | 30 | 1+2 | C |
WSD207 | Project Management | 10 | 1 | C |
WSD407 | Sustainable Product Design | 10 | 2 | C |
MPD014 | Polymer Engineering - Properties & Design | 10 | 1 | OA (2b) |
WSD100 | Structural Integrity | 10 | 1 | OA (2c) |
WSC600 | Advanced Manufacturing Processes and Technology 1 | 10 | 1 | OB (1a) |
WSC900 | Computer Control and Instrumentation | 10 | 1 | OB (1e) |
WSC201 | Organisation Structure and Strategy | 10 | 1 | OC |
WSC400 | Design for Assembly | 10 | 1 | OD |
WSD900 | Mechatronics | 20 | 1+2 | OF (2e) |
LAN*** | University Wide Language | 10 | 1 | OG |
WSD601 | Advanced Manufacturing Processes and Technology 2 | 10 | 2 | OH (2a) |
WSD606 | Additive Manufacturing and Reverse Engineering | 10 | 2 | OH (2d) |
WSD900 | Mechatronics | 20 | 1+2 | OH (2e) |
WSC206 | Product Innovation Management | 10 | 2 | OI |
WSC603 | Metrology | 10 | 2 | OJ |
WSC610 | Healthcare Engineering | 10 | 2 | OK |
WSC700 | Sports Engineering | 10 | 2 | OK |
LAN*** | University Wide Language | 10 | 2 | OL |
WSC911 | Industrial Machine Vision | 10 | 2 | OM |
All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.
4.6 Studies Overseas
Students may choose to study Semester 1 only, during their Part D at an approved Overseas Higher Education Institution. The mix of subjects of the learning programme must first be approved by the Programme Director. An acceptable learning programme must include a major group project and studies at an advanced/masters level with modular weight not less than 20.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 Criteria for Progression and Award of Degree
Progression from Part A to Part B, from Part B to Part C and from Part C to Part D will be subject to the provisions set out in Regulation XX and in addition candidates must accumulate 120 credits and achieve an overall average of 55% in each part.
To qualify for the Degree of Masters of Engineering, candidates must accumulate 100 credits from Part D, and no module mark below 30%.
5.2 Criteria for Candidates who do not meet the requirements for Progression or the Award of a Degree
Any candidate who fails to achieve the criteria for progression from Part A to Part B, Part B to Part C or Part C to Part D shall have the opportunity to repeat module assessments in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XX. Alternatively, the candidate may elect to enter the BEng Honours Degree programme in Product Design Engineering, provided that the candidate has satisfied the criteria for progression on the BEng programme at the appropriate point.
Any candidate who, having successfully completed Part C, is unable to commence or complete Part D or who fails to achieve the criteria necessary for the award of MEng may, at the discretion of the Programme Board, be awarded the degree of BEng in Product Design Engineering with a classification corresponding to the candidate’s achievements in the Part B and Part C assessments and determined on the basis of the weightings given for the BEng programme.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidate’s final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B, C and D in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The overall average percentage marks for each part will be combined in the ratio (Part B 20: Part C 40: Part D 40) to determine the overall average percentage mark for the Programme (the Programme Mark).
Programme Specification
MM MEng (Hons) Product Design Engineering (Students undertaking Part C in 2019)
Academic Year: 2019/20
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | Institution of Engineering Designers (IED) Institution of Mechanical Engineers (IMechE) Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET) |
Final award | MEng/ MEng+DIS/ MEng+DPS/MEng+DInts |
Programme title | Product Design Engineering |
Programme code | WSUM02 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is 8 semesters, or 10 semesters if students undertake the additional period of study, normally between Parts B and C, leading to the award of the Diploma in Industrial Studies, the Diploma of International Studies, or the Diploma of Professional Studies. |
UCAS code | HHC7, HHD7 |
Admissions criteria | |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
This programme aims to bridge the disciplines of mechanical engineering, manufacturing engineering and product design. To provide design content which is applicable to products, processes and systems.
- A1. To deliver in-depth knowledge and understanding of key aspects of engineering science, manufacturing engineering, innovation and appropriate management techniques.
- A2. To provide opportunities for students to develop appropriate design and project engineering skills, including dealing with open-ended problems and elements of uncertainty and risk.
- A3. To develop the ability to solve a broad range of engineering problems, some complex and novel, using contemporary ideas and techniques.
- A4. To enable students to manage their own learning, communicate effectively and make use of primary source materials.
- A5. To put human and project management theory into practice through team-working and opportunities for leadership experience.
- A6. To provide insight into engineering practice and commercial aspects of engineering and design.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
-
UK Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education (QAA) – ‘Subject Benchmark Statement for Engineering’, (Feb.2015).
-
Engineering Council (UK). ‘UK-SPEC, UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence’, 3rd Edition, Jan.2014.
-
Engineering Council (UK). ‘The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes’, 3rd Edition, May 2014.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
- K1. the underpinning science, mathematics and other disciplines associated with careers related to product design engineering;
- K2. engineering principles, quantitative methods, mathematical and computer models;
- K3. the design processes and methodologies and the ability to manage a design project;
- K4. codes of practice, industry standards and quality issues, including new developments and limitations, as applicable to a product design engineering career;
- K5. intellectual property issues and of environmental, legal and ethical issues within the modern industrial world;
- K6. developing technologies in two areas of specialisation and an understanding of the broad range of concepts necessary for effective product design and manufacture;
- K7. management and business practices appropriate for a career in product design engineering and an understanding of the commercial and economic context and drivers of the engineering business;
- K8. the characteristics of engineering materials, equipment and processes and mechanical workshop practices.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
The MEng graduate will be able to use such knowledge and understanding in a creative way and be able to:
- C1. identify and define a design engineering problem in unfamiliar situations and generate innovative solutions:
- C2. apply and adapt appropriate methods to model such solutions and assess the limitations of each method;
- C3. analyse engineering solutions using contemporary computer-based systems and appreciate their limitations;
- C4. investigate new and emerging technologies using fundamental knowledge;
- C5. analyse, objectively evaluate and apply the principles of industrial design, engineering design and manufacturing design to product design and development;
- C6. extract, from given data, that which is pertinent to an unfamiliar problem and make use of it in finding a solution;
- C7. select appropriate data from a range of possible data sets and present them in alternative forms to create deeper understanding and/or greater impact;
- C8. integrate knowledge from all aspects of the programme, applying understanding to novel and challenging situations, while being aware of the limitations of solutions;
- C9. generate an innovative design for systems, components or processes to fulfil new needs.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- P1. manage and lead the design process taking account of customer constraints such as cost, health and safety, risk and environmental issues;
- P2. apply engineering techniques taking account of a range of commercial and industrial constraints;
- P3. communicate product design ideas through the presentation of concept drawings, computer visualisations and conventional sketching;
- P4. prepare engineering drawings, computer visualisations and technical reports and give technically competent oral presentations;
- P5. research information and use new methods required for novel situations;
- P6. use appropriate computer software and laboratory equipment;
- P7. recognise the capabilities and limitations of computer based methods for engineering problem solving.
- P8. demonstrate advanced organisational and management skills.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- T1. demonstrate a high level of numeracy;
- T2. apply creative and structured approaches to problem solving;
- T3. communicate effectively through written, graphical, interpersonal and presentation skills;
- T4. design and implement computer-based information systems;
- T5. work independently;
- T6. work in and lead a team;
- T7. organise and manage time and resources effectively;
- T8. learn new theories, concepts, methods etc. in an unfamiliar situation outside the discipline area.
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
MAA306 | Mathematics for Manufacturing Engineering | 20 | 1+2 | C |
MMA102 | Engineering Science 1 | 20 | 1+2 | C |
MMA401 | Product Design (Ergonomics & Visualisation) | 20 | 1+2 | C |
MMA604 | Materials and Manufacturing Processes | 20 | 1+2 | C |
MMA400 | Manufacturing Design 1 | 10 | 1 | C |
MMA501 | Integrating Studies 1a | 10 | 1 | C |
MMA504 | Integrating Studies 1b | 10 | 2 | C |
MMA900 | Electronic and Electrical Technology 1 | 10 | 2 | C |
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
WSB501 | Integrating Studies | 20 | 1+2 | C |
WSB504 | Application of Product Design | 20 | 1+2 | C |
WSB112 | Engineering Science 2 | 10 | 1 | C |
WSB310 | Engineering and Management Modelling | 10 | 1 | C |
WSB400 | Industrial Design | 10 | 1 | C |
WSB610 | Manufacturing Technology | 10 | 1 | C |
WSB210 | Manufacturing Management | 10 | 2 | C |
WSB301 | Software Engineering | 10 | 2 | C |
WSB413 | Machine Design | 10 | 2 | C |
4.3 Part I – Optional Placement Year
Code | Title |
WSI010 | Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS) (non-credit bearing) |
WSI020 | Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) (non-credit bearing) |
WSI035 | Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) (non-credit bearing) |
For candidates who are registered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS), Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) or Diploma in International Studies (DintS), Part I will be followed between Parts B or C and Parts C and D and will be in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XI and Regulation XX.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
Students must choose 30 credits of Options (O). Students MUST select 10 credits from Group A (OA) and no more than 10 credits from each group.
Modules indicated with ** are paired together. For example, (1a) in part C is paired with (2a) in part D. Similarly (1e) in Part D is paired with (2e) also in part D. All students MUST COMPLETE AT LEAST TWO of these specialist module pairs during Part C or D. The second module of a pair (numbered 2) may not be taken without the prerequisite module (numbered 1) but the preliminary modules may be studied independently.
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
WSC551 | Individual Project | 50 | 1+2 | C |
WSC200 | Engineering Management: Finance, Law and Quality | 10 | 1 | C |
WSC401 | Design Methods and Communication | 10 | 1 | C |
WSC602 | Sustainable Manufacturing | 10 | 1 | C |
WSC606 | Additive Manufacturing for Product Development | 10 | 1 | C (1d) |
MPC012 | Polymer Engineering 1 - Processing and Manufacture | 10 | 2 | OA (1b) |
WSC106 | Finite Element Analysis | 10 | 2 | OA (1c) |
WSC300 | Product Information Systems - Computer Aided Design | 10 | 2 | OB |
WSC203 | Manufacturing Planning & Control | 10 | 2 | OC |
WSC610 | Healthcare Engineering | 10 | 2 | OD |
WSC700 | Sports Engineering | 10 | 2 | OD |
All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.
4.5 Part D - Degree Modules
At least 70 weight of level 7 (D modules) must be taken in Part D.
Students must choose 70 credits of options (O). Students MUST select 10 credits from group A and 20 credits from group H. The remaining 40 credits should be no more than 10 credits from each group (B-G, I-M). Note there will be at least 20 weight of linked modules (follow on from pre-requisite modules in Part C) across both semesters.
Students who elect to study WSC900 (1e) must also study WSD900 (2e) in Part D.
Students cannot choose modules already studied in Part C.
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
WSD503 | Project Engineering - Total Product Design | 30 | 1+2 | C |
WSD207 | Project Management | 10 | 1 | C |
WSD407 | Sustainable Product Design | 10 | 2 | C |
MPD014 | Polymer Engineering - Properties & Design | 10 | 1 | OA (2b) |
WSD100 | Structural Integrity | 10 | 1 | OA (2c) |
WSC600 | Advanced Manufacturing Processes and Technology 1 | 10 | 1 | OB (1a) |
WSC900 | Computer Control and Instrumentation | 10 | 1 | OB (1e) |
WSC201 | Organisation Structure & Strategy | 10 | 1 | OC |
WSC400 | Design for Assembly | 10 | 1 | OD |
WSD900 | Mechatronics | 20 | 1+2 | OF (2e) |
LAN*** | University Wide Language | 10 | 1 | OG |
WSD601 | Advanced Manufacturing Processes and Technology 2 | 10 | 2 | OH (2a) |
WSD606 | Additive Manufacturing and Reverse Engineering | 10 | 2 | OH (2d) |
WSC206 | Product Innovation Management | 10 | 2 | OI |
WSC603 | Metrology | 10 | 2 | OJ |
WSC610 | Healthcare Engineering | 10 | 2 | OK |
WSC700 | Sports Engineering | 10 | 2 | OK |
WSC911 | Industrial Machine Vision | 10 | 2 | OL |
LAN*** | University Wide Language | 10 | 2 | OM |
All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.
4.6 Studies Overseas
Students may choose to study Semester 1 only, during their Part D at an approved Overseas Higher Education Institution. The mix of subjects of the learning programme must first be approved by the Programme Director. An acceptable learning programme must include a major group project and studies at an advanced/masters level with modular weight not less than 20.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 Criteria for Progression and Award of Degree
Progression from Part A to Part B, from Part B to Part C and from Part C to Part D will be subject to the provisions set out in Regulation XX and in addition candidates must accumulate 120 credits and achieve an overall average of 55% in each part.
To qualify for the award of the Degree of Masters of Engineering, candidates must accumulate 100 credits from Part D, with no module mark less then 30%.
5.2 Criteria for Candidates who do not meet the requirements for Progression or the Award of a Degree
Any candidate who fails to achieve the criteria for progression from Part A to Part B, Part B to Part C or Part C to Part D shall have the opportunity to repeat module assessments in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XX. Alternatively, the candidate may elect to enter the BEng Honours Degree programme in Product Design Engineering, provided that the candidate has satisfied the criteria for progression on the BEng programme at the appropriate point.
Any candidate who, having successfully completed Part C, is unable to commence or complete Part D or who fails to achieve the criteria necessary for the award of MEng may, at the discretion of the Programme Board, be awarded the degree of BEng in Product Design Engineering with a classification corresponding to the candidate’s achievements in the Part B and Part C assessments and determined on the basis of the weightings given for the BEng programme.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidate’s final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B, C and D in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The overall average percentage marks for each part will be combined in the ratio (Part B 20: Part C 40: Part D 40) to determine the overall average percentage mark for the Programme (the Programme Mark).
Programme Specification
MM MEng (Hons) Product Design Engineering (Students undertaking Part D in 2019)
Academic Year: 2019/20
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | Institution of Engineering Designers (IED) Institution of Mechanical Engineers (IMechE) Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET) |
Final award | MEng/ MEng+DIS/ MEng+DPS/MEng+DInts |
Programme title | Product Design Engineering |
Programme code | WSUM02 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is 8 semesters, or 10 semesters if students undertake the additional period of study, normally between Parts B and C, leading to the award of the Diploma in Industrial Studies, the Diploma of International Studies, or the Diploma of Professional Studies. |
UCAS code | HHC7, HHD7 |
Admissions criteria | |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
This programme aims to bridge the disciplines of mechanical engineering, manufacturing engineering and product design. To provide design content which is applicable to products, processes and systems.
- A1. To deliver in-depth knowledge and understanding of key aspects of engineering science, manufacturing engineering, innovation and appropriate management techniques.
- A2. To provide opportunities for students to develop appropriate design and project engineering skills, including dealing with open-ended problems and elements of uncertainty and risk.
- A3. To develop the ability to solve a broad range of engineering problems, some complex and novel, using contemporary ideas and techniques.
- A4. To enable students to manage their own learning, communicate effectively and make use of primary source materials.
- A5. To put human and project management theory into practice through team-working and opportunities for leadership experience.
- A6. To provide insight into engineering practice and commercial aspects of engineering and design.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
-
UK Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education (QAA) – ‘Subject Benchmark Statement for Engineering’, (Feb.2015).
-
Engineering Council (UK). ‘UK-SPEC, UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence’, 3rd Edition, Jan.2014.
-
Engineering Council (UK). ‘The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes’, 3rd Edition, May 2014.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
- K1. the underpinning science, mathematics and other disciplines associated with careers related to product design engineering;
- K2. engineering principles, quantitative methods, mathematical and computer models;
- K3. the design processes and methodologies and the ability to manage a design project;
- K4. codes of practice, industry standards and quality issues, including new developments and limitations, as applicable to a product design engineering career;
- K5. intellectual property issues and of environmental, legal and ethical issues within the modern industrial world;
- K6. developing technologies in two areas of specialisation and an understanding of the broad range of concepts necessary for effective product design and manufacture;
- K7. management and business practices appropriate for a career in product design engineering and an understanding of the commercial and economic context and drivers of the engineering business;
- K8. the characteristics of engineering materials, equipment and processes and mechanical workshop practices.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
The MEng graduate will be able to use such knowledge and understanding in a creative way and be able to:
- C1. identify and define a design engineering problem in unfamiliar situations and generate innovative solutions:
- C2. apply and adapt appropriate methods to model such solutions and assess the limitations of each method;
- C3. analyse engineering solutions using contemporary computer-based systems and appreciate their limitations;
- C4. investigate new and emerging technologies using fundamental knowledge;
- C5. analyse, objectively evaluate and apply the principles of industrial design, engineering design and manufacturing design to product design and development;
- C6. extract, from given data, that which is pertinent to an unfamiliar problem and make use of it in finding a solution;
- C7. select appropriate data from a range of possible data sets and present them in alternative forms to create deeper understanding and/or greater impact;
- C8. integrate knowledge from all aspects of the programme, applying understanding to novel and challenging situations, while being aware of the limitations of solutions;
- C9. generate an innovative design for systems, components or processes to fulfil new needs.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- P1. manage and lead the design process taking account of customer constraints such as cost, health and safety, risk and environmental issues;
- P2. apply engineering techniques taking account of a range of commercial and industrial constraints;
- P3. communicate product design ideas through the presentation of concept drawings, computer visualisations and conventional sketching;
- P4. prepare engineering drawings, computer visualisations and technical reports and give technically competent oral presentations;
- P5. research information and use new methods required for novel situations;
- P6. use appropriate computer software and laboratory equipment;
- P7. recognise the capabilities and limitations of computer based methods for engineering problem solving.
- P8. demonstrate advanced organisational and management skills.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- T1. demonstrate a high level of numeracy;
- T2. apply creative and structured approaches to problem solving;
- T3. communicate effectively through written, graphical, interpersonal and presentation skills;
- T4. design and implement computer-based information systems;
- T5. work independently;
- T6. work in and lead a team;
- T7. organise and manage time and resources effectively;
- T8. learn new theories, concepts, methods etc. in an unfamiliar situation outside the discipline area.
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
MAA306 | Mathematics for Manufacturing Engineering | 20 | 1+2 | C |
MMA102 | Engineering Science 1 | 20 | 1+2 | C |
MMA401 | Product Design (Ergonomics & Visualisation) | 20 | 1+2 | C |
MMA604 | Materials and Manufacturing Processes | 20 | 1+2 | C |
MMA400 | Manufacturing Design 1 | 10 | 1 | C |
MMA501 | Integrating Studies 1a | 10 | 1 | C |
MMA504 | Integrating Studies 1b | 10 | 2 | C |
MMA900 | Electronic and Electrical Technology 1 | 10 | 2 | C |
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
MMB501 | Inegrating Studies | 20 | 1+2 | C |
MMB504 | Application of Product Design | 20 | 1+2 | C |
MMB112 | Engineering Science 2 | 10 | 1 | C |
MMB310 | Engineering and Management Modelling | 10 | 1 | C |
MMB400 | Industrial Design | 10 | 1 | C |
MMB610 | Manufacturing Technology | 10 | 1 | C |
MMA210 | Manufacturing Management | 10 | 2 | C |
MMB301 | Software Engineering | 10 | 2 | C |
MMB413 | Machine Design | 10 | 2 | C |
MAB206 | Statistics | 10 | 2 | C |
4.3 Part I – Optional Placement Year
Code | Title |
WSI010 | DIS Industrial Placement (non-credit bearing) |
WSI020 | DPS Industrial Placement (non-credit bearing) |
WSI035 | DIntS Industrial Placement (non-credit bearing) |
For candidates who are registered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS) or Diploma in International Studies (DintS), Part I will be followed between Part B and C or Parts C and D and will be in accordance with the provision of Regulation XI and Regulation XX.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
Students must choose 30 credits of Options (O). Students MUST select 10 credits from Group A (OA) and no more than 10 credits from each group.
Modules indicated with ** are paired together. For example, (1a) in part C is paired with (2a) in part D. Similarly (1e) in Part D is paired with (2e) also in part D. All students MUST COMPLETE AT LEAST TWO of these specialist module pairs during Part C or D. The second module of a pair (numbered 2) may not be taken without the prerequisite module (numbered 1) but the preliminary modules may be studied independently.
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
WSC551 | Individual Project | 50 | 1+2 | C |
WSC200 | Engineering Management: Finance, Law and Quality | 10 | 1 | C |
WSC401 | Product Design | 10 | 1 | C |
WSC602 | Sustainable Manufacturing | 10 | 1 | C |
WSC606 | Additive Manufacturing for Product Development | 10 | 1 | C (1d) |
MPC012 | Polymer Engineering 1: Processing | 10 | 2 | OA (1b) |
WSC106 | Finite Element Analysis | 10 | 2 | OA (1c) |
WSC300 | Product Information Systems - Computer Aided Design | 10 | 2 | OB |
WSC203 | Manufacturing Planning & Control | 10 | 2 | OC |
WSC610 | Healthcare Engineering | 10 | 2 | OD |
WSC700 | Sports Engineering | 10 | 2 | OD |
All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.
4.5 Part D - Degree Modules
At least 70 weight of level 7 (D modules) must be taken in Part D.
Students must choose 70 credits of options (O). Students MUST select 10 credits from group A and 20 credits from group H. The remaining 40 credits should be no more than 10 credits from each group (B-G, I-M). Note there will be at least 20 weight of linked modules (follow on from pre-requisite modules in Part C) across both semesters.
Students who elect to study WSC900 (1e) must also study WSD900 (2e) in Part D.
Students cannot choose modules already studied in Part C.
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
WSD503 | Project Engineering - Total Product Design | 30 | 1+2 | C |
WSD207 | Project Management | 10 | 1 | C |
WSD407 | Sustainable Product Design | 10 | 2 | C |
MPD014 | Polymer Engineering - Properties & Design | 10 | 1 | OA (2b) |
WSD100 | Structural Integrity | 10 | 1 | OA (2c) |
WSC600 | Advanced Manufacturing Processes and Technology 1 | 10 | 1 | OB (1a) |
WSC900 | Computer Control and Instrumentation | 10 | 1 | OB (1e) |
WSC201 | Organisation Structure & Strategy | 10 | 1 | OC |
WSC400 | Design for Assembly | 10 | 1 | OD |
WSD900 | Mechatronics | 20 | 1+2 | OF (2e) |
LAN*** | University Wide Language | 10 | 1 | OG |
WSD601 | Advanced Manufacturing Processes and Technology 2 | 10 | 2 | OH (2a) |
WSD606 | Additive Manufacturing and Reverse Engineering | 10 | 2 | OH (2d) |
WSC206 | Product Innovation Management | 10 | 2 | OI |
WSC603 | Metrology | 10 | 2 | OJ |
WSC610 | Healthcare Engineering | 10 | 2 | OK |
WSC700 | Sports Engineering | 10 | 2 | OK |
WSC911 | Industrial Machine Vision | 10 | 2 | OL |
LAN*** | University Wide Language | 10 | 2 | OM |
All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.
4.6 Studies Overseas
Students may choose to study Semester 1 only, during their Part D at an approved Overseas Higher Education Institution. The mix of subjects of the learning programme must first be approved by the Programme Director. An acceptable learning programme must include a major group project and studies at an advanced/masters level with modular weight not less than 20.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 Criteria for Progression and Award of Degree
Progression from Part A to Part B, from Part B to Part C and from Part C to Part D will be subject to the provisions set out in Regulation XX and in addition candidates must accumulate 120 credits and achieve an overall average of 55% in each part.
To qualify for the award of the Degree of Masters of Engineering, candidates must accumulate 100 credits from Part D, with no module mark less than 30%.
5.2 Criteria for Candidates who do not meet the requirements for progression or the Award of a Degree
Any candidate who fails to achieve the criteria for progression from Part A to Part B, Part B to Part C or Part C to Part D shall have the opportunity to repeat module assessments in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XX. Alternatively, the candidate may elect to enter the BEng Honours Degree programme in Product Design Engineering, provided that the candidate has satisfied the criteria for progression on the BEng programme at the appropriate point.
Any candidate who, having successfully completed Part C, is unable to commence or complete Part D or who fails to achieve the criteria necessary for the award of MEng may, at the discretion of the Programme Board, be awarded the degree of BEng in Product Design Engineering with a classification corresponding to the candidate’s achievements in the Part B and Part C assessments and determined on the basis of the weightings given for the BEng programme.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidate’s final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B, C and D in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The overall average percentage marks for each part will be combined in the ratio (Part B 20: Part C 40: Part D 40) to determine the overall average percentage mark for the Programme (the Programme Mark).
Programme Specification
MM MEng (Hons) Mechanical Engineering (2018 Entry)
Academic Year: 2019/20
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET) Institution of Mechanical Engineers (IMechE) |
Final award | MEng / MEng+DIS / MEng+DPS / MEng+DInts |
Programme title | Mechanical Engineering |
Programme code | WSUM03 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is either 8 semesters, or 10 semesters if the students undertake the additional period of study normally between Parts B and C for the award of the Diploma of Industrial Studies, the Diploma of International Studies or the Diploma of Professional Studies. |
UCAS code | H302, H303 |
Admissions criteria | MEng -
MEng+DIS /DInts - |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
Aims:
- A1. To prepare highly skilled graduates to meet the business and leadership requirements of industry and to pursue careers in Mechanical Engineering across a range of industries and activities including design, development, and analysis of complex systems
- A2. To provide as high-quality learning experience across a complete range of core subjects in order to give students the necessary technical skills to understand mechanical systems and solve engineering problems
- A3. To promote high-quality engineering practice by applying appropriate knowledge, skills, tools and techniques in the analysis, diagnosis and solution of industry-related problems.
- A4. To develop engineers capable of designing systems and managing the development process in order to deliver solutions that meet the requirements of customers
- A5. To impart an appreciation of the essential practical and commercial, ethical, business, sustainability and legal constraints of professional engineering
- A6. To support personal and professional development and foster creativity, develop design capability and teach the communication skills necessary to put ideas into practice
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- UK Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education (QAA) – ‘Subject Benchmark Statement for Engineering’, (Feb.2015)
-
Engineering Council (UK). ‘UK-SPEC, UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence’, 3rd Edition, Jan 2014
-
Engineering Council (UK). ‘The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes’, 3rd Edition, May 2014
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
- K1. The underpinning scientific, mathematical and engineering principles associated with mechanical engineering;
- K2. The characteristics of engineering materials, equipment and processes and an awareness of basis mechanical workshop practices;
- K3. Engineering principles, quantitative methods, mathematical and computer models;
- K4. Relevant codes of practice and regulatory framework and operational practices for safe operation of engineering processes;
- K5. Recognise the professional and ethic responsibilities of engineers;
- K6. Principles of industrial design, engineering design and manufacturing design;
- K7. Management techniques and an understanding of the commercial and economical context of the engineering business.
- K8. Developing technologies in areas of specialization and understanding of concepts from areas peripheral to mechanical engineering, including a thorough appreciation of microprocessors and machine control software.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- C1. Apply the principles of engineering science in developing solutions to practical mechanical engineering problems;
- C2. Create new engineering components and processes through the synthesis of ideas from a range of sources using appropriate design principles, techniques and codes of practice;
- C3. Integrate, evaluate and make use of information and data from a wide variety of sources including other engineering disciplines;
- C4. Generate innovative designs by evaluating and responding to customer needs, including fitness for purpose and cost;
- C5. Analyse complex mechanical systems, processes and components;
- C6. Investigate and define engineering problems within the framework of economic, social, ethical and environmental issues and show the ability to assess risk;
- C7. Investigate new and emerging technologies using fundamental knowledge and learn new theories, concepts and methods in an familiar situations.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- P1. Apply computer-based and mathematical methods to the modelling and analysis of engineering system, components and products;
- P2. Define and solve practical engineering problems;
- P3. Use laboratory and basis workshop equipment in an appropriate and safe manner;
- P4. Generate ideas for new products and develop and evaluate a range of new solutions;
- P5. Gather and interpret information and evaluate designs;
- P6. Demonstrate the ability to manage the design process and apply appropriate techniques and codes of practice to the design of components and systems;
- P7. Prepare mechanical engineering drawings, computer-graphics and technical reports and give technically competent oral presentations;
- P8. Apply relevant codes of practice and industry standards;
- P9. Demonstrate the ability to work with technical uncertainty;
- P10. Demonstrate high levels of organizational and project management skills.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- T1. Demonstrate a high level of numeracy;
- T2. Search and retrieve information, ideas and data from a variety of sources;
- T3. Adopt systematic approach to the solution of unfamiliar problems;
- T4. Select and analyse appropriate evidence and data to solve problems;
- T5. Solve problems applying engineering techniques and tools;
- T6. Communicate effectively by means of technical reports, papers, graphical aids, interpersonal and presentational skills;
- T7. Design and implement basic computer based information systems;
- T8. Organise and manage time and resources effectively: develop work plans, take responsibility for their execution;
- T9. Undertake most of the technical roles within a team and exercise leadership;
- T10. Plan self-learning and improve performance, as the foundation for lifelong learning.
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
MAA310 | Mathematics for Mechanical Engineering | 20 | 1+2 | C |
WSA101 | Statics and Dynamics | 20 | 1+2 | C |
WSA508 | Engineering Principles & Professional Skills | 20 | 1+2 | C |
WSA604 | Materials & Manufacturing Processes | 20 | 1+2 | C |
WSA800 | Thermodynamics and Fluid Mechanics | 20 | 1+2 | C |
WSA901 | Electronic Systems for Mechanical Processes | 10 | 1 | C |
WSA100 | Mechanics of Materials | 10 | 2 | C |
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
WSB300 | Engineering Computation | 10 | 1+2 | C |
WSB500 | Application of Engineering Design: Industry Based Project | 10 | 1+2 | C |
MAB110 | Mathematics for Mechanical Engineering 3 | 10 | 1 | C |
WSB100 | Mechanics of Materials 2 | 10 | 1 | C |
WSB101 | Engineering Dynamics 2 | 10 | 1 | C |
WSB104 | Control Engineering | 10 | 1 | C |
WSB800 | Thermodynamics 2 | 10 | 1 | C |
WSB045 | Electrical Power & Machines | 10 | 2 | C |
WSB403 | Design of Machine Elements | 10 | 2 | C |
WSB404 | Computer Aided Design, Manufacture and Test (CADMAT) | 10 | 2 | C |
WSB801 | Heat Transfer | 10 | 2 | C |
WSB802 | Fluid Mechanics 2 | 10 | 2 | C |
4.3 Part I – Optional Placement Year
Code | Title |
WSI010 | DIS Industrial Placement (non-credit bearing) |
WSI020 | DPS Industrial Placement (non-credit bearing) |
WSI035 | DIntS Industrial Placement (non-credit bearing) |
For candidates who are registered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS), Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) or Diploma in International Studies (DintS), Part I will be followed between Parts B and C or Part C and D and will be in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XI and Regulation XX.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
Students MUST choose 20 credits of options (O) in Semester One and 30 credits in Semester Two.
TWO modules (20 credits) must be selected from Group A or Group B (both from the same group), OR ONE module from Group A or B and ONE module from Group C.
ONE module (10 credits) must be selected from each of Group D, E, F and G. Modules in Group D and E are paired with modules in Part D.
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
WSD550 | Individual Project | 50 | 1+2 | C |
WSC200 | Engineering Management: Finance, Law and Quality | 10 | 1 | C |
WSC900 | Computer Control and Instrumentation | 10 | 1 | C |
WSC801 | Advanced Heat Transfer | 10 | 1 | OA |
WSC804 | Energy Systems Analysis | 10 | 1 | OA |
WSC910 | Laser Materials Processing | 10 | 1 | OA |
WSC104 | Robotics and Control | 10 | 1 | OB |
WSC107 | Contacts Mechanics: Tribology | 10 | 1 | OB |
LAN*** | University Wide Language | 10 | 1 | OC |
WSC101 | Vibration and Noise | 10 | 2 | OD (1a) |
WSC105 | Kinematics and Dynamics of Machinery | 10 | 2 | OD (1b) |
WSC106 | Finite Element Analysis | 10 | 2 | OE (1c) |
WSC802 | Computation Fluid Dynamics I | 10 | 2 | OE (1d) |
MPC012 | Polymer Engineering - Processing and Manufacture | 10 | 2 | OE (1e) |
WSC301 | Computer Aided Engineering | 10 | 2 | OF |
WSC803 | Ballistics and Rocket Propulsion | 10 | 2 | OF |
MPC014 | Materials in Service | 10 | 2 | OF |
MPC102 | Fracture and Failure | 10 | 2 | OF |
LAN*** | University Wide Language | 10 | 2 | OF |
WSC911 | Industrial Machine Vision | 10 | 2 | OG |
All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.
4.5 Part D - Degree Modules
Students must choose 40 credits of optional modules (O) in Semester One and 40 credits in Semester Two.
ONE module (10 credits) must be from Group A. TWO modules (20 credits) must be from Group B. Modules in Group B are linked to modules in Part C.
ONE module (10 credits) must be from Group C.
No more than ONE module to be chosen from each of Groups D, E, F or G.
Students cannot register for modules already studied in Part C.
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
WSD403 | Engineering Design Management | 10 | 1 | C |
WSD503 | Project Engineering - Total Product Design | 30 | 1+2 | C |
BSD523 | Enterprise Technology | 10 | 1 | OA |
WSD500 | Project Leadership | 10 | 1 | OA |
WSD100 | Structural Integrity | 10 | 1 | OB (2c) |
WSD101 | Drive Train Dynamics | 10 | 1 | OB |
WSD102 | Non-Linear Dynamics | 10 | 1 | OB (2a) |
WSD802 | Computational Fluid Dynamics 2 | 10 | 1 | OB (2d) |
MPD014 | Polymer Engineering 2 - Properties and Design | 10 | 1 | OB (2e) |
WSC602 | Sustainable Manufacturing | 10 | 1 | OC |
WSC606 | Additive Manufacturing for Product Development | 10 | 1 | OC |
WSD900 | Mechatronics | 20 | 1+2 | OC |
LAN*** | University Wide Language | 10 | 1 | OC |
WSD902 | Laser & Optical Measurements | 20 | 2 | OC |
WSC301 | Computer Aided Engineering | 10 | 2 | OD |
WSC800 | Internal Combustion Engines | 20 | 2 | OD |
WSC803 | Ballistics and Rocket Propulsion | 10 | 2 | OD |
WSC610 | Healthcare Engineering | 10 | 2 | OE |
WSC700 | Sports Engineering | 10 | 2 | OE |
WSD407 | Sustainable Product Design | 10 | 2 | OF |
WSD606 | Additive Manufacturing and Reverse Engineering | 10 | 2 | OF |
LAN*** | University Wide Language | 10 | 2 | OG |
All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.
4.6 Studies Overseas
Students may choose to study Semester 1 (only) during their Part D, at an approved Overseas Higher Education Institution. The mix of subjects of the learning programme must first be approved by the programme director for their course. An acceptable learning programme should, where possible, include a group project and studies at an advanced/masters level.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
Progression from Part A to Part B, from Part B to Part C and from Part C to Part D will be subject to the provisions set out in Regulation XX and in addition candidates must accumulate 120 credits and achieve an overall average of 55% in each part.
To qualify for the award of the Degree of Master of Engineering, candidates must accumulate 100 credits from Part D, with no module mark less than 30%.
5.2 Criteria for candidates who do not meet the requirements for Progression or the award of a Degree.
Any candidate who fails to achieve the criteria for progression from Part A to Part B, Part B to Part C and from Part C to Part D shall have the opportunity to repeat Module Assessments in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XX. Alternatively, the candidate may elect to enter the BEng degree programme in Mechanical Engineering, before commencing Part C, provided that the candidate has satisfied the criteria for progression for that programme at the appropriate point.
In exceptional circumstances, any candidate who, having successfully completed Part C, is unable to commence or complete Part D or fails to achieve the criteria necessary for the award of the degree of MEng may, at the discretion of the Programme Board, be awarded the degree of BEng in Mechanical Engineering with a classification corresponding to the candidate’s achievements in the Part B and Part C assessments and determined on the basis of the weightings given for the BEng programme.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level modules assessments in Parts B, C and D in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The average percentage marks will be combined in the ratio Part B - 20, Part C - 40, Part D – 40 to determine the overall average percentage mark for the programme (the programme mark).
Programme Specification
MM MEng (Hons) Mechanical Engineering (Students undertaking Part C in 2019)
Academic Year: 2019/20
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET) Institution of Mechanical Engineers (IMechE) |
Final award | MEng / MEng+DIS / MEng+DPS / MEng+DInts |
Programme title | Mechanical Engineering |
Programme code | WSUM03 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is either 8 semesters, or 10 semesters if the students undertake the additional period of study normally between Parts B and C for the award of the Diploma of Industrial Studies, the Diploma of International Studies or the Diploma of Professional Studies. |
UCAS code | H302, H303 |
Admissions criteria | MEng - MEng+DIS /DInts - |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
Aims:
- A1. To prepare highly skilled graduates to pursue careers in Mechanical Engineering across a range of industries and activities including design, development, and analysis of complex systems
- A2. To provide as high-quality learning experience across a complete range of core subjects in order to give students the necessary technical skills to understand mechanical systems and solve engineering problems
- A3. To promote high-quality engineering practice by applying appropriate knowledge, skills, tools and techniques in the analysis, diagnosis and solution of industry-related problems.
- A4. To develop engineers capable of designing systems and managing the development process in order to deliver solutions that meet the requirements of customers
- A5. To impart an appreciation of the essential practical and commercial, ethical, business, sustainability and legal constraints of professional engineering
- A6. To support personal and professional development and foster creativity, develop design capability and teach the communication skills necessary to put ideas into practice
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- UK Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education (QAA) – ‘Subject Benchmark Statement for Engineering’, (Feb.2015)
-
Engineering Council (UK). ‘UK-SPEC, UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence’, 3rd Edition, Jan 2014
-
Engineering Council (UK). ‘The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes’, 3rd Edition, May 2014
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
- K1. The underpinning scientific, mathematical and engineering principles associated with mechanical engineering;
- K2. The characteristics of engineering materials, equipment and processes and an awareness of basis mechanical workshop practices;
- K3. Engineering principles, quantitative methods, mathematical and computer models;
- K4. Relevant codes of practice and regulatory framework and operational practices for safe operation of engineering processes;
- K5. Recognise the professional and ethic responsibilities of engineers;
- K6. Principles of industrial design, engineering design and manufacturing design;
- K7. Management techniques and an understanding of the commercial and economical context of the engineering business.
- K8. Developing technologies in areas of specialization and understanding of concepts from areas peripheral to mechanical engineering, including a thorough appreciation of microprocessors and machine control software.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- C1. Apply the principles of engineering science in developing solutions to practical mechanical engineering problems;
- C2. Create new engineering components and processes through the synthesis of ideas from a range of sources using appropriate design principles, techniques and codes of practice;
- C3. Integrate, evaluate and make use of information and data from a wide variety of sources including other engineering disciplines;
- C4. Generate innovative designs by evaluating and responding to customer needs, including fitness for purpose and cost;
- C5. Analyse complex mechanical systems, processes and components;
- C6. Investigate and define engineering problems within the framework of economic, social, ethical and environmental issues and show the ability to assess risk;
- C7. Investigate new and emerging technologies using fundamental knowledge and learn new theories, concepts and methods in an familiar situations.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- P1. Apply computer-based and mathematical methods to the modelling and analysis of engineering system, components and products;
- P2. Define and solve practical engineering problems;
- P3. Use laboratory and basis workshop equipment in an appropriate and safe manner;
- P4. Generate ideas for new products and develop and evaluate a range of new solutions;
- P5. Gather and interpret information and evaluate designs;
- P6. Demonstrate the ability to manage the design process and apply appropriate techniques and codes of practice to the design of components and systems;
- P7. Prepare mechanical engineering drawings, computer-graphics and technical reports and give technically competent oral presentations;
- P8. Apply relevant codes of practice and industry standards;
- P9. Demonstrate the ability to work with technical uncertainty;
- P10. Demonstrate high levels of organizational and project management skills.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- T1. Demonstrate a high level of numeracy;
- T2. Search and retrieve information, ideas and data from a variety of sources;
- T3. Adopt systematic approach to the solution of unfamiliar problems;
- T4. Select and analyse appropriate evidence and data to solve problems;
- T5. Solve problems applying engineering techniques and tools;
- T6. Communicate effectively by means of technical reports, papers, graphical aids, interpersonal and presentational skills;
- T7. Design and implement basic computer based information systems;
- T8. Organise and manage time and resources effectively: develop work plans, take responsibility for their execution;
- T9. Undertake most of the technical roles within a team and exercise leadership;
- T10. Plan self-learning and improve performance, as the foundation for lifelong learning.
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
MAA310 | Mathematics for Mechanical Engineering | 20 | 1+2 | C |
MMA101 | Statics and Dynamics | 20 | 1+2 | C |
MMA508 | Engineering Principles & Professional Skills | 20 | 1+2 | C |
MMA604 | Materials & Manufacturing Processes | 20 | 1+2 | C |
MMA800 | Thermodynamics and Fluid Mechanics | 20 | 1+2 | C |
MMA901 | Electronic Systems for Mechanical Processes | 10 | 1 | C |
MMA100 | Mechanics of Materials | 10 | 2 | C |
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
WSB300 | Engineering Computation | 10 | 1+2 | C |
WSB500 | Application of Engineering Design: Industry Based Project | 10 | 1+2 | C |
MAB110 | Mathematics for Mechanical Engineering | 10 | 1 | C |
WSB100 | Mechanics of Materials 2 | 10 | 1 | C |
WSB101 | Engineering Dynamics 2 | 10 | 1 | C |
WSB104 | Control Engineering | 10 | 1 | C |
WSB800 | Thermodynamics 2 | 10 | 1 | C |
WSB045 | Electrical Power & Machines | 10 | 2 | C |
WSB403 | Design of Machine Elements | 10 | 2 | C |
WSB404 | Computer Aided Design, Manufacture and Test (CADMAT) | 10 | 2 | C |
WSB801 | Heat Transfer | 10 | 2 | C |
WSB802 | Fluid Mechanics | 10 | 2 | C |
4.3 Part I – Optional Placement Year
Code | Title |
WSI010 | DIS Industrial Placement (non-credit bearing) |
WSI020 | DPS Industrial Placement (non-credit bearing) |
WSI035 | DIntS Industrial Placement (non-credit bearing) |
For candidates who are registered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS), Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) or Diploma in International Studies (DintS), Part I will be followed between Parts B and C or Part C and D and will be in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XI and Regulation XX.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
Students MUST choose 20 credits of options (O) in Semester One and 30 credits in Semester Two.
TWO modules (20 credits) must be selected from Group A or Group B (both from the same group), OR ONE module from Group A or B and ONE module from Group C.
ONE module (10 credits) must be selected from each of Group D, E, F and G. Modules in Group D and E are paired with modules in Part D.
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
WSD550 | Individual Project | 50 | 1+2 | C |
WSC200 | Engineering Management: Finance, Law and Quality | 10 | 1 | C |
WSC900 | Computer Control and Instrumentation | 10 | 1 | C |
WSC801 | Advanced Heat Transfer | 10 | 1 | OA |
WSC804 | Energy Systems Analysis | 10 | 1 | OA |
WSC910 | Laser Materials Processing | 10 | 1 | OA |
WSC104 | Robotics and Control | 10 | 1 | OB |
WSC107 | Contacts Mechanics: Tribology | 10 | 1 | OB |
LAN*** | University Wide Language | 10 | 1 | OC |
WSC101 | Vibration and Noise | 10 | 2 | OD (1a) |
WSC105 | Kinematics and Dynamics of Machinery | 10 | 2 | OD (1b) |
WSC106 | Finite Element Analysis | 10 | 2 | OE (1c) |
WSC802 | Computation Fluid Dynamics I | 10 | 2 | OE (1d) |
MPC012 | Polymer Engineering - Processing and Manufacture | 10 | 2 | OE (1e) |
WSC301 | Computer Aided Engineering | 10 | 2 | OF |
WSC803 | Ballistics and Rocket Propulsion | 10 | 2 | OF |
MPC014 | Materials in Service | 10 | 2 | OF |
MPC102 | Fracture and Failure | 10 | 2 | OF |
LAN*** | University Wide Language | 10 | 2 | OF |
WSC911 | Industrial Machine Vision | 10 | 2 | OG |
All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.
4.5 Part D - Degree Modules
Students must choose 40 credits of optional modules (O) in Semester One and 40 credits in Semester Two.
ONE module (10 credits) must be from Group A. TWO modules (20 credits) must be from Group B. Modules in Group B are linked to modules in Part C.
ONE module (10 credits) must be from Group C.
No more than ONE module to be chosen from each of groups D, E, F, or G.
Students cannot register for modules already studied in Part C.
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
WSD403 | Engineering Design Management | 10 | 1 | C |
WSD503 | Project Engineering | 30 | 1+2 | C |
BSD523 | Enterprise Technology | 10 | 1 | OA |
WSD500 | Project Leadership | 10 | 1 | OA |
WSD100 | Structural Integrity | 10 | 1 | OB (2c) |
WSD101 | Drive Train Dynamics | 10 | 1 | OB |
WSD102 | Non-Linear Dynamics | 10 | 1 | OB (2a) |
WSD105 | Dynamics of Engineering | 10 | 1 | OB (2b) |
WSD802 | Computational Fluid Dynamics 2 | 10 | 1 | OB (2d) |
MPD014 | Polymer Engineering 2 - Properties and Design | 10 | 1 | OB (2e) |
WSC602 | Sustainable Manufacturing | 10 | 1 | OC |
WSC606 | Additive Manufacturing for Product Development | 10 | 1 | OC |
WSD900 | Mechatronics | 20 | 1+2 | OC |
WSD902 | Laser & Optical Measurements | 10 | 2 | OC |
LAN*** | University Wide Language | 10 | 1 | OC |
WSC301 | Computer Aided Engineering | 10 | 2 | OD |
WSC800 | Internal Combustion Engines | 20 | 2 | OD |
WSC803 | Ballistics and Rocket Propulsion | 10 | 2 | OD |
WSC610 | Healthcare Engineering | 10 | 2 | OE |
WSC700 | Sports Engineering | 10 | 2 | OE |
WSD407 | Sustainable Product Design | 10 | 2 | OF |
WSD606 | Additive Manufacturing and Reverse Engineering | 10 | 2 | OF |
LAN*** | University Wide Language | 10 | 2 | OG |
All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.
4.7 Studies Overseas
Students may choose to study Semester 1 (only) during their Part D, at an approved Overseas Higher Education Institution. The mix of subjects of the learning programme must first be approved by the programme director for their course. An acceptable learning programme should, where possible, include a group project and studies at an advanced/masters level.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
Progression from Part A to Part B, from Part B to Part C and from Part C to Part D will be subject to the provisions set out in Regulation XX and in addition candidates must accumulate 120 credits and achieve an overall average of 55% in each part.
To qualify for the award of the Degree of Master of Engineering, candidates must accumulate 100 credits from Part D, with no module mark less than 30%.
5.2 Criteria for candidates who do not meet the requirements for Progression or the award of a Degree.
Any candidate who fails to achieve the criteria for progression from Part A to Part B, Part B to Part C and from Part C to Part D shall have the opportunity to repeat Module Assessments in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XX. Alternatively, the candidate may elect to enter the BEng degree programme in Mechanical Engineering, before commencing Part C, provided that the candidate has satisfied the criteria for progression for that programme at the appropriate point.
In exceptional circumstances, any candidate who, having successfully completed Part C, is unable to commence or complete Part D or fails to achieve the criteria necessary for the award of the degree of MEng may, at the discretion of the Programme Board, be awarded the degree of BEng in Mechanical Engineering with a classification corresponding to the candidate’s achievements in the Part B and Part C assessments and determined on the basis of the weightings given for the BEng programme.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level modules assessments in Parts B, C and D in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The average percentage marks will be combined in the ratio Part B - 20, Part C - 40, Part D – 40 to determine the overall average percentage mark for the programme (the programme mark).
Programme Specification
MM MEng (Hons) Mechanical Engineering (Students undertaking Part D in 2019)
Academic Year: 2019/20
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET) Institution of Mechanical Engineers (IMechE) |
Final award | MEng / MEng+DIS / MEng+DPS / MEng+DIntS |
Programme title | Mechanical Engineering |
Programme code | WSUM03 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is either 8 semesters, or 10 semesters if the students undertake the additional period of study normally between Parts B and C for the award of the Diploma of Industrial Studies, the Diploma of International Studies or the Diploma of Professional Studies. |
UCAS code | H302, H303 |
Admissions criteria | MEng - MEng+DIS /DInts - |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
Aims:
- A1. To prepare highly skilled graduates to pursue careers in Mechanical Engineering across a range of industries and activities including design, development, and analysis of complex systems
- A2. To provide as high-quality learning experience across a complete range of core subjects in order to give students the necessary technical skills to understand mechanical systems and solve engineering problems
- A3. To promote high-quality engineering practice by applying appropriate knowledge, skills, tools and techniques in the analysis, diagnosis and solution of industry-related problems.
- A4. To develop engineers capable of designing systems and managing the development process in order to deliver solutions that meet the requirements of customers
- A5. To impart an appreciation of the essential practical and commercial, ethical, business, sustainability and legal constraints of professional engineering
- A6. To support personal and professional development and foster creativity, develop design capability and teach the communication skills necessary to put ideas into practice
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- UK Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education (QAA) – ‘Subject Benchmark Statement for Engineering’, (Feb.2015)
-
Engineering Council (UK). ‘UK-SPEC, UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence’, 3rd Edition, Jan 2014
-
Engineering Council (UK). ‘The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes’, 3rd Edition, May 2014
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
- K1. The underpinning scientific, mathematical and engineering principles associated with mechanical engineering;
- K2. The characteristics of engineering materials, equipment and processes and an awareness of basis mechanical workshop practices;
- K3. Engineering principles, quantitative methods, mathematical and computer models;
- K4. Relevant codes of practice and regulatory framework and operational practices for safe operation of engineering processes;
- K5. Recognise the professional and ethic responsibilities of engineers;
- K6. Principles of industrial design, engineering design and manufacturing design;
- K7. Management techniques and an understanding of the commercial and economical context of the engineering business.
- K8. Developing technologies in areas of specialization and understanding of concepts from areas peripheral to mechanical engineering, including a thorough appreciation of microprocessors and machine control software.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- C1. Apply the principles of engineering science in developing solutions to practical mechanical engineering problems;
- C2. Create new engineering components and processes through the synthesis of ideas from a range of sources using appropriate design principles, techniques and codes of practice;
- C3. Integrate, evaluate and make use of information and data from a wide variety of sources including other engineering disciplines;
- C4. Generate innovative designs by evaluating and responding to customer needs, including fitness for purpose and cost;
- C5. Analyse complex mechanical systems, processes and components;
- C6. Investigate and define engineering problems within the framework of economic, social, ethical and environmental issues and show the ability to assess risk;
- C7. Investigate new and emerging technologies using fundamental knowledge and learn new theories, concepts and methods in an familiar situations.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- P1. Apply computer-based and mathematical methods to the modelling and analysis of engineering system, components and products;
- P2. Define and solve practical engineering problems;
- P3. Use laboratory and basis workshop equipment in an appropriate and safe manner;
- P4. Generate ideas for new products and develop and evaluate a range of new solutions;
- P5. Gather and interpret information and evaluate designs;
- P6. Demonstrate the ability to manage the design process and apply appropriate techniques and codes of practice to the design of components and systems;
- P7. Prepare mechanical engineering drawings, computer-graphics and technical reports and give technically competent oral presentations;
- P8. Apply relevant codes of practice and industry standards;
- P9. Demonstrate the ability to work with technical uncertainty;
- P10. Demonstrate high levels of organizational and project management skills.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- T1. Demonstrate a high level of numeracy;
- T2. Search and retrieve information, ideas and data from a variety of sources;
- T3. Adopt systematic approach to the solution of unfamiliar problems;
- T4. Select and analyse appropriate evidence and data to solve problems;
- T5. Solve problems applying engineering techniques and tools;
- T6. Communicate effectively by means of technical reports, papers, graphical aids, interpersonal and presentational skills;
- T7. Design and implement basic computer based information systems;
- T8. Organise and manage time and resources effectively: develop work plans, take responsibility for their execution;
- T9. Undertake most of the technical roles within a team and exercise leadership;
- T10. Plan self-learning and improve performance, as the foundation for lifelong learning.
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
MAA310 | Mathematics for Mechanical Engineering | 20 | 1+2 | C |
MMA101 | Statics and Dynamics | 20 | 1+2 | C |
MMA508 | Engineering Principles & Professional Skills | 20 | 1+2 | C |
MMA604 | Materials & Manufacturing Processes | 20 | 1+2 | C |
MMA800 | Thermodynamics and Fluid Mechanics | 20 | 1+2 | C |
MMA901 | Electronic Systems for Mechanical Processes | 10 | 1 | C |
MMA100 | Mechanics of Materials | 10 | 2 | C |
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
MMB300 | Engineering Computation | 10 | 1+2 | C |
MMB500 | Application of Engineering Design: Industry Based Project | 10 | 1+2 | C |
MAB110 | Mathematics for Mechanical Engineering | 10 | 1 | C |
MMB100 | Mechanics of Materials 2 | 10 | 1 | C |
MMB101 | Engineering Dynamics 2 | 10 | 1 | C |
MMB104 | Control Engineering | 10 | 1 | C |
MMB800 | Thermodynamics 2 | 10 | 1 | C |
ELB045 | Electrical Power & Machines | 10 | 2 | C |
MMB403 | Design of Machine Elements | 10 | 2 | C |
MMB404 | Computer Aided Design, Manufacture and Test (CADMAT) | 10 | 2 | C |
MMB801 | Heat Transfer | 10 | 2 | C |
MMB802 | Fluid Mechanics | 10 | 2 | C |
4.3 Part I – Optional Placement Year
Code | Title |
WSI010 | DIS Industrial Placement (non-credit bearing) |
WSI020 | DPS Industrial Placement (non-credit bearing) |
WSI035 | DIntS Industrial Placement (non-credit bearing) |
For candidates who are registered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS) or Diploma in International Studies (DintS), Part I will be followed between Parts B or C and Parts C and D and will be in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XI and Regulation XX.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
Students MUST choose 20 credits of options (O) in Semester One and 30 credits in Semester Two.
TWO modules (20 credits) must be selected from Group A or Group B (both from the same group), OR ONE module from Group A or B and ONE module from Group C.
ONE module (10 credits) must be selected from each of Group D, E and F. Modules in Group D and E are paired with modules in Part D.
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
WSD550 | Individual Project | 50 | 1+2 | C |
WSC200 | Engineering Management: Finance, Law and Quality | 10 | 1 | C |
WSC900 | Computer Control & Instrumentation | 10 | 1 | C |
WSC801 | Advanced Heat Transfer | 10 | 1 | OA |
WSC804 | Energy Systems Analysis | 10 | 1 | OA |
WSC910 | Laser Materials Processing | 10 | 1 | OA |
WSC104 | Robotics and Control | 10 | 1 | OB |
WSC107 | Contacts Mechanics: Tribology | 10 | 1 | OB |
WSC911 | Industrial Machine Vision | 10 | 1 | OB |
LAN*** | University Wide Language | 10 | 1 | OC |
WSC101 | Vibration and Noise | 10 | 2 | OD (1a) |
WSC105 | Kinematics of Machinery | 10 | 2 | OD (1b) |
WSC106 | Finite Element Analysis | 10 | 2 | OE (1c) |
WSC802 | Computation Fluid Dynamics | 10 | 2 | OE (1d) |
MPC012 | Polymer Engineering - Processing & Manufacture | 10 | 2 | OE (1e) |
WSC301 | Computer Aided Engineering | 10 | 2 | OF |
WSC803 | Ballistics and Rocket Propulsion | 10 | 2 | OF |
MPC014 | Materials in Service | 10 | 2 | OF |
MPC102 | Fracture and Failure | 10 | 2 | OF |
LAN*** | University Wide Language | 10 | 2 | OF |
All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.
4.5 Part D - Degree Modules
Students must choose 40 credits of optional modules (O) in Semester One and 40 credits in Semester Two.
ONE module (10 credits) must be from Group A. TWO modules (20 credits) must be from Group B. Modules in Group B are linked to modules in Part C.
ONE module (10 credits) must be from Group C.
No more than ONE module to be chosen from each of Groups D, E, F or G
Students cannot register for modules already studied in Part C.
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
WSD403 | Engineering Design Management | 10 | 1 | C |
WSD503 | Project Engineering - Total Product Design | 30 | 1+2 | C |
BSD523 | Enterprise Technology | 10 | 1 | OA |
WSD500 | Project Leadership | 10 | 1 | OA |
WSD100 | Structural Integrity | 10 | 1 | OB (2c) |
WSD102 | Non-Linear Dynamics | 10 | 1 | OB (2a) |
WSD101 | Drive Train Dynamics | 10 | 1 | OB |
WSD802 | Computational Fluid Dynamics 2 | 10 | 1 | OB (2d) |
MPD014 | Polymer Engineering 2 - Properties and Design | 10 | 1 | OB (2e) |
WSC602 | Sustainable Manufacturing | 10 | 1 | OC |
WSC606 | Additive Manufacturing for Product Development | 10 | 1 | OC |
WSD900 | Mechatronics | 20 | 1+2 | OC |
LAN*** | University Wide Language (Level 3 and above) | 10 | 1 | OC |
WSC301 | Computer Aided Engineering | 10 | 2 | OD |
WSC800 | Internal Combustion Engines | 20 | 2 | OD |
WSC803 | Ballistics and Rocket Propulsion | 10 | 2 | OD |
WSC610 | Healthcare Engineering | 10 | 2 | OE |
WSC700 | Sports Engineering | 10 | 2 | OE |
WSD902 | Laser & Optical Measurements | 20 | 2 | OE |
WSD407 | Sustainable Product Design | 10 | 2 | OF |
WSD606 | Additive Manufacturing and Reverse Engineering | 10 | 2 | OF |
LAN*** | University Wide Language (Level 3 and above) | 10 | 2 | OG |
All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.
4.7 Studies Overseas
Students may choose to study Semester 1 (only) during their Part D, at an approved Overseas Higher Education Institution. The mix of subjects of the learning programme must first be approved by the programme director for their course. An acceptable learning programme should, where possible, include a group project and studies at an advanced/masters level.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
Progression from Part A to Part B, from Part B to Part C and from Part C to Part D will be subject to the provisions set out in Regulation XX and in addition candidates must accumulate 120 credits and achieve an overall average of 55% in each part.
To qualify for the award of the Degree of Master of Engineering, candidates must accumulate 100 credits from Part D, with no module mark less than 30%.
5.2 Criteria for candidates who do not meet the requirements for Progression or the award of a Degree.
Any candidate who fails to achieve the criteria for progression from Part A to Part B, Part B to Part C and from Part C to Part D shall have the opportunity to repeat Module Assessments in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XX. Alternatively, the candidate may elect to enter the BEng degree programme in Mechanical Engineering, before commencing Part C, provided that the candidate has satisfied the criteria for progression for that programme at the appropriate point.
In exceptional circumstances, any candidate who, having successfully completed Part C, is unable to commence or complete Part D or fails to achieve the criteria necessary for the award of the degree of MEng may, at the discretion of the Programme Board, be awarded the degree of BEng in Mechanical Engineering with a classification corresponding to the candidate’s achievements in the Part B and Part C assessments and determined on the basis of the weightings given for the BEng programme.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level modules assessments in Parts B, C and D in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The average percentage marks will be combined in the ratio Part B - 20, Part C - 40, Part D – 40 to determine the overall average percentage mark for the programme (the programme mark).
Programme Specification
MM MEng (Hons) Innovative Manufacturing Engineering (Students undertaking Part D in 2019)
Academic Year: 2019/20
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET) |
Final award | MEng |
Programme title | Innovative Manufacturing Engineering |
Programme code | WSUM06 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is 8 semesters. |
UCAS code | H790 |
Admissions criteria | |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The overall aim of this programme is to equip students with the knowledge, understanding, key skills and attributes to make a substantial impact in manufacturing enterprises and to become future leaders. This is achieved through a combination of taught courses held at the University and integrated industrial placements. Together, these enable rapid development both technically and managerially through observation of the theory applied in an industrial context.
Specific aims are:
• A1. To train passionate and capable manufacturing engineers on a degree programme with strong partnership between higher education and industry.
• A2. To demonstrate, through active learning opportunities, the rewarding and highly varied career opportunities that exist in manufacturing engineering.
• A3. To produce high quality graduates with a strong academic background, combined with excellent communication skills and the ability to progress rapidly to a position of responsibility, and to become future technical and managerial leaders.
• A4. To integrate significant industrial experience, such that graduates are able to make a strong and immediate contribution to engineering businesses.
• A5. To deliver technical depth in core engineering subjects and specialist applications leading to a broad understanding of engineering knowledge, and a critical awareness of current insights in the fields of manufacturing engineering and manufacturing management.
• A6. To encourage students to manage their own learning and make use of primary source materials to solve complex problems individually and in teams.
• A7. To foster a holistic appreciation of the essential practical, commercial and social aspects of engineering.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
-
UK Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education (QAA) – ‘Subject Benchmark Statement for Engineering’, (Feb.2015).
-
Engineering Council (UK). ‘UK-SPEC, UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence’, 3rd Edition, Jan.2014.
-
Engineering Council (UK). ‘The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes’, 3rd Edition, May 2014.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
- K1. the underpinning science, mathematics and other disciplines associated with a career in manufacturing engineering;
- K2. engineering principles and relevant numerical methods and an understanding of the role of information technology in providing support for manufacturing engineers;
- K3. codes of practice, industry standards and quality issues applicable to a career in manufacturing;
- K4. the management of manufacturing methods and the wider business background appropriate to the organisation of a manufacturing enterprise;
- K5. the commercial and economic context, together with the importance of sustainability, legal, ethical and intellectual property issues within the modern industrial world;
- K6. material properties, manufacturing processes and technologies, their limitations and applicability, with an awareness of new developments in these areas;
- K7. the design process related to the manufacturing arena.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
The MEng graduate will also be able to use such knowledge and understanding in a creative way and be able to:
- C1. define an unfamiliar manufacturing related problem, evaluate its technical and business requirements and generate innovative solutions that consider the system as a whole including constraints such as economics, production capabilities and sustainability;
- C2. apply appropriate methods (including analytical and computational methods) to model and critically assess such solutions making allowance for uncertainty in the information available;
- C3. investigate methods to continuously improve manufacturing processes for enhanced quality, sustainability and economics;
- C4. research data and fundamental knowledge from other disciplines and apply the relevant aspects in the solution of unfamiliar problems;
- C5. understand the role of other engineering disciplines and their technical and business constraints.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- P1. use appropriate computer software numerical modelling methods and/or computational techniques to solve engineering problems;
- P2. use laboratory and mechanical workshop equipment competently and safely;
- P3. research information from a wide range of sources;
- P4. prepare engineering drawings and other technical data and present it in alternative forms to create good understanding and/or impact;
- P5. manage the manufacturing related design process taking account of customer constraints such as cost, health and safety and risk.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- T1. critically evaluate an existing or proposed technology;
- T2. use a range of computer based systems and adapt them to other applications;
- T3. communicate effectively through written, graphical, interpersonal and presentation skills;
- T4. monitor and adjust a personal programme of work on an on-going basis and learn independently;
- T5. develop, monitor and update a plan for themselves and/or others, to reflect changing requirements;
- T6. gather information from a range of sources, collate it and present its key findings;
- T7. undertake different roles within a team including leadership.
4. Programme structure
Candidates will normally be expected to complete a four week (minimum) period of industrial experience with a consortium company, if available, or other relevant work experience in lieu, as agreed by the Programme Director, after part A studies and before commencing part B.
Candidates will complete a 10 week (minimum) period of industrial experience with a consortium company, or with any other relevant (partner) company approved by the Programme Director, after Part B studies and before starting Part C. Students will then undertake a further period of industrial experience (usually with the same organisation) for Semester 1 of Part C. During these periods students will be preparing for and undertaking their industry based individual project (WSD216) and personal and professional development (WSC507) modules.
An alternative route is for candidates who cannot find an industrial placement at the end of Part B (for the industry based individual project and professional development modules) to continue their studies in Semester 1 of Part C at the University with the agreement of the Programme Director.
Any candidate unable to meet the above requirements will be eligible to transfer to BEng Manufacturing Engineering at the appropriate programme part.
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
MAA306 | Mathematics for Manufacturing Engineering | 20 | 1+2 | C |
MMA102 | Engineering Science 1 | 20 | 1+2 | C |
MMA604 | Materials & Manufacturing Processes | 20 | 1+2 | C |
MMA400 | Manufacturing Design 1 | 10 | 1 | C |
MMA505 | Integrating Studies 1a for IME | 10 | 1 | C |
MMB610 | Manufacturing Technology | 10 | 1 | C |
MMA210 | Manufacturing Management | 10 | 2 | C |
MMA506 | Integrating Studies 1b for IME | 10 | 2 | C |
MMA900 | Electronics and Electrical Technology1 | 10 | 2 | C |
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
MMB501 | Integrating Studies | 20 | 1+2 | C |
MMB600 | Manufacturing Process Technology | 20 | 1+2 | C |
MMB112 | Engineering Science 2 | 10 | 1 | C |
MMB310 | Engineering and Management Modelling | 10 | 1 | C |
MMB506 | Insight into Industry | 10 | 1 | C |
MMC200 | Engineering Management: Finance, Law and Quality | 10 | 1 | C |
MAB206 | Statistics | 10 | 2 | C |
MMB301 | Software Engineering | 10 | 2 | C |
MMB413 | Machine Design | 10 | 2 | C |
MMC203 | Manufacturing Planning and Control | 10 | 2 | C |
4.3 Part C - Degree Modules
Some modules in Part C and D are paired together. For example, (1a) in part C is paired with (2a) in part D. Similarly (1d) in part D is paired with (2d) also in part D. All students MUST COMPLETE AT LEAST TWO of these specialist module pairs during part C or D. The second module of a pair (numbered 2) may not be taken without the prerequisite module (numbered 1) but the preliminary modules may be studied independently.
For modules WSD216 and WSC507 students will be based at their placement company - Modules are by distance learning. C* is the alternative route for students who are unable to secure an Industrial Placement for Part C (with the agreement of the Programme Director).
ONE optional module must be chosen from each group.
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
WSC507 | Personal and Professional Development | 20 | 1 | C |
WSD216 | Industry Based Individual Project | 40 | 1 | C |
WSC201 | Organisation Structure & Strategy | 10 | 1 | C* |
WSD218 | University Based Individual Project | 50 | 1 | C* |
WSC206 | Product Innovation Management | 10 | 2 | C |
WSC603 | Metrology | 10 | 2 | C |
WSD203 | Lean Operations and Supply Chain Management | 10 | 2 | C |
WSC204 | Management of the Human Resource | 10 | 2 | OA |
WSC300 | Product Information Systems - CAD | 10 | 2 | OA |
WSC106 | Finite Element Analysis | 10 | 2 | OB (1a) |
MPC012 | Polymer Engineering: Processing and Manufacture | 10 | 2 | OB (1b) |
WSC610 | Healthcare Engineering | 10 | 2 | OC |
WSC700 | Sports Engineering | 10 | 2 | OC |
LAN*** | University Wide Language | 10 | 2 | OC |
All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.
4.4 Part D - Degree Modules
A number of modules are paired together. For example, the module marked (1a) in part C is paired with (2a) in part D. Similarly (1d) in part D is paired with (2d) also in part D. All students MUST COMPLETE AT LEAST TWO of these specialist module pairs during part C or D. The second module of a pair (numbered 2) may not be taken without the prerequisite module (numbered 1) but the preliminary modules may be studied independently.
A total weight of 40 credits must be chosen from the optional modules across both semesters (10 credits from Semester 1 and 30 credits from Semester 2).
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
WSD503 | Project Engineering - Total Product Design | 30 | 1+2 | C |
WSC401 | Design Methods and Communication | 10 | 1 | C |
WSC600 | Advanced Manufacturing Processes and Technology 1 | 10 | 1 | C (1d) |
WSC602 | Sustainable Manufacturing | 10 | 1 | C (1c) |
WSD207 | Project Management | 10 | 1 | C |
WSD407 | Sustainable Product Design | 10 | 2 | C (2c) |
WSC201 | Organisation Structure & Strategy | 10 | 1 | OA |
WSC400 | Design for Assembly | 10 | 1 | OA |
WSC606 | Additive Manufacturing for Product Development | 10 | 1 | OA (1e) |
WSD100 | Structural Integrity | 10 | 1 | OA (2a) |
MPD014 | Polymer Engineering - Principles and Design | 10 | 1 | OA (2b) |
LAN*** | University Wide Language | 10 | 1 | OA |
WSD606 | Additive Manufacturing and Reverse Engineering | 10 | 2 | OB (2e) |
WSC204 | Management of the Human Resource | 10 | 2 | OC |
WSC300 | Product Information Systems - Computer Aided Design | 10 | 2 | OC |
WSD601 | Advanced Manufacturing Processes and Technology 2 | 10 | 2 | OC (2d) |
WSC610 | Healthcare Engineering | 10 | 2 | OD |
WSC700 | Sports Engineering | 10 | 2 | OD |
LAN*** | University Wide Language | 10 | 2 | OD |
All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 Criteria for Progression and Award of Degree
In order to progress from Part A to Part B, from Part B to Part C, and from Part C to Part D and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must not only satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX but also:
5.1.1 In order to progress from Part A to Part B, from Part B to Part C, from Part C to Part D candidates must not only satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX but also accumulate at least 120 credits from the Part and a minimum overall average of 55% for the Part.
5.1.2 In order to progress into Part B candidates must normally complete a four week (minimum) period of industrial experience with a partner or consortium company or other relevant organisation agreed by the Programme Director after Part A studies and before starting Part B.
5.1.3 Unless following the alternative route (with the agreement of the Programme Director), candidates must complete a ten week (minimum) period of industrial experience with a consortium or other relevant (partner) company after Part B studies and before starting Part C. Students will also undertake modules WSD216 and WSC507 in a consortium or other relevant (partner) organisation during Semester 1 of Part C.
5.2 Criteria for Candidates who do not receive Permission to Progress or gain the Award of a Degree
Any candidate who fails to achieve the criteria for progression from Part A to Part B, Part B to Part C or Part C to Part D shall have the opportunity to repeat module assessments in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XX.
A candidate who has failed to progress from Part A to Part B or Part B to Part C may elect to enter the BEng Honours Degree programme in Manufacturing Engineering, provided that the candidate has achieved the criteria for progression on the BEng programme at the appropriate point.
A candidate who does not secure a placement with a partner or consortium company before the commencement of Part C will also be allowed to transfer to Part C of an alternative degree programme in the School subject to the approval of the relevant programme Director.
Candidates who do not progress from Part B cannot take up the industrial placement period with the partner or consortium company.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B, C and D in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The overall average percentage marks for each part will be combined in the ratio (Part B 20: Part C 40: Part D 40) to determine the overall average percentage mark for the Programme (the Programme Mark).
Programme Specification
EL MEng (Hons) Electronic and Electrical Engineering (2018 Entry)
Academic Year: 2019/20
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET) |
Final award | MEng / MEng+DIS / MEng+DPS/ MEng+DIntS |
Programme title | Electronic and Electrical Engineering |
Programme code | WSUM10 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is 8 semesters or 10 semesters if taken with the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS), Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) or the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS). The programme is only available on a full-time basis. |
UCAS code | H601, H605 |
Admissions criteria | MEng - MEng+DIS /DPS /DIntS - |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The MEng in Electronic and Electrical Engineering aims to:
- A1. Produce high quality graduates capable of shaping the future of Electronic and Electrical Engineering by becoming leaders in their chosen career, whether in industry or academia
- A2. Provide high-quality teaching and practical experience across a complete range of core subjects in order to give students the skills to investigate new and emerging electronic and electrical engineering problems
- A3. Develop engineers capable of designing innovative systems and managing the development process in order to deliver solutions that meet the requirements of customers
- A4. Produce engineers with extensive knowledge and understanding of engineering management and business practices and of relevant ethical, business, sustainability and legal constraints
- A5. Develop graduates capable of integrating their knowledge of mathematics, science and the broader engineering context to solve complex problems.
- A6. Promote innovation in engineering by applying appropriate knowledge, skills, tools and techniques in in delivering successful solutions to both familiar and unfamiliar technical problems
- A7. Support personal and professional development, including, problem solving, leadership, team work and both oral and written presentation skills, as well as the ability to take the initiative in improving personal performance
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence: Engineering Technician, Incorporated Engineer and Chartered Engineer Standard, Engineering Council UK, 3rd edition, 2013.
- UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence: The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes, Engineering Council UK, 3rd edition, 2014.
- Guidance Note on Academic Accreditation, Engineering Council UK, July 2014.
- The UK Quality Code for Higher Education, The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, April 2012.
- Subject Benchmark Statement: Engineering, The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, November 2010.
- Master's Degree Characteristics, The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, March 2010.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- K1. Demonstrate a comprehensive understanding of scientific, mathematical and engineering principles appropriate to electronic and electrical engineering
- K2. Demonstrate an understanding of general engineering and broader principles relevant to engineering
- K3. Understand the commercial, economic and sustainable aspects in the application of engineering processes
- K4. Demonstrate awareness of the relevant codes of practice and regulatory frameworks and the operational practices for safe operation of engineering processes
- K5. Demonstrate extensive knowledge of the application of management and business practices appropriate to engineering industries, including their limitations
- K6. Recognise the professional and ethical responsibilities of engineers
- K7. Demonstrate awareness of developing technologies in electronic and electrical engineering
- K8. Draw on a deep understanding of electronic and electrical engineering to form original solutions to engineering problems, some of which may have incomplete specifications
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- C1. Apply engineering principles to the analysis of electronic and electrical engineering problems;
- C2. Apply mathematical and computer-based methods for modelling and analysing a range of practical and hypothetical engineering processes, components and products;
- C3. Generate innovative designs for engineering problems within the framework of economic, social, ethical and environmental issues;
- C4. Evaluate and respond to customer needs, including fitness for purpose and cost;
- C5. Follow essential design principles appropriate to relevant components, equipment and associated software.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- P1. Demonstrate a comprehensive understanding of design, modelling, simulation and analytical methods and tools appropriate to electronic and electrical engineering
- P2. Demonstrate a thorough understanding of current practice in defining and solving practical engineering problems, including its limitations and likely future direction
- P3. Demonstrate an ability to manage the design process
- P4. Use conventional laboratory equipment and relevant test and measurement equipment in an appropriate and safe manner
- P5. Apply engineering techniques taking into account relevant codes of practice, commercial constraints and industry standards
- P6. Demonstrate awareness of contractual issues and intellectual property rights
- P7. Work with technical uncertainty
- P8. Use appropriate management tools for project work.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- T1. Search and retrieve information, ideas and data from a variety of sources
- T2. Select and analyse appropriate evidence and data to solve problems;
- T3. Apply skills in problem solving, communication, team working and in the use of general software tools;
- T4. Develop a personal work plan and take responsibility for its execution, independently, as team member or as a team leader;
- T5. Produce appropriate technical reports, papers, diagrams and drawings;
- T6. Plan self-learning and be able to take the initiative in improving personal performance, as the foundation for lifelong learning
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A
Code |
Title |
Weight |
Semester |
C/O |
WSA015 |
Industrial Project in Electronic and Electrical Engineering |
20 |
1+2 |
C |
WSA011 |
Electronic Circuits |
20 |
1 |
C |
WSA010 |
Programming and Software Design |
20 |
1 |
C |
MAA103 |
Core Mathematics 1 |
10 |
1 |
C |
WSA012 |
Electrical Science A |
20 |
2 |
C |
WSA013 |
Digital Systems |
20 |
2 |
C |
MAA203 |
Core Mathematics 2 |
10 |
2 |
C |
4.2 Part B
Code |
Title |
Weight |
Semester |
C/O |
WSB013 |
Robotics Project Design and Management |
20 |
1+2 |
C |
WSB003 |
Electrical Science B |
20 |
1 |
C |
WSB010 |
Electronics |
20 |
1 |
C |
MAB103 |
Advanced Mathematics 1 |
10 |
1 |
C |
WSB002 |
Communications |
20 |
2 |
C |
WSB004 |
Control System Design |
20 |
2 |
C |
MAB203 |
Advanced Mathematics 2 |
20 |
2 |
C |
4.3 Part I
Code | Title |
WSI010 | Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS) (Non-credit bearing) |
WSI020 | Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) (Non-credit bearing) |
WSI035 | Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) (Non-credit bearing) |
For candidates who are registered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS), Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) or Diploma in International Studies (DIntS), Part I will be between Parts B and C or between Parts C and D and will be in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XI and Regulation XX.
4.4 Part C
Students must choose two options ‘o’ from each semester
Code |
Title |
Weight |
Semester |
C/O |
WSD001 |
Team Project |
30 |
1+2 |
C |
WSC200 |
Engineering Management: Finance, Law and Quality |
10 |
1 |
C |
WSC002 |
Digital Communications Theory and Practice |
20 |
1 |
O |
WSC003 |
Sustainable & Renewable Energy Systems |
20 |
1 |
O |
WSC018 |
Embedded Systems Design and Implementation |
20 |
1 |
O |
WSC039 |
Microwave Communications |
20 |
1 |
O |
WSC041 |
Digital and State Space Control |
20 |
1 |
O |
WSC004 |
Computer Networks |
20 |
2 |
O |
WSC014 |
Bioelectricity and Biophotonics Engineering |
20 |
2 |
O |
WSC022 |
Power Electronics |
20 |
2 |
O |
WSC054 |
Electronic Systems Design with FPGAs |
20 |
2 |
O |
WSC055 |
Digital Interfacing and Instrumentation |
20 |
2 |
O |
4.5 Part D
Students must choose optional modules totalling 60 credits.
Code |
Title |
Weight |
Semester |
C/O |
WSD030 |
Advanced Project |
50 |
50 |
c |
WSD034 |
Applying Management Theory |
10 |
10 |
c |
WSD506 |
Fundamentals of Digital Signal Processing |
15 |
15 |
oA |
WSD509 |
Communication Networks |
15 |
15 |
oA |
WSD510 |
Personal Radio Communications |
15 |
15 |
oA |
WSD511 |
Information Theory and Coding |
15 |
15 |
oA |
WSD515 |
Communication Channels |
15 |
15 |
oA |
WSD521 |
Advanced FPGA Design |
15 |
15 |
oA |
WSD531 |
Sustainability and Energy Systems |
15 |
15 |
oA |
WSD533 |
Solar Power |
15 |
15 |
oA |
WSD534 |
Wind Power 1 |
15 |
15 |
oA |
WSD535 |
Water Power |
15 |
15 |
oA |
WSD536 |
Biomass 1 |
15 |
15 |
oA |
WSD568 |
Sensors and Actuators for Control |
15 |
15 |
oA |
WSD508 |
Digital Signal Processing for Software Defined Radio |
15 |
15 |
oA |
WSD516 |
Communications Network Security |
15 |
15 |
oA |
WSD517 |
Mobile Network Technologies |
15 |
15 |
oA |
WSD523 |
Antennas |
15 |
15 |
oA |
WSD526 |
Radio Frequency and Microwave Integrated Circuit Design |
15 |
15 |
oA |
WSD532 |
Integration of Renewables |
15 |
15 |
oA |
WSD538 |
Energy Storage |
10 |
10 |
oA |
WSD539 |
Solar Thermal Systems |
10 |
10 |
oA |
WSD540 |
Advanced Photovoltaics |
10 |
10 |
oA |
WSD032 |
Microwave Circuits Laboratory |
15 |
15 |
oB |
XXXXXX |
Options from the University Catalogue |
30 |
30 |
oC |
The optional modules listed oA are block taught in one week or two week long blocks, while those listed oB run over both semesters.
The option oC allows a free choice of modules worth 30 credits from the University Catalogue. This choice should be restricted to modules from Part C or D level, subject to the overall requirement for the Part that at least 90 credits should be from Part D level or above. The total of 120 credits should be arranged as near to 60 credits per semester as possible.
All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 Criteria for programme progression
Progression from Part A to Part B, from Part B to Part C and from Part C to Part D will be subject to the provisions set out in Regulation XX and in addition candidates must accumulate 120 credits and achieve an overall average of 55% in each part.
At the end of Parts A, B, or C candidates not meeting the progression requirements for the MEng after reassessment, or at the option of the candidate, may transfer to the BEng degree programme providing they meet the minimum requirements set out in Regulation XX.
In the event of a candidate transferring onto the BEng programme following assessment (or reassessment) at the end of Part C the degree mark will be calculated by combining average marks in the ratio Part B:40 and Part C:60. The degree award in this case will be governed by the provisions set out in Regulation XX.
5.2 Degree Award
To qualify for the award of the degree of Master of Engineering, candidates must accumulate 100 credits from Part D, with no module marks less than 30%, in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XX.
In addition, candidates must achieve a minimum mark of 50% in all modules with the prefix WSD5xx in order to accumulate credit.
Should a candidate fail to qualify for the MEng award at the end of part D following reassessment (or at the option of the candidate) the BEng degree will be awarded on the basis of performance at Parts B and C. The degree mark will be calculated by combining average marks in the ratio Part B:40 and Part C:60
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
A candidate's final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments at Parts B, C and D in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 20: Part C 40: Part D 40 to determine the final Programme Mark.
Programme Specification
EL MEng (Hons) Systems Engineering (2018 Entry)
Academic Year: 2019/20
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET) |
Final award | MEng / MEng+DIS / MEng+DPS/ MEng+DIntS |
Programme title | Systems Engineering |
Programme code | WSUM20 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is 8 semesters or 10 semesters if taken with the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS), Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) or the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS). The programme is only available on a full-time basis. |
UCAS code | H660, H641 |
Admissions criteria | MEng - MEng+DIS/ DPS/ DIntS - |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The MEng in Systems Engineering aims to
- A1. Produce high quality graduates to shape the future of Systems Engineering by becoming leaders in industry or engaging in world leading academic research.
- A2. Provide a high-quality learning experience across a complete range of core subjects in order to give students the skills to investigate new and emerging systems engineering problems
- A3. Develop engineers capable of designing innovative systems and managing the development process in order to deliver solutions that meet the requirements of customers
- A4. Produce engineers with extensive knowledge and understanding of engineering management and business practices and of relevant ethical, business, sustainability and legal constraints
- A5. Develop graduates capable of integrating their knowledge of mathematics, science and the broader engineering context to solve complex problems.
- A6. Promote innovation in engineering by applying appropriate knowledge, skills, tools and techniques in delivering successful solutions to both familiar and unfamiliar technical problems
- A7. Support personal and professional development, including, problem solving, leadership, team work and both oral and written presentation skills, as well as the ability to take the initiative in improving personal performance
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence: Engineering Technician, Incorporated Engineer and Chartered Engineer Standard, Engineering Council UK, 3rd edition, 2013.
- UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence: The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes, Engineering Council UK, 3rd edition, 2014.
- Guidance Note on Academic Accreditation, Engineering Council UK, July 2014.
- The UK Quality Code for Higher Education, The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, April 2012.
- Subject Benchmark Statement: Engineering, The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, November 2010.
- Master's Degree Characteristics, The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, March 2010.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- K1. Demonstrate a comprehensive understanding of scientific, mathematical and engineering principles appropriate to systems engineering
- K2. Demonstrate an understanding of general engineering and broader principles relevant to engineering
- K3. Understand the commercial, economic and sustainable aspects in the application of engineering processes
- K4. Demonstrate awareness of the relevant codes of practice and regulatory frameworks and the operational practices for safe operation of engineering processes
- K5. Demonstrate extensive knowledge of the application of management and business practices appropriate to engineering industries, including their limitations
- K6. Recognise the professional and ethical responsibilities of engineers
- K7. Develop awareness of developing technologies in systems engineering
- K8. Draw on a deep understanding of systems to form original solutions to engineering problems, some of which may have incomplete specifications
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- C1. Apply engineering principles to the analysis of systems engineering problems;
- C2. Apply mathematical and computer-based methods for modelling and analysing a range of practical and hypothetical engineering processes, components and products;
- C3. Generate innovative designs for engineering problems within the framework of economic, social, ethical and environmental issues;
- C4. Evaluate and respond to customer needs, including fitness for purpose and cost;
- C5. Follow essential design principles appropriate to relevant components, equipment and associated software.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- P1. Demonstrate a comprehensive understanding of design, modelling, simulation and analytical methods and tools appropriate to systems engineering
- P2. Demonstrate a thorough understanding of current practice in defining and solving practical engineering problems, including its limitations and likely future direction
- P3. Demonstrate an ability to manage the design process
- P4. Use conventional laboratory equipment and relevant test and measurement equipment in an appropriate and safe manner
- P5. Apply engineering techniques taking into account relevant codes of practice, commercial constraints and industry standards
- P6. Demonstrate awareness of contractual issues and intellectual property rights
- P7. Work with technical uncertainty
- P8. Use appropriate management tools for project work.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- T1. Search and retrieve information, ideas and data from a variety of sources
- T2. Select and analyse appropriate evidence and data to solve problems;
- T3. Apply skills in problem solving, communication, team working and in the use of general software tools;
- T4. Develop a personal work plan and take responsibility for its execution, independently, as team member or as a team leader;
- T5. Produce appropriate technical reports, papers, diagrams and drawings;
- T6. Plan self-learning and be able to take the initiative in improving personal performance, as the foundation for lifelong learning
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A
Code |
Title |
Weight |
Semester |
C/O |
WSA016 |
Industrial Project in Systems Engineering |
20 |
1+2 |
C |
WSA011 |
Electronic Circuits |
20 |
1 |
C |
WSA010 |
Programming and Software Design |
20 |
1 |
C |
MAA103 |
Core Mathematics 1 |
10 |
1 |
C |
WSA012 |
Electrical Science A |
20 |
2 |
C |
WSA013 |
Digital Systems |
20 |
2 |
C |
MAA203 |
Core Mathematics 2 |
10 |
2 |
C |
4.2 Part B
Candidates must choose one option ‘o’ from semester 1
Code |
Title |
Weight |
Semester |
C/O |
WSB006 |
Systems Integration |
20 |
1+2 |
C |
WSB007 |
Systems Methods |
20 |
1 |
C |
MAB103 |
Advanced Mathematics 1 |
10 |
1 |
C |
WSB004 | Control System Design | 20 | 2 | C |
WSB009 | Mobile Robots | 20 | 2 | C |
MAB203 |
Advanced Mathematics 2 |
10 |
2 |
C |
WSB010 |
Electronics |
20 |
1 |
O |
WSB014 |
Embedded Systems Programming |
20 |
1 |
O |
WSB140 |
Mechanics for Robotics |
20 |
1 |
O |
4.3 Part I
Code | Title |
WSI010 | Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS) (Non-credit bearing) |
WSI020 | Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) (Non-credit bearing) |
WSI035 | Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) (Non-credit bearing) |
For candidates who are registered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS), Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) or Diploma in International Studies (DIntS), Part I will be followed between Parts B and C or between Parts C and D and will be in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XI and Regulation XX.
4.4 Part C
Candidates must choose one option ‘o’ from each semester
Code |
Title |
Weight |
Semester |
C/O |
WSD001 |
Team Project |
30 |
1+2 |
C |
WSC200 |
Engineering Management: Finance, Law and Quality |
10 |
1 |
C |
DSC502 |
Human Factors in Systems Engineering C |
10 |
1 |
C |
WSC012 |
Systems Engineering Applications |
10 |
1 |
C |
WSC013 |
Systems Architecture, Simulation and Modelling |
20 |
2 |
C |
WSC041 |
Digital and State Space Control |
20 |
1 |
O |
WSC018 |
Embedded Systems Design and Implementation |
20 |
1 |
O |
WSC002 |
Digital Communications Theory and Practice |
20 |
1 |
O |
WSC003 |
Sustainable & Renewable Energy Systems |
20 |
1 |
O |
WSC004 |
Computer Networks |
20 |
2 |
O |
WSC014 |
Bioelectricity and Biophotonics Engineering |
20 |
2 |
O |
WSC054 |
Electronic Systems Design with FPGAs |
20 |
2 |
O |
WSC055 |
Digital Interfacing and Instrumentation |
20 |
2 |
O |
4.5 Part D
Candidates must choose exactly 45 credits of option modules, a minimum of 15 credits of which must be from those labelled OA. The remaining credit can be from options labelled oA, oB or oC.
Code |
Title |
Weight |
Semester |
C/O |
WSD030 |
Advanced Project |
50 |
1+2 |
C |
WSD033 |
Systems Diagnostics |
10 |
1+2 |
C |
WSD062 |
Understanding Complexity |
15 |
2 |
C |
WSD572 |
Systems Architecture |
15 |
1 |
OA |
WSD060 |
Engineering and Managing Capability |
15 |
2 |
OA |
WSD566 |
Systems Design |
15 |
1 |
OA |
WSD567 |
Validation and Verification |
15 |
2 |
OA |
WSD571 |
Holistic Engineering |
15 |
2 |
OA |
WSD536 |
Biomass 1 |
15 |
1 |
OB |
WSD506 |
Digital Signal Processing |
15 |
1 |
OB |
WSD569 |
Innovation and Entrepreneurship in Engineering |
15 |
1 |
OB |
WSD533 |
Solar Power |
15 |
1 |
OB |
WSD535 |
Water Power |
15 |
1 |
OB |
WSD534 |
Wind Power 1 |
15 |
1 |
OB |
WSD532 |
Integration of Renewables |
15 |
2 |
OB |
WSD517 |
Mobile Network Technologies |
15 |
2 |
OB |
XXXXXX |
Options from the University Catalogue |
30 |
1+2 |
OC |
The optional modules listed oA and oB are block taught in one week or two week long blocks.
The option oC allows a free choice of modules worth 30 credits from the University Catalogue. This choice should be restricted to modules from Part C or D level, subject to the overall requirement for the Part that at least 90 credits should be from Part D level or above. The total of 120 credits should be arranged as near to 60 credits per semester as possible.
All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 Criteria for programme progression
Progression from Part A to Part B, from Part B to Part C and from Part C to Part D will be subject to the provisions set out in Regulation XX and in addition candidates must accumulate 120 credits and achieve an overall average of 55% in each part.
At the end of Parts A, B, or C candidates not meeting the progression requirements for the MEng after reassessment, or at the option of the candidate, may transfer to the BEng degree programme providing they meet the minimum requirements set out in Regulation XX.
In the event of a candidate transferring onto the BEng programme following assessment (or reassessment) at the end of Part C the degree mark will be calculated by combining average marks in the ratio Part B:40 and Part C:60. The degree award in this case will be governed by the provisions set out in Regulation XX.
5.2 Degree Award
To qualify for the award of the degree of Master of Engineering, candidates must accumulate 100 credits from Part D, with no module marks less than 30%, in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XX.
In addition, candidates must achieve a minimum mark of 50% in all modules with the prefix WSD5xx in order to accumulate credit.
Should a candidate fail to qualify for the MEng award at the end of part D following reassessment (or at the option of the candidate) the BEng degree will be awarded on the basis of performance at Parts B and C. The degree mark will be calculated by combining average marks in the ratio Part B:40 and Part C:60
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
A candidate's final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments at Parts B, C and D in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 20: Part C 40: Part D 40 to determine the final Programme Mark.
Programme Specification
EL MEng (Hons) Electronic and Computer Systems Engineering (2018 Entry)
Academic Year: 2019/20
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET)
|
Final award | MEng/ MEng + DIS/ MEng + DPS/ MEng + DPS/ MEng + DIntS |
Programme title | Electronic and Computer Systems Engineering |
Programme code | WSUM30 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is 8 semesters or 10 semesters if taken with either the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS), Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) or the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS). The programme is only available on a full-time basis. |
UCAS code | H612, H613 |
Admissions criteria | |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
To meet the aims of the MEng programme in Electronic and Computer Systems Engineering and to further enhance a student’s learning experience by providing a high quality educational experience, for well motivated high achievers, that:
- A1. increases the depth and breadth of technical study to the level expected of Masters level graduates;
- A2. develops knowledge and skills, to a depth and breadth expected of Masters level graduates, as a preparation for a career in the electronic and electrical engineering industry;
- A3. develops an enhanced capacity for independent learning, planning and self–reliance;
- A4. enhances teamwork and leadership skills, equipping graduates of the programme to play leading roles in industry and potentially take responsibility for future innovation and change
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence: Engineering Technician, Incorporated Engineer and Chartered Engineer Standard, Engineering Council UK, 3rd edition, 2013.
UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence: The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes, Engineering Council UK, 3rd edition, 2014.
Guidance Note on Academic Accreditation, Engineering Council UK, July 2014.
The UK Quality Code for Higher Education, The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, April 2012.
Subject Benchmark Statement: Engineering: The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, November 2010.
Master's Degree Characteristics, The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, March 2010.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate a knowledge and understanding of:
- K1. mathematical methods appropriate to electronic and electrical engineering and related disciplines, including their limitations and range of applicability
- K2. principles of engineering appropriate to electronic and electrical engineering and related disciplines, including their range of applicability;
- K3. principles of Information Technology and Communications appropriate to electronic and electrical engineering and related disciplines;
- K4. design principles and techniques appropriate to relevant components, equipment and associated software;
- K5. characteristics of relevant engineering components;
- K6. management and business practices appropriate to engineering industries, their application and limitations;
- K7. codes of practice and regulatory frameworks relevant to electronic and electrical engineering and related disciplines;
- K8. operational practices and requirements for safe operation relevant to electronic and electrical engineering and related disciplines;
- K9. the professional and ethical responsibilities of engineers;
- K10. team roles, team-working skills and leadership skills;
- K11. relevant research methods.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate:
- C1. an understanding of standard mathematical and computer based methods for modelling and analysing a range of practical and hypothetical engineering problems, and the essential principles of modelling and analysing routine engineering systems, processes, components and products;
- C2. an ability to develop innovative solutions to practical engineering problems;
- C3. a competence in defining and solving practical engineering problems;
- C4. the ability to apply engineering processes in a range practical contexts.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- P1. use appropriate or novel mathematical methods for modelling and analysing pertinent engineering problems;
- P2. select and use relevant test and measurement equipment;
- P3. plan and execute safely novel or unfamiliar experimental laboratory work;
- P4. select and use computational tools and packages (including programming languages where appropriate);
- P5. design, and where appropriate construct, new systems, components or processes;
- P6. undertake testing of design ideas in the laboratory or by simulation, and analyse and critically evaluate the results;
- P7. search for, retrieve and evaluate information, ideas and data from a variety of sources;
- P8. manage a project and produce technical reports, papers, diagrams and drawings at an appropriate level.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- T1. manipulate, sort and present data in a range of forms;
- T2. use evidence based methods in the solution of complex problems;
- T3. work with limited, incomplete and/or contradictory information in the solution of unfamiliar problems;
- T4. use an engineering and/or systems approach to the solution of problems in unfamiliar situations;
- T5. be creative and innovative in problem solving;
- T6. work effectively as part of a team and show potential for leadership;
- T7. use a wide range of information and communications technology;
- T8. manage time and resources;
- T9. use appropriate management tools;
- T10. communicate effectively orally, visually and in writing at an appropriate level;
- T11. learn effectively, continuously and independently in a variety of environments.
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
WSA017 | Industrial Project in Electronic and Computer Systems Engineering | 20 | 1+2 | C |
MAA103 | Core Mathematics 1 | 10 | 1 | C |
WSA010 | Programming and Software Design | 20 | 1 | C |
WSA011 | Electronic Circuits | 20 | 1 | C |
MAA203 | Core Mathematics 2 | 10 | 2 | C |
WSA012 | Electrical Science B | 20 | 2 | C |
WSA013 | Digital Systems | 20 | 2 | C |
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
Candidates must choose ONE option from Semester Two.
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
WSB013 | Robotics Project Design and Management | 20 | 1+2 | C |
MAB103 | Advanced Mathematics 1 | 10 | 1 | C |
WSB010 | Electronics | 20 | 1 | C |
WSB014 | Embedded Systems Programming | 20 | 1 | C |
MAB203 | Advanced Mathematics 2 | 10 | 2 | C |
WSB019 | Computer Architecture | 20 | 2 | C |
WSB002 | Communications | 20 | 2 | C |
WSB004 | Control Systems Design | 20 | 2 | C |
4.3 Part I
Code | Title |
WSI010 | Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS) (Non-credit bearing) |
WSI020 | Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) (Non-credit bearing) |
WSI035 | Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) (Non-credit bearing) |
For candidates who are registered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS), Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) or Diploma in International Studies (DIntS), Part I will be between Part B and C or Parts C and D and will be in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XI and Regulation XX.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
Candidates must choose ONE option from Semester One.
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
WSD001 | Team Project | 30 | 1+2 | C |
WSC018 | Embedded Systems Design and Implementation | 20 | 1 | C |
WSC200 | Engineering Management: Finance, Law and Quality | 10 | 1 | C |
WSC054 | Electronic Systems Design with FPGAs | 20 | 2 | C |
WSC055 | Digital Interfacing and Instrumentation | 20 | 2 | C |
WSC002 | Principles of Digital Communications | 20 | 1 | O |
WSC003 | Sustainable & Renewable Energy Systems | 20 | 1 | O |
WSC039 | Microwave Communications | 20 | 1 | O |
WSC041 | Digital and State Space Control | 20 | 1 | O |
4.5 Part D - Degree Modules
Candidates must choose optional modules totalling 20 credits.
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
WSD030 | Advanced Project | 50 | 1+2 | C |
WSD034 | Applying Management Theory | 10 | 1+2 | C |
WSD530 | Programming Multi/many-core Systems | 15 | 1 | C |
WSD525 | Advanced Electrical Engineering Applications | 15 | 2 | C |
WSD506 | Fundamentals of Digital Signal Processing | 15 | 1 | OA |
WSD509 | Communication Networks | 15 | 1 | OA |
WSD510 | Personal Radio Communications | 15 | 1 | OA |
WSD511 | Information Theory and Coding | 15 | 1 | OA |
WSD515 | Communication Channels | 15 | 1 | OA |
WSD568 | Sensors and Actuators for Control | 15 | 1 | OA |
WSD508 | Digital Signal Processing for Software Defined Radio | 15 | 2 | OA |
WSD516 | Telecommunication Network Security | 15 | 2 | OA |
WSD517 | Mobile Network Technologies | 15 | 2 | OA |
WSD032 | Microwave Circuits Laboratory | 15 | 1+2 | OB |
XXXXXX | Options from the University Catalogue | 30 | 1+2 | OC |
The optional modules listed oA are block taught in one week or two week long blocks, while those listed oB run over both semesters.
The option oC allows a free choice of modules worth 30 credits from the University Catalogue. This choice should be restricted to modules from Part C or D level, subject to the overall requirement for the Part that at least 90 credits should be from Part D level or above. The total of 120 credits should be arranged as near to 60 credits per semester as possible.
All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 Criteria for programme progression
Progression from Part A to Part B, from part B to Part C and from Part C to Part D will be subject to the provisions set out in Regulation XX and in addition candidates must accumulate 120 credits and achieve an overall average of 55% in each part.
At the end of Parts A, B, or C candidates not meeting the progression requirements for the MEng after reassessment, or at the option of the candidate, may transfer to the BEng degree programme providing they meet the minimum requirements set out in Regulation XX.
In the event of a candidate transferring onto the BEng programme following assessment (or reassessment) at the end of Part C the degree mark will be calculated by combining average marks in the ratio Part B:40 and Part C:60. The degree award in this case will be governed by the provisions set out in Regulation XX.
5.2 Degree award
To qualify for the award of the Degree of Master of Engineering, candidates must accumulate 100 credits from Part D, with no module mark less than 30%, in accordance with the provision of Regulation XX.
In addition, candidates should normally obtain a mark of at least 50% in all modules with the prefix WSD5xx in order to accumulate credit.
Should a candidate fail to qualify for the MEng award at the end of Part D following reassessment (or at the option of the candidate) the BEng degree will be awarded on the basis of performance at Parts B and C. The degree mark will be calculated by combining average marks in the ratio Part B:40 and Part C:60.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
A candidate's final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments at Parts B, C and D in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 20: Part C 40: Part D 40, to determine the final Programme Mark.
Programme Specification
EL MEng (Hons) Robotics, Mechatronics and Control Engineering (2019 Entry)
Academic Year: 2019/20
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET) |
Final award | MEng/MEng + DPS/MEng + DInts/MEng +DIS |
Programme title | Robotics, Mechatronics and Control Engineering |
Programme code | WSUM35 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is 8 semesters or 10 semesters if taken with the Diploma in Industrial Studies, Diploma of Professional Studies of Diploma of International Studies. The programme is only available on a full-time basis. |
UCAS code | H673, H674 |
Admissions criteria | MEng - MEng + DPS/DInts - |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The MEng in Robotics, Mechatronics and Control Engineering aims to:
- A1. Prepare highly skilled graduates to pursue careers in Robotics, Mechatronics and Control Engineering across a range of industries and activities involving the design, development and analysis of complex systems
- A2. Provide a high-quality learning experience across a complete range of core subjects in order to give students the skills to investigate robotics, mechatronics and control engineering problems.
- A3. Develop engineers capable of designing innovative systems and managing the development process in order to deliver solutions that meet the requirements of customers.
- A4. Produce engineers with extensive knowledge and understanding of engineering management and business practices and of the relevant ethical, business, sustainability and legal constraints.
- A5. Develop graduates capable of integrating their knowledge of mathematics, science and the broader engineering context to solve complex problems.
- A6. Promote innovation in engineering practice by applying appropriate knowledge, skills, tools and techniques in the analysis, diagnosis and solution of industry-related problems.
- A7. Support personal and professional development, including, problem solving, leadership, team work and both oral and written presentation skills, as well as the ability to take the initiative in improving personal performance.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence: Engineering Technician, Incorporated Engineer and Chartered Engineer Standard, Engineering Council UK, 3rd edition, 2013.
- UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence: The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes, Engineering Council UK, 3rd edition, 2014.
- Guidance Note on Academic Accreditation, Engineering Council UK, July 2014.
- The UK Quality Code for Higher Education, The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, April 2012.
- Subject Benchmark Statement: Engineering, The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, November 2010.
- Master's Degree Characteristics, The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, March 2010.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- K1. Demonstrate a comprehensive understanding of scientific, mathematical and engineering principles appropriate to robotics, mechatronics and control engineering
- K2. Demonstrate an understanding of general engineering and broader principles relevant to engineering
- K3. Understand the commercial, economic and sustainable aspects in the application of engineering processes
- K4. Demonstrate awareness of the relevant codes of practice and regulatory frameworks and the operational practices for safe operation of engineering processes
- K5. Demonstrate extensive knowledge of the application of management and business practices appropriate to engineering industries, including their limitations
- K6. Recognise the professional and ethical responsibilities of engineers
- K7. Demonstrate awareness of developing technologies in robotics, mechatronics and control engineering
- K8. Draw on a deep understanding of robotics, mechatronics and control to form original solutions to engineering problems, some of which may have incomplete specifications.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- C1. Apply engineering principles to the analysis of robotics, mechatronics and control engineering problems;
- C2. Apply mathematical and computer-based methods for modelling and analysing a range of practical and hypothetical engineering processes, components and products;
- C3. Generate innovative designs for engineering problems within the framework of economic, social, ethical and environmental issues;
- C4. Evaluate and respond to customer needs, including fitness for purpose and cost;
- C5. Follow essential design principles appropriate to relevant components, equipment and associated software.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- P1. Demonstrate a comprehensive understanding of design, modelling, simulation and analytical methods and tools appropriate to robotics, mechatronics and control engineering
- P2. Demonstrate a thorough understanding of current practice in defining and solving practical engineering problems, including its limitations and likely future direction
- P3. Demonstrate an ability to manage the design process
- P4. Use conventional laboratory equipment and relevant test and measurement equipment in an appropriate and safe manner
- P5. Apply engineering techniques taking into account relevant codes of practice, commercial constraints and industry standards
- P6. Demonstrate awareness of contractual issues and intellectual property rights
- P7. Work with technical uncertainty
- P8. Use appropriate management tools for project work.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- T1. Search and retrieve information, ideas and data from a variety of sources
- T2. Select and analyse appropriate evidence and data to solve problems;
- T3. Apply skills in problem solving, communication, team working and in the use of general software tools;
- T4. Develop a personal work plan and take responsibility for its execution, independently, as team member or as a team leader;
- T5. Produce appropriate technical reports, papers, diagrams and drawings;
- T6. Plan self-learning and be able to take the initiative in improving personal performance, as the foundation for lifelong learning
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A
Code |
Title |
Semester |
Modular Weight |
C/O |
WSA018 |
Industrial Project in Robotics, Mechatronics and Control Engineering |
1 + 2 |
20 |
C |
MAA103 |
Core Mathematics 1 |
1 |
10 |
C |
WSA010 |
Programming and Software Design |
1 |
20 |
C |
WSA011 |
Electronic Circuits |
1 |
20 |
C |
MAA203 |
Core Mathematics 2 |
2 |
10 |
C |
WSA012 |
Electrical Science A |
2 |
20 |
C |
WSA013 |
Digital Systems |
2 |
20 |
C |
4.2 Part B
Code |
Title |
Semester |
Modular Weight |
C/O |
WSB013 |
Robotics Project Design and Management |
1 + 2 |
20 |
C |
MAB103 |
Advanced Mathematics 1 |
1 |
10 |
C |
WSB010 |
Electronics |
1 |
20 |
C |
WSB140 |
Mechanics for Robotics |
1 |
20 |
C |
WSB004 |
Control System Design |
2 |
20 |
C |
WSB009 |
Mobile Robots |
2 |
20 |
C |
MAB203 |
Advanced Mathematics 2 |
2 |
10 |
C |
4.3 Part I
Code |
Title |
WSI010 | Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS) (Non-credit bearing) |
WSI020 | Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) (Non-credit bearing) |
WSI035 | Diploma in International Studies (DInts) (Non-credit bearing) |
For candidates who are registered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS), Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS), or the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS), Part I will be between Parts B and C or between Parts C and D and will be in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XI and Regulation XX.
4.4 Part C
Candidates must choose one option ‘o’ from Semester 2
Code |
Title |
Semester |
Modular Weight |
C/O |
WSD001 |
Team Project |
1 + 2 |
30 |
C |
WSC012 |
Systems Engineering Applications |
1 |
10 |
C |
WSC041 |
Digital and State Space Control |
1 |
20 |
C |
WSC108 |
Manufacturing Automation and Control |
1 |
10 |
C |
WSC200 |
Engineering Management: Finance, Law and Quality |
1 |
10 |
C |
WSC055 |
Digital Interfacing and Instrumentation |
2 |
20 |
C |
WSC004 |
Computer Networks |
2 |
20 |
O |
WSC014 |
Bioelectricity and Biophotonics Engineering |
2 |
20 |
O |
WSC022 |
Power Electronics |
2 |
20 |
O |
WSC054 |
Electronic Systems Design with FPGAs |
2 |
20 |
O |
4.5 Part D
Candidates must choose optional modules totalling 30 credits
Code |
Title |
Semester |
Modular Weight |
C/O |
WSD030 |
Advanced Project |
1 + 2 |
50 |
C |
WSD034 |
Applying Management Theory |
1 + 2 |
10 |
C |
WSD568 |
Sensors and Actuators for Control |
1 |
15 |
C |
WSD527 |
Systems Modelling for Control Engineering |
1 |
15 |
C |
WSD516 |
Communication Network Security |
2 |
15 |
OA |
WSD532 |
Integration of Renewables |
2 |
15 |
OA |
WSD062 |
Understanding Complexity |
2 |
15 |
OA |
WSD517 |
Mobile Network Technologies |
2 |
15 |
OA |
XXXXXX |
Options from the University Catalogue |
1 + 2 |
30 |
OB |
The optional modules listed oA are block taught in one week or two week long blocks, while those listed oB run over both semesters.
The option oB allows a free choice of modules worth 30 credits from the University Catalogue. This choice should be restricted to modules from Part C or D level, subject to the overall requirement for the Part that at least 90 credits should be from Part D level or above. The total of 120 credits should be arranged as near to 60 credits per semester as possible.
All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 Criteria for programme progression
Progression from Part A to Part B, from Part B to Part C and from Part C to Part D will be subject to the provisions set out in Regulation XX and in addition candidates must accumulate 120 credits and achieve an overall average of 55% in each part.
At the end of Parts A, B, or C candidates not meeting the progression requirements for the MEng after reassessment, or at the option of the candidate, may transfer to the BEng degree programme providing they meet the minimum requirements set out in Regulation XX.
In the event of a candidate transferring onto the BEng programme following assessment (or reassessment) at the end of Part C the degree mark will be calculated by combining average marks in the ratio Part B:40 and Part C:60. The degree award in this case will be governed by the provisions set out in Regulation XX.
5.2 Degree Award
To qualify for the award of the degree of Master of Engineering, candidates must accumulate 120 credits from Part D, with no module marks less than 40%, in addition to the provisions of Regulation XX.
In addition, candidates must achieve a minimum mark of 50% in all modules with the prefix WSD5xx in order to accumulate credit.
Should a candidate fail to qualify for the MEng award at the end of part D following reassessment (or at the option of the candidate) the BEng degree will be awarded on the basis of performance at Parts B and C. The degree mark will be calculated by combining average marks in the ratio Part B:40 and Part C:60
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
A candidate's final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments at Parts B, C and D in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 20: Part C 40: Part D 40 to determine the final Programme Mark.
Programme Specification
EL MEng (Hons) Electronic and Electrical Engineering (Students undertaking Part C in 2019)
Academic Year: 2019/20
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET) See also further details in 'Programme Structure' below.
|
Final award | MEng/ MEng+DIS / MEng+DPS/ MEng+DIntS |
Programme title | Electronic and Electrical Engineering |
Programme code | WSUM10 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is 8 semesters or 10 semesters if taken with either the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS), Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) or the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS). The programme is only available on a full-time basis. |
UCAS code | H601, H605 |
Admissions criteria | |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
To meet the aims of the BEng programme in Electronic and Electrical Engineering and to further enhance a student’s learning experience by providing a high quality educational experience, for well motivated high achievers, that:
- A1. increases the depth and breadth of technical study to the level expected of Masters level graduates;
- A2. develops knowledge and skills, to a depth and breadth expected of Masters level graduates, as a preparation for a career in the electronic and electrical engineering industry;
- A3. develops an enhanced capacity for independent learning, planning and self–reliance;
- A4. enhances teamwork and leadership skills, equipping graduates of the programme to play leading roles in industry and potentially take responsibility for future innovation and change.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence; Engineering Technician, Incorporated Engineer and Chartered Engineer Standard, Engineering Council UK, 3rd edition, 2013.
UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence; The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes, Engineering Council UK, 3rd edition, 2014.
Guidance Note on Academic Accreditation, Engineering Council UK, 2014.
The UK Quality Code for Higher Education. The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, April 2012.
Subject Benchmark Statement: Engineering, The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, November 2010.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate a knowledge and understanding of:
- K1. mathematical methods appropriate to electronic and electrical engineering and related disciplines, including their limitations and range of applicability
- K2. principles of engineering and/or systems science appropriate to electronic and electrical engineering and related disciplines, including their range of applicability;
- K3. principles of Information Technology and Communications appropriate to electronic and electrical engineering and related disciplines;
- K4. design principles and techniques appropriate to relevant components, equipment and associated software;
- K5. characteristics of relevant engineering materials and components;
- K6. management and business practices appropriate to engineering industries, their application and limitations;
- K7. codes of practice and regulatory frameworks relevant to electronic and electrical engineering and related disciplines;
- K8. operational practices and requirements for safe operation relevant to electronic and electrical engineering and related disciplines;
- K9. the professional and ethical responsibilities of engineers;
- K10. team roles, team-working skills and leadership skills;
- K11. relevant research methods.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate:
- C1. an understanding of standard mathematical and/or computer based methods for modelling and analysing a range of practical and hypothetical engineering problems, and the essential principles of modelling and analysing routine engineering systems, processes, components and products;
- C2. an ability to develop innovative solutions to practical engineering problems;
- C3. a competence in defining and solving practical engineering problems;
- C4. the ability to apply systems processes in a range of different engineering contexts.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- P1. use appropriate or novel mathematical methods for modelling and analysing pertinent engineering problems;
- P2. select and use relevant test and measurement equipment;
- P3. plan and execute safely novel or unfamiliar experimental laboratory work;
- P4. select and use computational tools and packages (including programming languages where appropriate);
- P5. design, and where appropriate construct, new systems, components or processes;
- P6. undertake testing of design ideas in the laboratory or by simulation, and analyse and critically evaluate the results;
- P7. search for, retrieve and evaluate information, ideas and data from a variety of sources;
- P8. manage a project and produce technical reports, papers, diagrams and drawings at an appropriate level.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- T1. manipulate, sort and present data in a range of forms;
- T2. use evidence based methods in the solution of complex problems;
- T3. work with limited, incomplete and/or contradictory information in the solution of unfamiliar problems;
- T4. use an engineering and/or systems approach to the solution of problems in unfamiliar situations;
- T5. be creative and innovative in problem solving;
- T6. work effectively as part of a team and show potential for leadership;
- T7. use a wide range of information and communications technology;
- T8. manage time and resources;
- T9. use appropriate management tools;
- T10. communicate effectively orally, visually and in writing at an appropriate level;
- T11. learn effectively, continuously and independently in a variety of environments.
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
ELA005 | Electromagnetism A | 10 | 1+2 | C |
ELA004 | Signals and Systems | 10 | 1+2 | C |
ELA007 | Introduction to Systems Engineering for Projects | 20 | 1+2 | C |
MAA303 | Mathematics A | 20 | 1+2 | C |
ELA001 | Circuits | 20 | 1+2 | C |
ELA003 | Electronics A | 20 | 1+2 | C |
ELA010 | Programming and Software Design | 20 | 1+2 | C |
The 20 credit module ELA001 Circuits is taught over both semesters, 2/3 of the module is taught in Semester 1 and 1/3 in Semester 2.
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
ELB002 | Communications | 15 | 1+2 | C |
ELB003 | Electromechanical Systems | 15 | 1+2 | C |
ELB004 | Control System Design | 15 | 1+2 | C |
ELB010 | Electronics B | 20 | 1+2 | C |
ELB013 | Engineering Project Management | 20 | 1+2 | C |
MAB303 | Mathematics B | 20 | 1+2 | C |
ELB012 | Renewable Energy Systems Analysis | 15 | 1+2 | O |
ELB014 | Software Engineering | 15 | 1+2 | O |
ELB019 | Computer Architecture | 15 | 1+2 | O |
MMB140 | Mechanics | 15 | 1+2 | O |
Students should take one of the optional (o) modules indicated.
4.3 Part I
Code | Title |
WSI010 | Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS) (Non-credit bearing) |
WSI020 | Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) (Non-credit bearing) |
WSI035 | Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) (Non-credit bearing) |
For candidates who are registered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS), Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) or the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS),Part I will be between Parts B and C or between Parts C and D and will be in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XI and Regulation XX.
4.3 Part C - Degree Modules
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
WSC008 | Business Management | 15 | 1+2 | C |
WSD001 | Team Project | 30 | 1+2 | C |
WSC002 | Principles of Digital Communications | 15 | 1+2 | OA |
WSC003 | Renewable Energy Sources | 15 | 1+2 | OA |
WSC004 | Computer Networks | 15 | 1+2 | OA |
WSC007 | Electromagnetism C | 15 | 1+2 | OA |
WSC012 | Systems Engineering Applications Theory | 15 | 1+2 | OA |
WSC013 | Electromagnetic Compatibility | 15 | 1+2 | OA |
WSC014 | Biophotonics Engineering | 15 | 1+2 | OA |
WSC018 | Real-Time Software Engineering | 15 | 1+2 | OA |
WSC022 | Power Electronics for Renewables | 15 | 1+2 | OA |
WSC030 | Bioelectricity - Fundamentals and Applications | 15 | 1+2 | OA |
WSC039 | Microwave Communication Systems | 15 | 1+2 | OA |
WSC041 | Digital and State Space Control | 15 | 1+2 | OA |
WSC054 | Electronic System Design with FPGA's | 15 | 1+2 | OA |
WSC055 | Digital Interfacing and Instrumentation | 15 | 1+2 | OA |
WSC056 | Fundamentals of Digital Signal Processing | 15 | 1+2 | OA |
DSC502 | Human Factors in Systems Design C | 15 | 1+2 | OA |
MPC022 | Materials Properties and Applications | 15 | 1+2 | OA |
XXXXXX | Options from the University Catalogue | 30 | 1+2 | OB |
The option OB allows a free choice of modules worth 30 credits from the University Catalogue. This choice should be restricted to modules from Part B, C or D level, subject to the overall requirement for the Part that at least 90 credits should be from Part C level or above. Choosing modules from Part D may result in examinations at the end of Semester 1. This free choice includes language modules from the University-wide Language Programme. The total of 120 credits should be arranged as near to 60 credits per semester as possible.
All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.
4.4 Part D - Degree Modules
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
WSD030 | Advanced Project | 50 | 1+2 | C |
WSD034 | Applying Management Theory | 10 | 1+2 | C |
WSD506 | Digital Signal Processing | 15 | 1 | OA |
WSD509 | Communication Networks | 15 | 1 | OA |
WSD510 | Personal Radio Communications | 15 | 1 | OA |
WSD511 | Information Theory and Coding | 15 | 1 | OA |
WSD515 | Communication Channels | 15 | 1 | OA |
WSD530 | Programming Multi-Many Core Systems | 15 | 1 | OA |
WSD531 | Sustainability and Energy Systems | 15 | 1 | OA |
WSD533 | Solar Power | 15 | 1 | OA |
WSD534 | Wind Power 1 | 15 | 1 | OA |
WSD535 | Water Power | 15 | 1 | OA |
WSD536 | Biomass 1 | 15 | 1 | OA |
WSD568 | Sensors and Actuators for Control | 15 | 1 | OA |
WSD062 | Understanding Complexity | 15 | 2 | OA |
WSD508 | Digital Signal Processing for Software Defined Radio | 15 | 2 | OA |
WSD516 | Telecommunications Network Security | 15 | 2 | OA |
WSD517 | Mobile Network Technologies | 15 | 2 | OA |
WSD523 | Antennas | 15 | 2 | OA |
WSD525 | Advanced Electronic Engineering Applications | 15 | 2 | OA |
WSD526 | Radio Frequency and Microwave Integrated Circuit Design | 15 | 2 | OA |
WSD532 | Integration of Renewables | 15 | 2 | OA |
WSD538 | Energy Storage | 10 | 2 | OA |
WSD539 | Solar Thermal Systems | 10 | 2 | OA |
WSD540 | Advanced Photovoltaics | 10 | 2 | OA |
WSD541 | Wind Power 2 | 10 | 2 | OA |
WSD032 | Microwave Circuits Laboratory | 15 | 1+2 | OB |
XXXXXX | Options from the University Catalogue | 30 | 1+2 | OC |
The optional modules listed oA are block taught in one week or two week long blocks, while those listed oB run over both semesters.
The option oC allows a free choice of modules worth 30 credits from the University Catalogue. This choice should be restricted to modules from Part C or D level, subject to the overall requirement for the Part that at least 90 credits should be from Part D level or above. This free choice includes language modules from the University-wide Language Programme. The total of 120 credits should be arranged as near to 60 credits per semester as possible.
All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 Criteria for Programme Progression
Progression from Part A to Part B, Part B to Part C and from Part C to Part D will be subject to provisions set out in Regulation XX and in addition candidates must accumulate 120 credits and achieve an overall average of 55% in that part.
For candidates who commence study on the programme before October, 2016:
To progress from Part A to Part B, candidates must accumulate 100 credits from Part A, with no module mark less than 30% and obtain an average mark in Part A of at least 55%.
To progress from Part B to either Part C or Part I, (a period of professional training and/or study at an approved institution abroad, DIS or DIntS), candidates must accumulate 100 credits from Part B, with no module mark less than 30% and obtain an average mark in Part B of at least 55%.
To progress from Part C to either Part D or Part I, (a period of professional training and/or study at an approved institution abroad, DIS or DIntS), candidates must accumulate 100 credits from Part C, with no module mark less than 30% and obtain an average mark in Part C of at least 55%.
5.2 Degree award
To qualify for the award of the degree of Master of Engineering, candidates must accumulate 100 credits from Part D, with no module marks less than 30%. In addition, candidates should normally obtain a mark of at least 50% in all modules with codes of the form WSD5xx taken in Part D.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
A candidate's final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments at Parts B, C and D in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 15: Part C 42.5: Part D 42.5, to determine the final Programme Mark.
Programme Specification
EL MEng (Hons) Electronic and Electrical Engineering (Students undertaking Part D in 2019)
Academic Year: 2019/20
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET) See also further details in 'Programme Structure' below.
|
Final award | MEng/ MEng+DIS / MEng+DIntS |
Programme title | Electronic and Electrical Engineering |
Programme code | WSUM10 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is 8 semesters or 10 semesters if taken with either the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS) or the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS). The programme is only available on a full-time basis. |
UCAS code | H601, H605 |
Admissions criteria | |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
To meet the aims of the BEng programme in Electronic and Electrical Engineering and to further enhance a student’s learning experience by providing a high quality educational experience, for well motivated high achievers, that:
- A1. increases the depth and breadth of technical study to the level expected of Masters level graduates;
- A2. develops knowledge and skills, to a depth and breadth expected of Masters level graduates, as a preparation for a career in the electronic and electrical engineering industry;
- A3. develops an enhanced capacity for independent learning, planning and self–reliance;
- A4. enhances teamwork and leadership skills, equipping graduates of the programme to play leading roles in industry and potentially take responsibility for future innovation and change.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence; Engineering Technician, Incorporated Engineer and Chartered Engineer Standard, Engineering Council UK, 3rd edition, 2013.
UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence; The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes, Engineering Council UK, 3rd edition, 2014.
Guidance Note on Academic Accreditation, Engineering Council UK, 2014.
The UK Quality Code for Higher Education. The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, April 2012.
Subject Benchmark Statement: Engineering, The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, November 2010.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate a knowledge and understanding of:
- K1. mathematical methods appropriate to electronic and electrical engineering and related disciplines, including their limitations and range of applicability
- K2. principles of engineering and/or systems science appropriate to electronic and electrical engineering and related disciplines, including their range of applicability;
- K3. principles of Information Technology and Communications appropriate to electronic and electrical engineering and related disciplines;
- K4. design principles and techniques appropriate to relevant components, equipment and associated software;
- K5. characteristics of relevant engineering materials and components;
- K6. management and business practices appropriate to engineering industries, their application and limitations;
- K7. codes of practice and regulatory frameworks relevant to electronic and electrical engineering and related disciplines;
- K8. operational practices and requirements for safe operation relevant to electronic and electrical engineering and related disciplines;
- K9. the professional and ethical responsibilities of engineers;
- K10. team roles, team-working skills and leadership skills;
- K11. relevant research methods.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate:
- C1. an understanding of standard mathematical and/or computer based methods for modelling and analysing a range of practical and hypothetical engineering problems, and the essential principles of modelling and analysing routine engineering systems, processes, components and products;
- C2. an ability to develop innovative solutions to practical engineering problems;
- C3. a competence in defining and solving practical engineering problems;
- C4. the ability to apply systems processes in a range of different engineering contexts.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- P1. use appropriate or novel mathematical methods for modelling and analysing pertinent engineering problems;
- P2. select and use relevant test and measurement equipment;
- P3. plan and execute safely novel or unfamiliar experimental laboratory work;
- P4. select and use computational tools and packages (including programming languages where appropriate);
- P5. design, and where appropriate construct, new systems, components or processes;
- P6. undertake testing of design ideas in the laboratory or by simulation, and analyse and critically evaluate the results;
- P7. search for, retrieve and evaluate information, ideas and data from a variety of sources;
- P8. manage a project and produce technical reports, papers, diagrams and drawings at an appropriate level.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- T1. manipulate, sort and present data in a range of forms;
- T2. use evidence based methods in the solution of complex problems;
- T3. work with limited, incomplete and/or contradictory information in the solution of unfamiliar problems;
- T4. use an engineering and/or systems approach to the solution of problems in unfamiliar situations;
- T5. be creative and innovative in problem solving;
- T6. work effectively as part of a team and show potential for leadership;
- T7. use a wide range of information and communications technology;
- T8. manage time and resources;
- T9. use appropriate management tools;
- T10. communicate effectively orally, visually and in writing at an appropriate level;
- T11. learn effectively, continuously and independently in a variety of environments.
4. Programme structure
These Programme Specifications apply to the conduct of the programme in the 2017-18 session and should not be construed as being relevant to any other session. These Programme Specifications may be subject to change from time to time. Notice of change will be given by the School responsible for the programme.
In the following tables, ‘c’ indicates a compulsory module and ‘o’ indicates an optional module. The optional modules ‘oA’, ‘oB’ ‘oC’ and 'oD' should be considered along with the text following the table they appear in.
Modules indicated as being taught in both Semester 1 and Semester 2 have elements of assessment in each semester however examinations for these modules normally occur during the Semester 2 examination period. Modules indicated as being taught in a single semester are assessed entirely within that semester.
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
ELA005 | Electromagnetism A | 10 | 1+2 | C |
ELA004 | Signals and Systems | 10 | 1+2 | C |
ELA007 | Introduction to Systems Engineering for Projects | 20 | 1+2 | C |
MAA303 | Mathematics A | 20 | 1+2 | C |
ELA001 | Circuits | 20 | 1+2 | C |
ELA003 | Electronics A | 20 | 1+2 | C |
ELA010 | Programming and Software Design | 20 | 1+2 | C |
The 20 credit module ELA001 Circuits is taught over both semesters, 2/3 of the module is taught in Semester 1 and 1/3 in Semester 2.
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
ELB002 | Communications | 15 | 1+2 | C |
ELB003 | Electromechanical Systems | 15 | 1+2 | C |
ELB004 | Control System Design | 15 | 1+2 | C |
ELB010 | Electronics B | 20 | 1+2 | C |
ELB013 | Engineering Project Management | 20 | 1+2 | C |
MAB303 | Mathematics B | 20 | 1+2 | C |
ELB012 | Renewable Energy Systems Analysis | 15 | 1+2 | O |
ELB014 | Software Engineering | 15 | 1+2 | O |
ELB019 | Computer Architecture | 15 | 1+2 | O |
MMB140 | Mechanics | 15 | 1+2 | O |
Students should take one of the optional (o) modules indicated.
4.3 Part C - Degree Modules
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
ELC008 | Business Management | 15 | 1+2 | C |
ELD002 | Group Project | 30 | 1+2 | C |
ELB014 | Software Engineering | 15 | 1+2 | OA |
ELB019 | Computer Architecture | 15 | 1+2 | OA |
MMB140 | Mechanics | 15 | 1+2 | OA |
ELC002 | Principles of Digital Communications | 15 | 1+2 | OB |
ELC003 | Renewable Energy Sources | 15 | 1+2 | OB |
ELC004 | Computer Networks | 15 | 1+2 | OB |
ELC006 | Fast Transient | 15 | 1+2 | OB |
ELC007 | Electromagnetism C | 15 | 1+2 | OB |
ELC012 | Systems Engineering Applications Theory | 15 | 1+2 | OB |
ELC013 | Electromagnetic Compatibility | 15 | 1+2 | OB |
ELC014 | Biophotonics Engineering | 15 | 1+2 | OB |
ELC018 | Real-Time Software Engineering | 15 | 1+2 | OB |
ELC022 | Power Electronics for Renewables | 15 | 1+2 | OB |
ELC030 | Bioelectricity - Fundamentals and Applications | 15 | 1+2 | OB |
ELC039 | Microwave Communication Systems | 15 | 1+2 | OB |
ELC041 | Digital and State Space Control | 15 | 1+2 | OB |
ELC054 | Electronic System Design with FPGA's | 15 | 1+2 | OB |
ELC055 | Digital Interfacing and Instrumentation | 15 | 1+2 | OB |
ELC056 | Fundamentals of Digital Signal Processing | 15 | 1+2 | OB |
DSC502 | Human Factors in Systems Design | 15 | 1+2 | OB |
MPC022 | Materials Properties and Applications | 15 | 1+2 | OB |
XXXXXX | Options from the University Catalogue | 30 | 1+2 | OC |
Options listed as oA will normally continue to be delivered throughout the Semester 1 examination period, while options listed as oB will normally be suspended during the Semester 1 examination period. No more than two oA modules should be chosen and only where they were not taken at Part B.
The option oC allows a free choice of modules worth 30 credits from the University Catalogue. This choice should be restricted to modules from Part B, C or D level, subject to the overall requirement for the Part that at least 90 credits should be from Part C level or above. Choosing modules from Part D may result in examinations at the end of Semester 1. This free choice includes language modules from the University-wide Language Programme. The total of 120 credits should be arranged as near to 60 credits per semester as possible.
All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.
4.4 Part D - Degree Modules
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
WSD030 | Advanced Project | 50 | 1+2 | C |
WSD034 | Applying Management Theory | 10 | 1+2 | C |
WSD506 | Digital Signal Processing | 15 | 1 | OA |
WSD509 | Communication Networks | 15 | 1 | OA |
WSD510 | Personal Radio Communications | 15 | 1 | OA |
WSD511 | Information Theory and Coding | 15 | 1 | OA |
WSD515 | Communication Channels | 15 | 1 | OA |
WSD530 | Programming Multi-Many Core Systems | 15 | 1 | OA |
WSD531 | Sustainability and Energy Systems | 15 | 1 | OA |
WSD533 | Solar Power | 15 | 1 | OA |
WSD534 | Wind Power 1 | 15 | 1 | OA |
WSD535 | Water Power | 15 | 1 | OA |
WSD536 | Biomass 1 | 15 | 1 | OA |
WSD568 | Sensors and Actuators for Control | 15 | 1 | OA |
WSD062 | Understanding Complexity | 15 | 2 | OA |
WSD508 | Digital Signal Processing for Software Defined Radio | 15 | 2 | OA |
WSD516 | Telecommunications Network Security | 15 | 2 | OA |
WSD517 | Mobile Network Technologies | 15 | 2 | OA |
WSD523 | Antennas | 15 | 2 | OA |
WSD525 | Advanced Electronic Engineering Applications | 15 | 2 | OA |
WSD526 | Radio Frequency and Microwave Integrated Circuit Design | 15 | 2 | OA |
WSD532 | Integration of Renewables | 15 | 2 | OA |
WSD538 | Energy Storage | 10 | 2 | OA |
WSD539 | Solar Thermal Systems | 10 | 2 | OA |
WSD540 | Advanced Photovoltaics | 10 | 2 | OA |
WSD541 | Wind Power 2 | 10 | 2 | OA |
WSD032 | Microwave Circuits Laboratory | 15 | 1+2 | OB |
XXXXXX | Options from the University Catalogue | 30 | 1+2 | OC |
The optional modules listed oA are block taught in one week or two week long blocks, while those listed oB run over both semesters.
The option oC allows a free choice of modules worth 30 credits from the University Catalogue. This choice should be restricted to modules from Part C or D level, subject to the overall requirement for the Part that at least 90 credits should be from Part D level or above. This free choice includes language modules from the University-wide Language Programme. The total of 120 credits should be arranged as near to 60 credits per semester as possible.
All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.
4.5 Part I
For candidates who are registered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS) or the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS),Part I will be between Parts B and C or between Parts C and D and will be in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XI and Regulation XX.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 Criteria for Programme Progression
Progression from Part A to Part B, Part B to Part C and from Part C to Part D will be subject to provisions set out in Regulation XX and in addition candidates must accumulate 120 credits and achieve an overall average of 55% in that part.
For candidates who commence study on the programme before October, 2016:
To progress from Part A to Part B, candidates must accumulate 100 credits from Part A, with no module mark less than 30% and obtain an average mark in Part A of at least 55%.
To progress from Part B to either Part C or Part I, (a period of professional training and/or study at an approved institution abroad, DIS or DIntS), candidates must accumulate 100 credits from Part B, with no module mark less than 30% and obtain an average mark in Part B of at least 55%.
To progress from Part C to either Part D or Part I, (a period of professional training and/or study at an approved institution abroad, DIS or DIntS), candidates must accumulate 100 credits from Part C, with no module mark less than 30% and obtain an average mark in Part C of at least 55%.
5.2 Degree award
To qualify for the award of the degree of Master of Engineering, candidates must accumulate 100 credits from Part D, with no module marks less than 30%. In addition, candidates should normally obtain a mark of at least 50% in all modules with codes of the form WSD5xx taken in Part D.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
A candidate's final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments at Parts B, C and D in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 15: Part C 42.5: Part D 42.5, to determine the final Programme Mark.
Programme Specification
EL MEng (Hons) Systems Engineering (Students undertaking Part C in 2019)
Academic Year: 2019/20
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET) |
Final award | MEng / MEng+DIS / MEng + DPS/ MEng+DIntS |
Programme title | Systems Engineering |
Programme code | WSUM20 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is 8 semesters or 10 semesters if taken with the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS), Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) or the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS). The programme is only available on a full-time basis. |
UCAS code | H660, H641 |
Admissions criteria | |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
To meet the all of the aims of the MEng programme in Systems Engineering and to further enhance a student’s learning experience by providing a high quality educational experience, for well motivated high achievers, that:
- A1. increases the depth and breadth of technical study to the level expected of Masters level graduates;
- A2. develops knowledge and skills, to a depth and breadth expected of Masters level graduates, as a preparation for a career in industry;
- A3. takes the student through the first level expected when applying for chartered engineer status
- A4. develops an enhanced capacity for independent learning, planning, self–reliance and self- evaluation;
- A5. enhances teamwork and leadership skills, equipping graduates of the programme to play leading roles in industry and potentially take responsibility for future innovation and change;
- A6. develop an appreciation for complexity and uncertainty in engineering systems;
- A7. Provides an introduction to and experience of mentoring and evaluation processes and techniques enabling the student to articulate identified issues and suggest alternative approaches within a system design context;
- A8. Provides an opportunity to work in a multi-disciplinary team and to apply project management and engineering theory and practice in a collaborative and competitive
- A9. environment to build and demonstrate a complex autonomous system capable of fulfilling a changing set of requirements;
- A10. Increases the awareness of the complexities in the configuration of Systems of Systems (SoS) particularly at the interfaces of the component systems and hence the need to take a holistic view of SoS development and operation;
- A11. Develops a deeper understanding of the socio-technical aspects of systems and systems of systems design and operation.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence: Engineering Technician, Incorporated Engineer and Chartered Engineer Standard, Engineering Council UK, 3rd edition, 2013.
- UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence: The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes, Engineering Council UK, 3rd edition, 2014.
- Guidance Note on Academic Accreditation, Engineering Council UK, July 2014.
- The UK Quality Code for Higher Education, The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, April 2012.
- Subject Benchmark Statement: Engineering, The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, November 2010.
- Master's Degree Characteristics, The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, March 2010.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate a knowledge and understanding of:
- K1. the nature of systems thinking and systems engineering concepts and terminology;
- K2. the form and value of systems engineering-based techniques, methods and methodologies and their use in the development and evaluation of complex systems and systems of systems in a range of engineering and commercial domains;
- K3. the provenance and theory behind a range of systems and systems engineering tools, methods and processes;
- K4. the need for an integrated systems approach using appropriate and timely configurations of systems engineering methods, tools and processes;
- K5. the importance of integrating Requirements Specification, Systems Design and Validation and Verification approaches along the whole systems life cycle;
- K6. the role and limitations of systems architecture approaches: the interfaces between technical sub-systems with organisational, human and process sub systems;
- K7. Engineering and Management of Capability;
- K8. the theory behind and application of mentoring approaches;
- K9. the theory behind and application of formal project evaluation methods and practice;
- K10. mathematical methods appropriate to systems engineering and related disciplines, including their limitations and range of applicability;
- K11. principles of engineering and/or systems science appropriate to engineering and related disciplines, including their range of applicability;
- K12. principles of information technology and communications appropriate to engineering of complex systems;
- K13. knowledge and information management techniques and tools;
- K14. design principles and techniques appropriate to relevant components, equipment and associated software;
- K15. characteristics of relevant common engineering materials and components;
- K16. management and business practices appropriate to engineering industries, their application and limitations;
- K17. relevant codes of practice and regulatory frameworks relevant to systems engineering and related disciplines;
- K18. operational practices and requirements for safe operation relevant to electronic and electrical engineering;
- K19. the professional and ethical responsibilities of engineers;
- K20. research methodologies and approaches;
- K21. ability to deal with uncertain, incomplete and changing information in a dynamic systems or systems of systems context.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate:
- C1. an ability to apply a systems engineering approach to engineering, problem structuring and problem solving in a variety of engineering contexts;
- C2. ability to select and apply different systems engineering tools, methods and processes based on both an understanding of the theory behind the tools and an appreciation of their functionality and applicability to the system context;
- C3. the role and processes involved in mentoring individuals and groups and evaluation of projects against goals set;
- C4. an understanding of standard mathematical and/or computer based methods for modelling and analysing a range of practical and hypothetical engineering problems, and the essential principles of modelling and analysing routine engineering systems, processes, components and products;
- C5. an appreciation of the socio-technical aspects of system design and operation and the application of methods and techniques available in this area;
- C6. a competency in systems architecting approaches;
- C7. an understanding of a range of areas dependent on modules studied eg control techniques used in industry, aeronautical considerations of aircraft design and performance, different renewable energy generation technologies, human factors in systems design, financial management, system architecting, innovation etc.
- C8. an ability to develop innovative solutions to practical engineering problems;
- C9. a competence in defining and solving practical engineering problems;
- C10. the ability to integrate, evaluate and use information, data and ideas from a range of sources in their project work.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- P1. develop a viable systems engineering approach to the development of complex systems and systems of systems in a range of engineering and commercial environments;
- P2. analyse and identify a problem space, extract and formalize a requirements specification for a system of interest and select and apply appropriate systems design and validation and verification methods within a defined systems engineering process along the whole system lifecycle;
- P3. select and use conventional laboratory equipment and relevant test and measurement equipment in a safe manner;
- P4. research, select and use computational tools and packages (including programming and modelling languages where appropriate) in familiar situations for modeling and analysing pertinent engineering problems;
- P5. design, and where appropriate construct, systems, components or processes in a muli- disciplinary team within given time and resource constraints;
- P6. search for, locate, retrieve and reference correctly information, ideas and data from a variety of sources;
- P7. manage a project and the inherent technical and project management risks, and produce technical reports, papers, diagrams and drawings.
- P8. plan and execute safely novel or unfamiliar experimental laboratory work;
- P9. undertake testing of design ideas in the laboratory or by simulation, and analyse and critically evaluate the results.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should have the following skills and abilities:
- T1. Self-management : readiness to accept responsibility, flexibility, resilience, self-starting, appropriate assertiveness, time management, readiness to improve own performance based on feedback/reflective learning
- T2. Team-working: respecting others, co-operating, negotiating/persuading, contributing to discussions, interpersonal skills and awareness of interdependence with others
- T3. Leadership: project and group management, delegation v control, verbal and written communication, creativity, problem solving and financial/time/risk management
- T4. Analysis and investigation: use of systems engineering approaches, tools and techniques to gather and analyse information systematically to aid decision-making and critical thinking skills
- T5. Business and customer awareness: Basic understanding of the key drivers for business success – including the importance of innovation and taking calculated risks – and the need to provide customer satisfaction and build customer loyalty
- T6. Problem solving: analysing facts and situations and applying creative thinking to develop appropriate solutions
- T7. Communication and literacy: application of literacy, ability to produce clear, structured written work and oral literacy – including listening and questioning
- T8. Positive attitude: a ‘can-do’ approach, self- motivation, a readiness to take part and contribute, openness to new ideas and a drive to make these happen
- T9. Entrepreneurship and enterprise: broadly, an ability to demonstrate an innovative approach, creativity, collaboration and risk taking. An individual with these attributes can make a huge difference to any business
- T10. IT and networks: programming and application development, databases, modeling software, spreadsheets, word processing, graphics and multi-media
- T11. Risk Management and mitigation
- T12. Generation and selection of alternative solutions to different classes of engineering/system design problems using a range of methods
- T13. manipulate, sort and present data in a range of forms
- T14. use evidence based methods and investigative techniques in the solution of complex problems
- T15. work with limited, incomplete and/or contradictory information in the solution of unfamiliar problems
- T16. Mentoring and evaluation skills including self reflection on performance
- T17. Production and deliver of professional and effective presentations using a range of media
- T18. Ability to learn effectively, continuously and independently in a variety of environments
4. Programme structure
These Programme Specifications apply to the conduct of the programme in the 2018-19 session and should not be construed as being relevant to any other session. These Programme Specifications may be subject to change from time to time. Notice of change will be given by the School responsible for the programme.
In the following tables, ‘c’ indicates a compulsory module and ‘o’ indicates an optional module.
Modules which are indicated as being taught in both Semester 1 and Semester 2 have elements of assessment in each semester however examinations for these modules normally occur during the Semester 2 examination period. Modules indicated as being taught in a single semester are assessed entirely within that semester.
4.1 Part A
Code |
Title |
Weight |
Semester |
C/O |
ELA005 |
Electromagnetism A |
10 |
2 |
C |
ELA004 |
Signals and Systems |
10 |
1+2 |
C |
ELA007 |
Introduction to Systems Engineering for Projects |
20 |
1+2 |
C |
MAA303 |
Mathematics A |
20 |
1+2 |
C |
ELA001 |
Circuits |
20 |
1+2 |
C |
ELA003 |
Electronics A |
20 |
1+2 |
C |
ELA010 |
Programming and Software Design |
20 |
1+2 |
C |
4.2 Part B
Candidates must choose two options ‘o’.
Code |
Title |
Weight |
Semester |
C/O |
ELB006 |
Systems Integration |
20 |
1+2 |
C |
ELB007 |
Systems Methods |
20 |
1+2 |
C |
MAB303 |
Mathematics B |
20 |
1+2 |
C |
ELB004 | Control System Design | 15 | 1+2 | C |
ELB008 | Aircraft Design | 15 | 1+2 | C |
ELB002 |
Communications |
15 |
1+2 |
O |
ELB003 |
Electromechanical Systems |
15 |
1+2 |
O |
ELB140 |
Mechanics |
15 |
1+2 |
O |
4.3 Part C
Code |
Title |
WSI010 | Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS) (Non-credit bearing) |
WSI020 | Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) (Non-credit bearing) |
WSI035 | Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) (Non-credit bearing) |
For candidates who are registered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS), Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) or Diploma in International Studies (DIntS), Part I will be between Parts B and C or between Parts C and D and will be in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XI and Regulation XX.
4.4 Part C
Candidates must choose one option ‘o’ from each semester
Code |
Title |
Weight |
Semester |
C/O |
WSD001 |
Team Project |
30 |
1+2 |
C |
DSC502 |
Human Factors in Systems Engineering C |
15 |
1+2 |
C |
MPC022 |
Materials Properties and Applications |
15 |
1+2 |
C |
WSC012 |
Systems Engineering Applications Theory |
15 |
1+2 |
C |
WSC003 |
Renewable Energy Sources |
15 |
1+2 |
OA |
WSC007 |
Electromagnetism C |
15 |
1+2 |
OA |
WSC008 |
Business Management |
15 |
1+2 |
OA |
WSC013 |
Electromagnetic Compatibility |
15 |
1+2 |
OA |
WSC014 |
Biophotonics Engineering |
15 |
1+2 |
OA |
WSC030 |
Bioelectricity - Fundamentals and Applications |
15 |
1+2 |
OA |
WSC041 |
Digital and State Space Control |
15 |
1+2 |
OA |
WSC056 | Fundamentals of Digital Signal Processing | 15 | 1+2 |
OA |
XXXXXX | Options from the University Catalogue | 30 | 1+2 |
OB |
The option OB allows a free choice of modules worth 30 credits from the University Catalogue. This choice should be restricted to modules from Part C or D level, subject to the overall requirement for the Part that at least 90 credits should be from Part D level or above. The total of 120 credits should be arranged as near to 60 credits per semester as possible.
All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.
4.5 Part D
Candidates must choose exactly 45 credits of option modules, a minimum of 15 credits of which must be from those labelled OA. The remaining credit can be from options labelled OA, OB or OC.
Code |
Title |
Weight |
Semester |
C/O |
WSD030 |
Advanced Project |
50 |
1+2 |
C |
WSD033 |
Systems Diagnostics |
10 |
1+2 |
C |
WSD062 |
Understanding Complexity |
15 |
2 |
C |
WSD572 |
Systems Architecture |
15 |
1 |
OA |
WSD060 |
Engineering and Managing Capability |
15 |
2 |
OA |
WSD566 |
Systems Design |
15 |
1 |
OA |
WSD567 |
Validation and Verification |
15 |
2 |
OA |
WSD571 |
Holistic Engineering |
15 |
2 |
OA |
WSD536 |
Biomass 1 |
15 |
1 |
OB |
WSD506 |
Digital Signal Processing |
15 |
1 |
OB |
WSD569 |
Innovation and Entrepreneurship in Engineering |
15 |
1 |
OB |
WSD533 |
Solar Power |
15 |
1 |
OB |
WSD535 |
Water Power |
15 |
1 |
OB |
WSD534 |
Wind Power 1 |
15 |
1 |
OB |
WSD532 |
Integration of Renewables |
15 |
2 |
OB |
WSD517 |
Mobile Network Technologies |
15 |
2 |
OB |
XXXXXX |
Options from the University Catalogue |
30 |
1+2 |
OC |
The optional modules listed oA and oB are block taught in one week or two week long blocks.
The option oC allows a free choice of modules worth 30 credits from the University Catalogue. This choice should be restricted to modules from Part C or D level, subject to the overall requirement for the Part that at least 90 credits should be from Part D level or above. The total of 120 credits should be arranged as near to 60 credits per semester as possible.
All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and student having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 Criteria for programme progression
Progression from Part A to Part B, Part B to Part C and from Part C to Part D will be subject to provisions set out in Regulation XX and in addition candidates must accumulate 120 credits and achieve an overall average of 55% in that part.
For candidates who commence study on the programme before October, 2016:
To progress from Part A to Part B, candidates must accumulate 100 credits from Part A, with no module mark less than 30% and obtain an average mark in Part A of at least 55%.
To progress from Part B to either Part C or Part I, (a period of professional training and/or study at an approved institution abroad, DIS or DIntS), candidates must accumulate 100 credits from Part B, with no module mark less than 30% and obtain an average mark in Part B of at least 55%.
To progress from Part C to either Part D or Part I, (a period of professional training and/or study at an approved institution abroad, DIS or DIntS), candidates must accumulate 100 credits from Part C, with no module mark less than 30% and obtain an average mark in Part C of at least 55%.
5.2 Degree Award
To qualify for the award of the degree of Master of Engineering, candidates must accumulate 100 credits from Part D, with no module marks less than 30%. In addition, candidates should normally obtain a mark of at least 50% in all modules with codes of the form WSD5xx taken in Part D.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
A candidate's final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments at Parts B, C and D in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 15: Part C 42.5: Part D 42.5, to determine the final Programme Mark.
Programme Specification
EL MEng (Hons) Systems Engineering (Students undertaking Part D in 2019)
Academic Year: 2019/20
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET) |
Final award | MEng / MEng+DIS / MEng+DIntS |
Programme title | Systems Engineering |
Programme code | WSUM20 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is 8 semesters or 10 semesters if taken with the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS) or the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS). The programme is only available on a full-time basis. |
UCAS code | H660, H641 |
Admissions criteria | |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
To meet the all of the aims of the MEng programme in Systems Engineering and to further enhance a student’s learning experience by providing a high quality educational experience, for well motivated high achievers, that:
- A1. increases the depth and breadth of technical study to the level expected of Masters level graduates;
- A2. develops knowledge and skills, to a depth and breadth expected of Masters level graduates, as a preparation for a career in industry;
- A3. takes the student through the first level expected when applying for chartered engineer status
- A4. develops an enhanced capacity for independent learning, planning, self–reliance and self- evaluation;
- A5. enhances teamwork and leadership skills, equipping graduates of the programme to play leading roles in industry and potentially take responsibility for future innovation and change;
- A6. develop an appreciation for complexity and uncertainty in engineering systems;
- A7. Provides an introduction to and experience of mentoring and evaluation processes and techniques enabling the student to articulate identified issues and suggest alternative approaches within a system design context;
- A8. Provides an opportunity to work in a multi-disciplinary team and to apply project management and engineering theory and practice in a collaborative and competitive
- A9. environment to build and demonstrate a complex autonomous system capable of fulfilling a changing set of requirements;
- A10. Increases the awareness of the complexities in the configuration of Systems of Systems (SoS) particularly at the interfaces of the component systems and hence the need to take a holistic view of SoS development and operation;
- A11. Develops a deeper understanding of the socio-technical aspects of systems and systems of systems design and operation.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence: Engineering Technician, Incorporated Engineer and Chartered Engineer Standard, Engineering Council UK, 3rd edition, 2013.
- UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence: The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes, Engineering Council UK, 3rd edition, 2014.
- Guidance Note on Academic Accreditation, Engineering Council UK, July 2014.
- The UK Quality Code for Higher Education, The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, April 2012.
- Subject Benchmark Statement: Engineering, The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, November 2010.
- Master's Degree Characteristics, The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, March 2010.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate a knowledge and understanding of:
- K1. the nature of systems thinking and systems engineering concepts and terminology;
- K2. the form and value of systems engineering-based techniques, methods and methodologies and their use in the development and evaluation of complex systems and systems of systems in a range of engineering and commercial domains;
- K3. the provenance and theory behind a range of systems and systems engineering tools, methods and processes;
- K4. the need for an integrated systems approach using appropriate and timely configurations of systems engineering methods, tools and processes;
- K5. the importance of integrating Requirements Specification, Systems Design and Validation and Verification approaches along the whole systems life cycle;
- K6. the role and limitations of systems architecture approaches: the interfaces between technical sub-systems with organisational, human and process sub systems;
- K7. Engineering and Management of Capability;
- K8. the theory behind and application of mentoring approaches;
- K9. the theory behind and application of formal project evaluation methods and practice;
- K10. mathematical methods appropriate to systems engineering and related disciplines, including their limitations and range of applicability;
- K11. principles of engineering and/or systems science appropriate to engineering and related disciplines, including their range of applicability;
- K12. principles of information technology and communications appropriate to engineering of complex systems;
- K13. knowledge and information management techniques and tools;
- K14. design principles and techniques appropriate to relevant components, equipment and associated software;
- K15. characteristics of relevant common engineering materials and components;
- K16. management and business practices appropriate to engineering industries, their application and limitations;
- K17. relevant codes of practice and regulatory frameworks relevant to systems engineering and related disciplines;
- K18. operational practices and requirements for safe operation relevant to electronic and electrical engineering;
- K19. the professional and ethical responsibilities of engineers;
- K20. research methodologies and approaches;
- K21. ability to deal with uncertain, incomplete and changing information in a dynamic systems or systems of systems context.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate:
- C1. an ability to apply a systems engineering approach to engineering, problem structuring and problem solving in a variety of engineering contexts;
- C2. ability to select and apply different systems engineering tools, methods and processes based on both an understanding of the theory behind the tools and an appreciation of their functionality and applicability to the system context;
- C3. the role and processes involved in mentoring individuals and groups and evaluation of projects against goals set;
- C4. an understanding of standard mathematical and/or computer based methods for modelling and analysing a range of practical and hypothetical engineering problems, and the essential principles of modelling and analysing routine engineering systems, processes, components and products;
- C5. an appreciation of the socio-technical aspects of system design and operation and the application of methods and techniques available in this area;
- C6. a competency in systems architecting approaches;
- C7. an understanding of a range of areas dependent on modules studied eg control techniques used in industry, aeronautical considerations of aircraft design and performance, different renewable energy generation technologies, human factors in systems design, financial management, system architecting, innovation etc.
- C8. an ability to develop innovative solutions to practical engineering problems;
- C9. a competence in defining and solving practical engineering problems;
- C10. the ability to integrate, evaluate and use information, data and ideas from a range of sources in their project work.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- P1. develop a viable systems engineering approach to the development of complex systems and systems of systems in a range of engineering and commercial environments;
- P2. analyse and identify a problem space, extract and formalize a requirements specification for a system of interest and select and apply appropriate systems design and validation and verification methods within a defined systems engineering process along the whole system lifecycle;
- P3. select and use conventional laboratory equipment and relevant test and measurement equipment in a safe manner;
- P4. research, select and use computational tools and packages (including programming and modelling languages where appropriate) in familiar situations for modeling and analysing pertinent engineering problems;
- P5. design, and where appropriate construct, systems, components or processes in a muli- disciplinary team within given time and resource constraints;
- P6. search for, locate, retrieve and reference correctly information, ideas and data from a variety of sources;
- P7. manage a project and the inherent technical and project management risks, and produce technical reports, papers, diagrams and drawings.
- P8. plan and execute safely novel or unfamiliar experimental laboratory work;
- P9. undertake testing of design ideas in the laboratory or by simulation, and analyse and critically evaluate the results.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should have the following skills and abilities:
- T1. Self-management : readiness to accept responsibility, flexibility, resilience, self-starting, appropriate assertiveness, time management, readiness to improve own performance based on feedback/reflective learning
- T2. Team-working: respecting others, co-operating, negotiating/persuading, contributing to discussions, interpersonal skills and awareness of interdependence with others
- T3. Leadership: project and group management, delegation v control, verbal and written communication, creativity, problem solving and financial/time/risk management
- T4. Analysis and investigation: use of systems engineering approaches, tools and techniques to gather and analyse information systematically to aid decision-making and critical thinking skills
- T5. Business and customer awareness: Basic understanding of the key drivers for business success – including the importance of innovation and taking calculated risks – and the need to provide customer satisfaction and build customer loyalty
- T6. Problem solving: analysing facts and situations and applying creative thinking to develop appropriate solutions
- T7. Communication and literacy: application of literacy, ability to produce clear, structured written work and oral literacy – including listening and questioning
- T8. Positive attitude: a ‘can-do’ approach, self- motivation, a readiness to take part and contribute, openness to new ideas and a drive to make these happen
- T9. Entrepreneurship and enterprise: broadly, an ability to demonstrate an innovative approach, creativity, collaboration and risk taking. An individual with these attributes can make a huge difference to any business
- T10. IT and networks: programming and application development, databases, modeling software, spreadsheets, word processing, graphics and multi-media
- T11. Risk Management and mitigation
- T12. Generation and selection of alternative solutions to different classes of engineering/system design problems using a range of methods
- T13. manipulate, sort and present data in a range of forms
- T14. use evidence based methods and investigative techniques in the solution of complex problems
- T15. work with limited, incomplete and/or contradictory information in the solution of unfamiliar problems
- T16. Mentoring and evaluation skills including self reflection on performance
- T17. Production and deliver of professional and effective presentations using a range of media
- T18. Ability to learn effectively, continuously and independently in a variety of environments
4. Programme structure
These Programme Specifications apply to the conduct of the programme in the 2018-19 session and should not be construed as being relevant to any other session. These Programme Specifications may be subject to change from time to time. Notice of change will be given by the School responsible for the programme.
In the following tables, ‘c’ indicates a compulsory module and ‘o’ indicates an optional module.
Modules which are indicated as being taught in both Semester 1 and Semester 2 have elements of assessment in each semester however examinations for these modules normally occur during the Semester 2 examination period. Modules indicated as being taught in a single semester are assessed entirely within that semester.
4.1 Part A
Code |
Title |
Weight |
Semester |
C/O |
ELA005 |
Electromagnetism A |
10 |
2 |
C |
ELA004 |
Signals and Systems |
10 |
1+2 |
C |
ELA007 |
Introduction to Systems Engineering for Projects |
20 |
1+2 |
C |
MAA303 |
Mathematics A |
20 |
1+2 |
C |
ELA001 |
Circuits |
20 |
1+2 |
C |
ELA003 |
Electronics A |
20 |
1+2 |
C |
ELA010 |
Programming and Software Design |
20 |
1+2 |
C |
4.2 Part B
Candidates must choose two options ‘o’.
Code |
Title |
Weight |
Semester |
C/O |
ELB006 |
Systems Integration |
20 |
1+2 |
C |
ELB007 |
Systems Methods |
20 |
1+2 |
C |
MAB303 |
Mathematics B |
20 |
1+2 |
C |
ELB004 | Control System Design | 15 | 1+2 | C |
ELB008 | Aircraft Design | 15 | 1+2 | C |
ELB002 |
Communications |
15 |
1+2 |
O |
ELB003 |
Electromechanical Systems |
15 |
1+2 |
O |
ELB140 |
Mechanics |
15 |
1+2 |
O |
4.3 Part C
Candidates must choose one option ‘o’ from each semester
Code |
Title |
Weight |
Semester |
C/O |
ELD002 |
Group Project |
30 |
1+2 |
C |
DSC502 |
Human Factors in Systems Engineering |
15 |
1+2 |
C |
MPC022 |
Materials Properties and Applications |
15 |
1+2 |
C |
ELC012 |
Systems Engineering Applications Theory |
15 |
1+2 |
C |
ELB002 |
Communications |
15 |
1+2 |
OA |
ELB010 |
Electronics B |
20 |
1+2 |
OA |
ELB014 |
Software Engineering |
15 |
1+2 |
OA |
ELB019 |
Computer Architecture |
15 |
1+2 |
OA |
ELC003 |
Renewable Energy Sources |
15 |
1+2 |
OB |
ELC006 |
Fast Transient Sensors |
15 |
1+2 |
OB |
ELC007 |
Electromagnetism C |
15 |
1+2 |
OB |
ELC008 |
Business Management |
15 |
1+2 |
OB |
ELC013 |
Electromagnetic Compatibility |
15 |
1+2 |
OB |
ELC014 |
Biophotonics Engineering |
15 |
1+2 |
OB |
ELC030 |
Bioelectricity - Fundamentals and Applications |
15 |
1+2 |
OB |
ELC041 |
Digital and State Space Control |
15 |
1+2 |
OB |
ELC056 | Fundamentals of Digital Signal Processing | 15 | 1+2 |
OB |
XXXXXX | Options from the University Catalogue | 30 | 1+2 |
OC |
Options listed as oA will normally continue to be delivered during the Semester 1 examination period, while options listed as oB will normally be suspended during the Semester 1 examination period. No more than two oA modules should be chosen and only where they were not taken at Part B.
The option oC allows a free choice of modules worth 30 credits from the University Catalogue. This choice should be restricted to modules from Part C or D level, subject to the overall requirement for the Part that at least 90 credits should be from Part D level or above. The total of 120 credits should be arranged as near to 60 credits per semester as possible.
All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.
4.4 Part D
Candidates must choose exactly 45 credits of option modules, a minimum of 15 credits of which must be from those labelled OA. The remaining credit can be from options labelled OA, OB or OC.
Code |
Title |
Weight |
Semester |
C/O |
WSD030 |
Advanced Project |
50 |
1+2 |
C |
WSD033 |
Systems Diagnostics |
10 |
1+2 |
C |
WSD062 |
Understanding Complexity |
15 |
2 |
C |
WSD572 |
Systems Architecture |
15 |
1 |
OA |
WSD060 |
Engineering and Managing Capability |
15 |
2 |
OA |
WSD566 |
Systems Design |
15 |
1 |
OA |
WSD567 |
Validation and Verification |
15 |
2 |
OA |
WSD571 |
Holistic Engineering |
15 |
2 |
OA |
WSD536 |
Biomass 1 |
15 |
1 |
OB |
WSD506 |
Fundamentals of Digital Signal Processing |
15 |
1 |
OB |
WSD569 |
Innovation and Entrepreneurship in Engineering |
15 |
1 |
OB |
WSD533 |
Solar Power |
15 |
1 |
OB |
WSD535 |
Water Power |
15 |
1 |
OB |
WSD534 |
Wind Power 1 |
15 |
1 |
OB |
WSD532 |
Integration of Renewables |
15 |
2 |
OB |
WSD517 |
Mobile Network Technologies |
15 |
2 |
OB |
XXXXXX |
Options from the University Catalogue |
30 |
1+2 |
OC |
The optional modules listed oA and oB are block taught in one week or two week long blocks.
The option oC allows a free choice of modules worth 30 credits from the University Catalogue. This choice should be restricted to modules from Part C or D level, subject to the overall requirement for the Part that at least 90 credits should be from Part D level or above. The total of 120 credits should be arranged as near to 60 credits per semester as possible.
All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.
4.5 Part I
For candidates who are registered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS) or Diploma in International Studies (DIntS), Part I will be followed between Parts B and C or between Parts C and D and will be in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XI and Regulation XX.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 Criteria for programme progression
Progression from Part A to Part B, Part B to Part C and from Part C to Part D will be subject to provisions set out in Regulation XX and in addition candidates must accumulate 120 credits and achieve an overall average of 55% in that part.
For candidates who commence study on the programme before October, 2016:
To progress from Part A to Part B, candidates must accumulate 100 credits from Part A, with no module mark less than 30% and obtain an average mark in Part A of at least 55%.
To progress from Part B to either Part C or Part I, (a period of professional training and/or study at an approved institution abroad, DIS or DIntS), candidates must accumulate 100 credits from Part B, with no module mark less than 30% and obtain an average mark in Part B of at least 55%.
To progress from Part C to either Part D or Part I, (a period of professional training and/or study at an approved institution abroad, DIS or DIntS), candidates must accumulate 100 credits from Part C, with no module mark less than 30% and obtain an average mark in Part C of at least 55%.
5.2 Degree Award
To qualify for the award of the degree of Master of Engineering, candidates must accumulate 100 credits from Part D, with no module marks less than 30%.
In addition, candidates should normally obtain a mark of at least 50% in all modules with codes of the form WSD5xx taken in Part D.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
A candidate's final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments at Parts B, C and D in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 15: Part C 42.5: Part D 42.5, to determine the final Programme Mark.
Programme Specification
EL MEng (Hons) Electronic and Computer Systems Engineering (Students undertaking Part C in 2019)
Academic Year: 2019/20
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET)
|
Final award | MEng/ MEng + DIS/ MEng + DPS/ MEng + DIntS |
Programme title | Electronic and Computer Systems Engineering |
Programme code | WSUM30 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is 8 semesters or 10 semesters if taken with either the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS) or the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS). The programme is only available on a full-time basis. |
UCAS code | H612, H613 |
Admissions criteria | |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
To meet the aims of the MEng programme in Electronic and Computer Systems Engineering and to further enhance a student’s learning experience by providing a high quality educational experience, for well motivated high achievers, that:
- A1. increases the depth and breadth of technical study to the level expected of Masters level graduates;
- A2. develops knowledge and skills, to a depth and breadth expected of Masters level graduates, as a preparation for a career in the electronic and electrical engineering industry;
- A3. develops an enhanced capacity for independent learning, planning and self–reliance;
- A4. enhances teamwork and leadership skills, equipping graduates of the programme to play leading roles in industry and potentially take responsibility for future innovation and change
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence: Engineering Technician, Incorporated Engineer and Chartered Engineer Standard, Engineering Council UK, 3rd edition, 2013.
UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence: The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes, Engineering Council UK, 3rd edition, 2014.
Guidance Note on Academic Accreditation, Engineering Council UK, July 2014.
The UK Quality Code for Higher Education, The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, April 2012.
Subject Benchmark Statement: Engineering: The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, November 2010.
Master's Degree Characteristics, The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, March 2010.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate a knowledge and understanding of:
- K1. mathematical methods appropriate to electronic and electrical engineering and related disciplines, including their limitations and range of applicability
- K2. principles of engineering appropriate to electronic and electrical engineering and related disciplines, including their range of applicability;
- K3. principles of Information Technology and Communications appropriate to electronic and electrical engineering and related disciplines;
- K4. design principles and techniques appropriate to relevant components, equipment and associated software;
- K5. characteristics of relevant engineering components;
- K6. management and business practices appropriate to engineering industries, their application and limitations;
- K7. codes of practice and regulatory frameworks relevant to electronic and electrical engineering and related disciplines;
- K8. operational practices and requirements for safe operation relevant to electronic and electrical engineering and related disciplines;
- K9. the professional and ethical responsibilities of engineers;
- K9. team roles, team-working skills and leadership skills;
- K10. relevant research methods.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate:
- C1. an understanding of standard mathematical and computer based methods for modelling and analysing a range of practical and hypothetical engineering problems, and the essential principles of modelling and analysing routine engineering systems, processes, components and products;
- C2. an ability to develop innovative solutions to practical engineering problems;
- C3. a competence in defining and solving practical engineering problems;
- C4. the ability to apply engineering processes in a range practical contexts.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- P1. use appropriate or novel mathematical methods for modelling and analysing pertinent engineering problems;
- P2. select and use relevant test and measurement equipment;
- P3. plan and execute safely novel or unfamiliar experimental laboratory work;
- P4. select and use computational tools and packages (including programming languages where appropriate);
- P5. design, and where appropriate construct, new systems, components or processes;
- P6. undertake testing of design ideas in the laboratory or by simulation, and analyse and critically evaluate the results;
- P7. search for, retrieve and evaluate information, ideas and data from a variety of sources;
- P8. manage a project and produce technical reports, papers, diagrams and drawings at an appropriate level.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- T1. manipulate, sort and present data in a range of forms;
- T2. use evidence based methods in the solution of complex problems;
- T3. work with limited, incomplete and/or contradictory information in the solution of unfamiliar problems;
- T4. use an engineering and/or systems approach to the solution of problems in unfamiliar situations;
- T5. be creative and innovative in problem solving;
- T6. work effectively as part of a team and show potential for leadership;
- T7. use a wide range of information and communications technology;
- T8. manage time and resources;
- T9. use appropriate management tools;
- T10. communicate effectively orally, visually and in writing at an appropriate level;
- T11. learn effectively, continuously and independently in a variety of environments.
4. Programme structure
These Programme Specifications apply to the conduct of the programme in the 2018-19 session and should not be construed as being relevant to any other session. These Programme Specifications may be subject to change from time to time. Notice of change will be given by the School responsible for the programme.
In the following tables, ‘c’ indicates a compulsory module and ‘o’ indicates an optional module. The optional modules ‘oA’, ‘oB’, ‘oC’ and ‘oD’ should be considered along with the text following the table in which they appear.
Modules indicated as being taught in both Semester 1 and Semester 2 have elements of assessment in each semester however examinations for these modules normally occur during the Semester 2 examination period. Modules indicated as being taught in a single semester are assessed entirely within that semester.
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
ELA005 | Electromagnetism A | 10 | 2 | C |
ELA004 | Signals and Systems | 20 | 1+2 | C |
ELA007 | Introduction to Systems Engineering for Projects | 20 | 1+2 | C |
MAA303 | Mathematics A | 20 | 1+2 | C |
ELA001 | Circuits | 20 | 1+2 | C |
ELA003 | Electronics A | 20 | 1+2 | C |
ELA010 | Programming and Software Design | 20 | 1+2 | C |
The 20 credit module ELA001 Circuits is taught over both semesters, 2/3 of the module is taught in Semester 1 and 1/3 in Semester 2.
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
ELB014 | Software Engineering | 15 | 1+2 | C |
ELB019 | Computer Architecture | 15 | 1+2 | C |
ELB020 | Introduction to FPGA Design | 15 | 1+2 | C |
ELB010 | Electronics B | 20 | 1+2 | C |
MAB303 | Mathematics B | 20 | 1+2 | C |
ELB006 | Systems Integration | 20 | 1+2 | OA |
ELB013 | Engineering Project Management | 20 | 1+2 | OA |
ELB002 | Communications | 15 | 1+2 | OB |
ELB004 | Control Systems Design | 15 | 1+2 | OB |
Students should take one of the optional modules marked oA and one marked oB.
4.3 Part I
Code | Title |
WSI010 | Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS) (Non-credit bearing) |
WSI020 | Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) (Non-credit bearing) |
WSI035 | Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) (Non-credit bearing) |
For candidates who are registered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS), Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS), or Diploma in International Studies (DIntS), Part I will be between Part B and C or Parts C and D and will be in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XI and Regulations XX.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
WSC008 | Business Management | 15 | 1+2 | C |
WSC018 | Real-Time Software Engineering | 15 | 1+2 | C |
WSC054 | Electronic System Design with FPGAs | 15 | 1+2 | C |
WSC055 | Digital Interfacing and Instrumentation | 15 | 1+2 | C |
WSD001 | Team Project | 30 | 1+2 | C |
WSC002 | Principles of Digital Communications | 15 | 1+2 | OA |
WSC004 | Computer Networks | 15 | 1+2 | OA |
WSC013 | Electromagnetic Compatibility | 15 | 1+2 | OA |
WSC014 | Biophotonics Engineering | 15 | 1+2 | OA |
WSC030 | Bioelectricity - Fundamentals and Applications | 15 | 1+2 | OA |
WSC039 | Microwave Communication Systems | 15 | 1+2 | OA |
WSC041 | Digital and State Space Control | 15 | 1+2 | OA |
WSC056 | Fundamentals of Digital Signal Processing | 15 | 1+2 | OA |
DSC502 | Human Factors in Systems Design C | 15 | 1+2 | OA |
MPC022 | Materials Properties and Applications | 15 | 1+2 | OA |
XXXXXX | Options from the University Catalogue |
30 |
1+2 | OB |
Option modules with a total weight of 30 credits should be chosen.
The option OB allows a free choice of modules worth 30 credits from the University Catalogue. This choice should be restricted to modules from Part C or D level, subject to the overall requirement for the Part that at least 90 credits should be from Part D level or above. The total of 120 credits should be arranged as near to 60 credits per semester as possible.
All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.
4.5 Part D - Degree Modules
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
WSD030 | Advanced Project | 50 | 1+2 | C |
WSD034 | Applying Management Theory | 10 | 1+2 | C |
WSD530 | Programming Multi/many-core Systems | 15 | 1 | C |
WSD506 | Digital Signal Processing | 15 | 1 | OA |
WSD509 | Communication Networks | 15 | 1 | OA |
WSD510 | Personal Radio Communications | 15 | 1 | OA |
WSD511 | Information Theory and Coding | 15 | 1 | OA |
WSD515 | Communication Channels | 15 | 1 | OA |
WSD568 | Sensors and Actuators for Control | 15 | 1 | OA |
WSD062 | Understanding Complexity | 15 | 2 | OA |
WSD508 | Digital Signal Processing for Software Defined Radio | 15 | 2 | OA |
WSD516 | Telecommunication Network Security | 15 | 2 | OA |
WSD517 | Mobile Network Technologies | 15 | 2 | OA |
WSD525 | Advanced Electronics Engineering Applications | 15 | 2 | OA |
WSD032 | Microwave Circuits Laboratory | 15 | 1+2 | OB |
XXXXXX | Options from the University Catalogue | 30 | 1+2 | OC |
The optional modules listed oA are block taught in one week or two week long blocks, while those listed oB run over both semesters.
The option oC allows a free choice of modules worth 30 credits from the University Catalogue. This choice should be restricted to modules from Part C or D level, subject to the overall requirement for the Part that at least 90 credits should be from Part D level or above. The total of 120 credits should be arranged as near to 60 credits per semester as possible.
All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 Criteria for programme progression
Progression from Part A to Part B, Part B to Part C and from Part C to Part D will be subnject to the provisions set out in Regulation XX and in addition candidates must accumulate 120 credits and achieve an overall average of 55% in that part.
For candidates who commence study on the programme before October, 2016:
To progress from Part A to Part B, candidates must accumulate 100 credits from Part A, with no module mark less than 30% and obtain an average mark in Part A of at least 55%.
To progress from Part B to either Part C or Part I, (a period of professional training and/or study at an approved institution abroad, DIS or DIntS), candidates must accumulate 100 credits from Part B, with no module mark less than 30% and obtain an average mark in Part B of at least 55%.
To progress from Part C to either Part D or Part I, (a period of professional training and/or study at an approved institution abroad, DIS or DIntS), candidates must accumulate 100 credits from Part C, with no module mark less than 30% and obtain an average mark in Part C of at least 55%.
5.2 Degree award
To qualify for the award of the Degree of Master of Engineering, candidates must accumulate 100 credits from Part D, with no module mark less than 30%. In addition, candidates should normally obtain a mark of at least 50% in all modules with codes of the form WSD5xx taken in Part D.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
A candidate's final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments at Parts B, C and D in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 15: Part C 42.5: Part D 42.5, to determine the final Programme Mark.
Programme Specification
EL MEng (Hons) Electronic and Computer Systems Engineering (Students undertaking Part D in 2019)
Academic Year: 2019/20
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET)
|
Final award | MEng/ MEng + DIS/ MEng + DIntS |
Programme title | Electronic and Computer Systems Engineering |
Programme code | WSUM30 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is 8 semesters or 10 semesters if taken with either the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS) or the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS). The programme is only available on a full-time basis. |
UCAS code | H612, H613 |
Admissions criteria | |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
To meet the aims of the MEng programme in Electronic and Computer Systems Engineering and to further enhance a student’s learning experience by providing a high quality educational experience, for well motivated high achievers, that:
- A1. increases the depth and breadth of technical study to the level expected of Masters level graduates;
- A2. develops knowledge and skills, to a depth and breadth expected of Masters level graduates, as a preparation for a career in the electronic and electrical engineering industry;
- A3. develops an enhanced capacity for independent learning, planning and self–reliance;
- A4. enhances teamwork and leadership skills, equipping graduates of the programme to play leading roles in industry and potentially take responsibility for future innovation and change
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence: Engineering Technician, Incorporated Engineer and Chartered Engineer Standard, Engineering Council UK, 3rd edition, 2013.
UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence: The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes, Engineering Council UK, 3rd edition, 2014.
Guidance Note on Academic Accreditation, Engineering Council UK, July 2014.
The UK Quality Code for Higher Education, The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, April 2012.
Subject Benchmark Statement: Engineering: The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, November 2010.
Master's Degree Characteristics, The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, March 2010.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate a knowledge and understanding of:
- K1. mathematical methods appropriate to electronic and electrical engineering and related disciplines, including their limitations and range of applicability
- K2. principles of engineering appropriate to electronic and electrical engineering and related disciplines, including their range of applicability;
- K3. principles of Information Technology and Communications appropriate to electronic and electrical engineering and related disciplines;
- K4. design principles and techniques appropriate to relevant components, equipment and associated software;
- K5. characteristics of relevant engineering components;
- K6. management and business practices appropriate to engineering industries, their application and limitations;
- K7. codes of practice and regulatory frameworks relevant to electronic and electrical engineering and related disciplines;
- K8. operational practices and requirements for safe operation relevant to electronic and electrical engineering and related disciplines;
- K9. the professional and ethical responsibilities of engineers;
- K10. team roles, team-working skills and leadership skills;
- K11. relevant research methods.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate:
- C1. an understanding of standard mathematical and computer based methods for modelling and analysing a range of practical and hypothetical engineering problems, and the essential principles of modelling and analysing routine engineering systems, processes, components and products;
- C2. an ability to develop innovative solutions to practical engineering problems;
- C3. a competence in defining and solving practical engineering problems;
- C4. the ability to apply engineering processes in a range practical contexts.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- P1. use appropriate or novel mathematical methods for modelling and analysing pertinent engineering problems;
- P2. select and use relevant test and measurement equipment;
- P3. plan and execute safely novel or unfamiliar experimental laboratory work;
- P4. select and use computational tools and packages (including programming languages where appropriate);
- P5. design, and where appropriate construct, new systems, components or processes;
- P6. undertake testing of design ideas in the laboratory or by simulation, and analyse and critically evaluate the results;
- P7. search for, retrieve and evaluate information, ideas and data from a variety of sources;
- P8. manage a project and produce technical reports, papers, diagrams and drawings at an appropriate level.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- T1. manipulate, sort and present data in a range of forms;
- T2. use evidence based methods in the solution of complex problems;
- T3. work with limited, incomplete and/or contradictory information in the solution of unfamiliar problems;
- T4. use an engineering and/or systems approach to the solution of problems in unfamiliar situations;
- T5. be creative and innovative in problem solving;
- T6. work effectively as part of a team and show potential for leadership;
- T7. use a wide range of information and communications technology;
- T8. manage time and resources;
- T9. use appropriate management tools;
- T10. communicate effectively orally, visually and in writing at an appropriate level;
- T11. learn effectively, continuously and independently in a variety of environments.
4. Programme structure
These Programme Specifications apply to the conduct of the programme in the 2018-19 session and should not be construed as being relevant to any other session. These Programme Specifications may be subject to change from time to time. Notice of change will be given by the School responsible for the programme.
In the following tables, ‘c’ indicates a compulsory module and ‘o’ indicates an optional module. The optional modules ‘oA’, ‘oB’, ‘oC’ and ‘oD’ should be considered along with the text following the table in which they appear.
Modules indicated as being taught in both Semester 1 and Semester 2 have elements of assessment in each semester however examinations for these modules normally occur during the Semester 2 examination period. Modules indicated as being taught in a single semester are assessed entirely within that semester.
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
ELA005 | Electromagnetism A | 10 | 2 | C |
ELA004 | Signals and Systems | 20 | 1+2 | C |
ELA007 | Introduction to Systems Engineering for Projects | 20 | 1+2 | C |
MAA303 | Mathematics A | 20 | 1+2 | C |
ELA001 | Circuits | 20 | 1+2 | C |
ELA003 | Electronics A | 20 | 1+2 | C |
ELA010 | Programming and Software Design | 20 | 1+2 | C |
The 20 credit module ELA001 Circuits is taught over both semesters, 2/3 of the module is taught in Semester 1 and 1/3 in Semester 2.
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
ELB014 | Software Engineering | 15 | 1+2 | C |
ELB019 | Computer Architecture | 15 | 1+2 | C |
ELB020 | Introduction to FPGA Design | 15 | 1+2 | C |
ELB010 | Electronics B | 20 | 1+2 | C |
MAB303 | Mathematics B | 20 | 1+2 | C |
ELB006 | Systems Integration | 20 | 1+2 | OA |
ELB013 | Engineering Project Management | 20 | 1+2 | OA |
ELB002 | Communications | 15 | 1+2 | OB |
ELB004 | Control Systems Design | 15 | 1+2 | OB |
Students should take one of the optional modules marked oA and one marked oB.
4.3 Part C - Degree Modules
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
ELC008 | Business Management | 15 | 1+2 | C |
ELC018 | Real-Time Software Engineering | 15 | 1+2 | C |
ELC054 | Electronic System Design with FPGAs | 15 | 1+2 | C |
ELC055 | Digital Interfacing and Instrumentation | 15 | 1+2 | C |
ELD002 | Group Project | 30 | 1+2 | C |
ELB002 | Communications | 15 | 1+2 | OA |
ELB004 | Control System Design | 15 | 1+2 | OA |
ELC002 | Principles of Digital Communications | 15 | 1+2 | OB |
ELC004 | Computer Networks | 15 | 1+2 | OB |
ELC013 | Electromagnetic Compatibility | 15 | 1+2 | OB |
ELC014 | Biophotonics Engineering | 15 | 1+2 | OB |
ELC030 | Bioelectricity - Fundamentals and Applications | 15 | 1+2 | OB |
ELC039 | Microwave Communication Systems | 15 | 1+2 | OB |
ELC041 | Digital and State Space Control | 15 | 1+2 | OB |
ELC056 | Fundamentals of Digital Signal Processing | 15 | 1+2 | OB |
DSC502 | Human Factors in Systems Design | 15 | 1+2 | OB |
MPC022 | Materials Properties and Applications | 15 | 1+2 | OB |
XXXXXX | Options from the University Catalogue |
30 |
1+2 | OC |
Option modules with a total weight of 30 credits should be chosen.
Options listed as oA will normally continue to be delivered throughout the Semester 1 examination period, while options listed as oB will normally be suspended during the Semester 1 examination period. Modules marked oA may only be chosen if they were not taken at Part B.
The option oC allows a free choice of modules worth 30 credits from the University Catalogue. This choice should be restricted to modules from Part C or D level, subject to the overall requirement for the Part that at least 90 credits should be from Part D level or above. The total of 120 credits should be arranged as near to 60 credits per semester as possible.
All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.
4.4 Part D - Degree Modules
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
WSD030 | Advanced Project | 50 | 1+2 | C |
WSD034 | Applying Management Theory | 10 | 1+2 | C |
WSD530 | Programming Multi/many-core Systems | 15 | 1 | C |
WSD506 | Digital Signal Processing | 15 | 1 | OA |
WSD509 | Communication Networks | 15 | 1 | OA |
WSD510 | Personal Radio Communications | 15 | 1 | OA |
WSD511 | Information Theory and Coding | 15 | 1 | OA |
WSD515 | Communication Channels | 15 | 1 | OA |
WSD568 | Sensors and Actuators for Control | 15 | 1 | OA |
WSD062 | Understanding Complexity | 15 | 2 | OA |
WSD508 | Digital Signal Processing for Software Defined Radio | 15 | 2 | OA |
WSD516 | Telecommunication Network Security | 15 | 2 | OA |
WSD517 | Mobile Network Technologies | 15 | 2 | OA |
WSD525 | Advanced Electronic Engineering Applications | 15 | 2 | OA |
WSD032 | Microwave Circuits Laboratory | 15 | 1+2 | OB |
XXXXXX | Options from the University Catalogue | 30 | 1+2 | OC |
The optional modules listed oA are block taught in one week or two week long blocks, while those listed oB run over both semesters.
The option oC allows a free choice of modules worth 30 credits from the University Catalogue. This choice should be restricted to modules from Part C or D level, subject to the overall requirement for the Part that at least 90 credits should be from Part D level or above. The total of 120 credits should be arranged as near to 60 credits per semester as possible.
All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.
4.5 Part I - Industrial or International training
For candidates who are registered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS) or the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS), Part I will be followed between Parts B and C or between Parts C and D and will be in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XI and Regulation XX.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 Criteria for programme progression
Progression from Part A to Part B, from Part B to Part C, from Part C to Part D will be subjected to the provisions set out in Regulation XX and in addition candidates must accumulate 120 credits and achieve an overall average of 55% in that part.
For candidates who commence study on the programme before October, 2016:
To progress from Part A to Part B, candidates must accumulate 100 credits from Part A, with no module mark less than 30% and obtain an average mark in Part A of at least 55%.
To progress from Part B to either Part C or Part I, (a period of professional training and/or study at an approved institution abroad, DIS or DIntS), candidates must accumulate 100 credits from Part B, with no module mark less than 30% and obtain an average mark in Part B of at least 55%.
To progress from Part C to either Part D or Part I, (a period of professional training and/or study at an approved institution abroad, DIS or DIntS), candidates must accumulate 100 credits from Part C, with no module mark less than 30% and obtain an average mark in Part C of at least 55%.
5.2 Degree award
To qualify for the award of the Degree of Master of Engineering, candidates must accumulate 100 credits from Part D, with no module mark less than 30%. In addition, candidates should normally obtain a mark of at least 50% in all modules with codes of the form WSD5xx taken in Part D.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
A candidate's final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments at Parts B, C and D in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 15: Part C 42.5: Part D 42.5, to determine the final Programme Mark.
Programme Specification
MM BEng (Hons) Sports Technology (2019 Entry)
Academic Year: 2019/20
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET) Institution of Engineering Designers (IED) |
Final award | BEng / BEng + DIS / BEng + DPS / BEng DIntS |
Programme title | Sports Technology |
Programme code | WSUB05 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is 6 semesters, or 8 semesters if students undertake the additional period of study, normally between Parts B and C, leading to the award of the Diploma in Industrial Studies, the Diploma in Professional Studies, or the Diploma of International Studies. |
UCAS code | CH67/HC76 |
Admissions criteria | BEng - BEng + DPS/DIntS - |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
Sports Technology programme aims to:
- Develop graduates with a detailed knowledge and understanding of sport-related product design, manufacture and test, human performance and business studies.
- Develop graduates with the ability to conduct research and design in sports technology and solve associated problems using both established and contemporary ideas and techniques.
- Produce graduates with the analytical and transferable skills that will enable employment in a wide variety of professions and to make a valuable contribution to society.
- Support graduates to manage their own learning, communicate effectively and make use of primary source materials.
- Provide graduates with an appreciation of the essential practical, commercial and broader societal aspects of engineering.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
-
UK Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education (QAA) – ‘Subject Benchmark Statement for Engineering’, (Feb.2015).
-
Engineering Council (UK). ‘UK-SPEC, UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence’, 3rd Edition, Jan.2014.
-
Engineering Council (UK). ‘The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes’, 3rd Edition, May 2014.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
- the underpinning science, mathematics and other disciplines associated with careers related to the design of sports / engineering equipment;
- the characteristics of engineering materials, equipment and processes and an awareness of basic mechanical workshop practices;
- the role of instrumentation and measurement techniques within equipment evaluation and experimental protocol design;
- principles of industrial design, engineering design and manufacturing design;
- ergonomic and aesthetic considerations and how they impact on sports design;
- the variability in human performance capability and methods of evaluation including fitness and training principles relating to sport and exercise;
- principles governing the mechanics and biomechanics of sports movements;
- the role of information technology in providing support of product design and manufacturing;
- management techniques and business practices and the commercial and economic context of a sports / engineering business;
- intellectual property issues and environmental, legal and ethical issues within the modern industrial world.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able:
- identify and define a design or sports engineering problem and generate innovative solutions;
- analyse, objectively evaluate and apply the principles of industrial design, and engineering design;
- utilise the principles of engineering science in the development of solutions to problems;
- apply appropriate methods to model such solutions;
- apply biomechanics to the analysis of movement in sport;
- demonstrate an awareness of form, function, fit, aesthetics, environment and safety;
- select and apply appropriate IT tools to product design and manufacture problems;
- evaluate commercial risk and market trends within the sports sector
- apply general marketing principles to the sports sector.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able:
- research information, generate and evaluate product design ideas;
- communicate design ideas through the presentation of concept drawings, computer graphics and conventional sketching;
- prepare engineering drawings and technical reports;
- test design concepts via practical investigation;
- use appropriate computer software and laboratory equipment;
- use measurement and test equipment to complete experimental laboratory work and collect mechanical and biomechanical data;
- use a variety of observation and test methods to appraise human function and movement
- present technical and business information in a variety of ways;
- manage the design process taking account of customer constraints such as cost, health and safety, risk and environmental issues.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able:
- generate and manipulate data;
- apply creative, structured and evidence-based approaches to problem solving;
- communicate effectively through written, graphical, interpersonal and presentation skills;
- organise and manage time and resources to meet deadlines;
- work effectively both in a team and independently;
- demonstrate organisational and management skills.
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
MAA307 | Engineering Mathematics | 20 | 1+2 | C |
WSA401 | Product Design (Ergonomics & Visualisation) | 20 | 1+2 | C |
WSA502 | Applied Sports Technology 1 | 20 | 1+2 | C |
WSA400 | Application of CAD for Engineering Designers | 10 | 1 | C |
WSA602 | Introduction to Materials and Manufacturing Processes | 10 | 1 | C |
PSA028 | Biomechanics of Sport | 10 | 1 | C |
WSA700 | Measurement Principles | 10 | 2 | C |
WSA701 | Mechanical Design in Sport | 10 | 2 | C |
WSA900 | Electronic and Electrical Technology 1 | 10 | 2 | C |
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
WSB302 | Engineering Computation for Sports Technology | 20 | 1+2 | C |
WSB502 | Applied Sports Technology 2 | 20 | 1+2 | C |
WSB503 | Application of Product Design for Sports | 20 | 1+2 | C |
BSB520 | Principles of Marketing for Sport & Leisure | 10 | 1 | C |
WSB700 | Sports Goods Design, Manufacturing and Test | 10 | 1 | C |
WSB701 | Measurement and Experimental Design | 10 | 1 | C |
MAB206 | Statistics | 10 | 2 | C |
PSB002 | Structural Kinesiology | 10 | 2 | C |
PSB028 | Methods of Analysis in Sports Biomechanics | 10 | 2 | C |
4.3 Part I – Optional Placement Year
Code | Title |
WSI010 | DIS Industrial Placement (non-credit bearing) |
WSI015 | Industrial Training Placement (DIS, non credit bearing) |
WSI020 | DPS Industrial Placement (non-credit bearing) |
WSI035 | DIntS Industrial Placement (non-credit bearing) |
For candidates who are registered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS), Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) or Diploma in International Studies (DintS), Part I will be followed between Parts B and C and will be in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XI and Regulation XX.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
Students MUST choose 20 credits of optional modules (O) in Semester One, with no more than 10 credits from each group.
Students MUST choose 30 credits of optional modules (O) in Semester Two, with no more than 10 credits from each group.
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
WSC500 | Individual Project | 40 | 1+2 | C |
WSC200 | Engineering Management: Finance, Law and Quality | 10 | 1 | C |
WSC701 | Sports Surfaces, Footwear and Garments | 10 | 1 | C |
WSC702 | Sports Equipment Industry | 10 | 2 | C |
WSC600 | Advanced Manufacturing Processes & Technology 1 | 10 | 1 | OA |
WSC602 | Sustainable Manufacturing | 10 | 1 | OA |
WSC606 | Additive Manufacturing for Product Development | 10 | 1 | OA |
PSC028 | Advanced Methods of Analysis in Sports Biomechanics | 10 | 1 | OB |
WSC201 | Organisation Structure and Strategy | 10 | 1 | OB |
WSC400 | Design for Assembly | 10 | 1 | OB |
WSC401 | Product Design (Design Methods and Communication) | 10 | 1 | OC |
PSC100 | Science and Elite Performance in Sport | 20 | 1+2 | OC |
WSC203 | Manufacturing Planning & Control | 10 | 2 | OD |
WSC204 | Management of the Human Resource | 10 | 2 | OD |
WSC300 | Product Information Systems - Computer Aided Design | 10 | 2 | OE |
MPC012 | Polymer Engineering Processes and Manufacture | 10 | 2 | OE |
PSC029 | Mechanics of Sports Technology | 10 | 2 | OF |
WSC610 | Healthcare Engineering | 10 | 2 | OF |
All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to Part C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Part B and Part C in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The overall average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 40: Part C 60, to determine the degree classification.
Programme Specification
MM BEng (Hons) Engineering Management (2019 Entry)
Academic Year: 2019/20
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET) Institution of Mechanical Engineers (IMechE) |
Final award | BEng / BEng + DPS / BEng + DIS / BEng + DInts |
Programme title | Engineering Management |
Programme code | WSUB04 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is 6 semesters, or 8 semesters if students undertake the additional period of study, between Parts B and C, leading to the award of the Diploma of Industrial Studies, Diploma of Professional Studies or the Diploma of International Studies. |
UCAS code | N290/N291 |
Admissions criteria | BEng - BEng + DPS/DIntS - |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
This programme is aimed at:
- Educating engineering management graduates ready to play a substantial role in industrial companies through a substantive base of knowledge and understanding at the forefront of the discipline of engineering and manufacturing.
- Providing a foundation for graduates wishing to progress to professional engineering management status.
- Providing a high quality educational experience for students in a programme of study which combines wide ranging aspects of engineering design and technologies, management models and methodologies, marketing, finance, and business in engineering.
- Preparing graduates to apply organisational and project management, team building, and leadership skills in engineering.
- Developing analytical and transferable skills that will enable graduates to gain employment in a wide variety of professional roles and to take an ethical approach in making a valuable contribution to society.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
-
UK Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education (QAA) – ‘Subject Benchmark Statement for Engineering’, (Feb.2015).
-
Engineering Council (UK). ‘UK-SPEC, UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence’, 3rd Edition, Jan.2014.
-
Engineering Council (UK). ‘The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes’, 3rd Edition, May 2014.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
- the engineering principles and their application to the analysis of key engineering processes;
- the application of quantitative, analytical, modelling and computational methods in order to identify, classify and describe the performance of systems and components and to solve engineering problems and to implement appropriate actions;
- the requirement for engineering activities to promote sustainable development and the application of quantitative techniques where appropriate;
- working with information that may be incomplete or uncertain and quantify the effect of this on the design;
- the evaluation of business, customer and user needs, including considerations such as the wider engineering context, public perception and aesthetics;
- the engineering and business problems, identifying any constraints including environmental and sustainability limitations; ethical, health, safety, security and risk issues, intellectual property; codes of practice and standards;
- the commercial, economic and social context of engineering processes;
- the management techniques, including project management, that may be used to achieve engineering objectives, including the planning and managing the design process, including cost drivers, and evaluate outcomes;
- awareness of relevant legal requirements governing engineering activities, including personnel, health & safety, contract, intellectual property rights, product safety and liability issues;
- the risk issues, including health & safety, environmental and commercial risk, and risk assessment and risk management techniques.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- appreciate the broad range of influences and activities within the engineering processes and explain their significance;
- evaluate technical and commercial risk and make decision based on available information;
- address human factors considerations in engineering processes and design;
- analyse engineering problems to assist in the management of engineering processes;
- identify solutions to engineering problems from a sustainable/environmental standpoint;
- contribute to the innovation development of a new product and its introduction to the market.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- use the design and manufacturing processes to plan and manage engineering projects;
- plan and implement re-organisation of a company for increased effectiveness;
- make effective use of graphical and modelling techniques for design development and communication;
- adopt strategies for non-quantifiable engineering issues;
- select suitable computer based techniques for engineering management problems;
- generate new ideas and develop and evaluate a range of solutions;
- knowledge of characteristics of particular materials, equipment, processes or products;
- knowledge of relevant legal and contractual issues;
- understanding of appropriate codes of practice and industry standards;
- awareness of quality issues and their application to continuous improvement;
- understanding of, and the ability to work in, different roles within an engineering team.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able:
- plan and monitor multi-disciplinary projects;
- appreciate the central role of management within engineering;
- communicate effectively and make presentations of a technical/business nature to achieve maximum impact;
- identify methods to assist in innovation, team-working and engineering communication;
- demonstrate competence in using computer based engineering techniques;
- adopt systematic approach to integrating design requirements, materials and structures;
- use time and resources effectively;
- exercise initiative and personal responsibility, which may be as a team member or leader.
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A – Introductory Modules
Code | Title | Modular Weight | Semester | C/O |
MAA307 | Engineering Mathematics | 20 | 1+2 | C |
WSA102 | Engineering Science | 20 | 1+2 | C |
WSA604 | Materials & Manufacturing Processes | 20 | 1+2 | C |
BSA505 | Organisational Behaviour | 10 | 1 | C |
WSA400 | Application of CAD for Engineering Designers | 10 | 1 | C |
WSA501 | Integrating Studies 1a | 10 | 1 | C |
WSA210 | Manufacturing Management | 10 | 2 | C |
WSA504 | Integrating Studies 1b | 10 | 2 | C |
WSA900 | Electronics and Electrical Technology | 10 | 2 | C |
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
Code | Title | Modular Weight | Semester | C/O |
WSB600 | Manufacturing Process and Technology | 20 | 1+2 | C |
BSB030 | Marketing | 10 | 1 | C |
BSB580 | Operations Management | 10 | 1 | C |
WSB310 | Engineering Management and Modelling | 10 | 1 | C |
WSB505 | Manufacturing Design | 10 | 1 | C |
WSB610 | Manufacturing Technology | 10 | 1 | C |
BSB135 | Consumer Behaviour | 10 | 2 | C |
MAB206 | Statistics | 10 | 2 | C |
WSB301 | Software Engineering | 10 | 2 | C |
WSB203 | Manufacturing Planning and Control | 10 | 2 | C |
WSB204 | Management of the Human Resource | 10 | 2 | C |
4.3 Part I – Optional Placement Year
Code | Title |
WSI010 | DIS Industrial Placement (non-credit bearing) |
WSI020 | DPS Industrial Placement (non-credit bearing) |
WSI035 | DIntS Industrial Placement (non-credit bearing) |
For candidates who are registered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS), Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) or Diploma in International Studies (DintS), Part I will be followed between Parts B and C and will be in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XI and Regulation XX.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
Students MUST choose ONE optional module (10 credits).
Code | Title | Modular Weight | Semester | C/O |
WSC500 | Individual Project | 40 | 1+2 | C |
WSC200 | Engineering Management: Finance Law and Quality | 10 | 1 | C |
WSC201 | Organisational Structure & Strategy | 10 | 1 | C |
WSC602 | Sustainable Manufacturing | 10 | 1 | C |
WSD207 | Project Management | 10 | 1 | C |
WSC206 | Product Innovation Management | 10 | 2 | C |
WSD203 | Lean Operations and Supply Chain Management | 10 | 2 | C |
WSD407 | Sustainable Product Design | 10 | 2 | C |
WSC300 | Product Information System - Computer Aided Design | 10 | 2 | O |
WSC603 | Metrology | 10 | 2 | O |
WSC610 | Healthcare Engineering | 10 | 2 | O |
WSC700 | Sports Engineering | 10 | 2 | O |
All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.
4.5 Study Overseas
Students may choose to study Part C – Semester 1 at an approved Overseas Higher Education Institution. The mix of subjects of the learning programme must be approved in advance by the Programme Director. The proposed programme of learning will include work on an Individual Project.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to Part C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Part B and Part C, in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The overall average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 40: Part C 60, to determine the degree classification.
Programme Specification
EL MEng (Hons) Robotics, Mechatronics and Control Engineering (2018 Entry)
Academic Year: 2019/20
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET) |
Final award | MEng/MEng + DPS/MEng + DInts/MEng +DIS |
Programme title | Robotics, Mechatronics and Control Engineering |
Programme code | WSUM35 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is 8 semesters or 10 semesters if taken with the Diploma in Industrial Studies, Diploma of Professional Studies of Diploma of International Studies. The programme is only available on a full-time basis. |
UCAS code | H673, H674 |
Admissions criteria | MEng - MEng + DPS/DInts - |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The MEng in Robotics, Mechatronics and Control Engineering aims to:
- A1. Prepare highly skilled graduates to pursue careers in Robotics, Mechatronics and Control Engineering across a range of industries and activities involving the design, development and analysis of complex systems
- A2. Provide a high-quality learning experience across a complete range of core subjects in order to give students the skills to investigate robotics, mechatronics and control engineering problems.
- A3. Develop engineers capable of designing innovative systems and managing the development process in order to deliver solutions that meet the requirements of customers.
- A4. Produce engineers with extensive knowledge and understanding of engineering management and business practices and of the relevant ethical, business, sustainability and legal constraints.
- A5. Develop graduates capable of integrating their knowledge of mathematics, science and the broader engineering context to solve complex problems.
- A6. Promote innovation in engineering practice by applying appropriate knowledge, skills, tools and techniques in the analysis, diagnosis and solution of industry-related problems.
- A7. Support personal and professional development, including, problem solving, leadership, team work and both oral and written presentation skills, as well as the ability to take the initiative in improving personal performance.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence: Engineering Technician, Incorporated Engineer and Chartered Engineer Standard, Engineering Council UK, 3rd edition, 2013.
- UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence: The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes, Engineering Council UK, 3rd edition, 2014.
- Guidance Note on Academic Accreditation, Engineering Council UK, July 2014.
- The UK Quality Code for Higher Education, The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, April 2012.
- Subject Benchmark Statement: Engineering, The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, November 2010.
- Master's Degree Characteristics, The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, March 2010.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- K1. Demonstrate a comprehensive understanding of scientific, mathematical and engineering principles appropriate to robotics, mechatronics and control engineering
- K2. Demonstrate an understanding of general engineering and broader principles relevant to engineering
- K3. Understand the commercial, economic and sustainable aspects in the application of engineering processes
- K4. Demonstrate awareness of the relevant codes of practice and regulatory frameworks and the operational practices for safe operation of engineering processes
- K5. Demonstrate extensive knowledge of the application of management and business practices appropriate to engineering industries, including their limitations
- K6. Recognise the professional and ethical responsibilities of engineers
- K7. Demonstrate awareness of developing technologies in robotics, mechatronics and control engineering
- K8. Draw on a deep understanding of robotics, mechatronics and control to form original solutions to engineering problems, some of which may have incomplete specifications.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- C1. Apply engineering principles to the analysis of robotics, mechatronics and control engineering problems;
- C2. Apply mathematical and computer-based methods for modelling and analysing a range of practical and hypothetical engineering processes, components and products;
- C3. Generate innovative designs for engineering problems within the framework of economic, social, ethical and environmental issues;
- C4. Evaluate and respond to customer needs, including fitness for purpose and cost;
- C5. Follow essential design principles appropriate to relevant components, equipment and associated software.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- P1. Demonstrate a comprehensive understanding of design, modelling, simulation and analytical methods and tools appropriate to robotics, mechatronics and control engineering
- P2. Demonstrate a thorough understanding of current practice in defining and solving practical engineering problems, including its limitations and likely future direction
- P3. Demonstrate an ability to manage the design process
- P4. Use conventional laboratory equipment and relevant test and measurement equipment in an appropriate and safe manner
- P5. Apply engineering techniques taking into account relevant codes of practice, commercial constraints and industry standards
- P6. Demonstrate awareness of contractual issues and intellectual property rights
- P7. Work with technical uncertainty
- P8. Use appropriate management tools for project work.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- T1. Search and retrieve information, ideas and data from a variety of sources
- T2. Select and analyse appropriate evidence and data to solve problems;
- T3. Apply skills in problem solving, communication, team working and in the use of general software tools;
- T4. Develop a personal work plan and take responsibility for its execution, independently, as team member or as a team leader;
- T5. Produce appropriate technical reports, papers, diagrams and drawings;
- T6. Plan self-learning and be able to take the initiative in improving personal performance, as the foundation for lifelong learning
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A
Code |
Title |
Semester |
Modular Weight |
C/O |
WSA018 |
Industrial Project in Robotics, Mechatronics and Control Engineering |
1 + 2 |
20 |
C |
MAA103 |
Core Mathematics 1 |
1 |
10 |
C |
WSA010 |
Programming and Software Design |
1 |
20 |
C |
WSA011 |
Electronic Circuits |
1 |
20 |
C |
MAA203 |
Core Mathematics 2 |
2 |
10 |
C |
WSA012 |
Electrical Science A |
2 |
20 |
C |
WSA013 |
Digital Systems |
2 |
20 |
C |
4.2 Part B
Code |
Title |
Semester |
Modular Weight |
C/O |
WSB013 |
Robotics Project Design and Management |
1 + 2 |
20 |
C |
MAB103 |
Advanced Mathematics 1 |
1 |
10 |
C |
WSB010 |
Electronics |
1 |
20 |
C |
WSB140 |
Mechanics for Robotics |
1 |
20 |
C |
WSB004 |
Control System Design |
2 |
20 |
C |
WSB009 |
Mobile Robots |
2 |
20 |
C |
MAB203 |
Advanced Mathematics 2 |
2 |
10 |
C |
4.3 Part I
Code |
Title |
WSI010 | Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS) (Non-credit bearing) |
WSI020 | Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) (Non-credit bearing) |
WSI035 | Diploma in International Studies (DInts) (Non-credit bearing) |
For candidates who are registered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS), Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS), or the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS), Part I will be between Parts B and C or between Parts C and D and will be in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XI and Regulation XX.
4.4 Part C
Candidates must choose one option ‘o’ from Semester 2
Code |
Title |
Semester |
Modular Weight |
C/O |
WSD001 |
Team Project |
1 + 2 |
30 |
C |
WSC012 |
Systems Engineering Applications |
1 |
10 |
C |
WSC041 |
Digital and State Space Control |
1 |
20 |
C |
WSC108 |
Manufacturing Automation and Control |
1 |
10 |
C |
WSC200 |
Engineering Management: Finance, Law and Quality |
1 |
10 |
C |
WSC055 |
Digital Interfacing and Instrumentation |
2 |
20 |
C |
WSC004 |
Computer Networks |
2 |
20 |
O |
WSC014 |
Bioelectricity and Biophotonics Engineering |
2 |
20 |
O |
WSC022 |
Power Electronics |
2 |
20 |
O |
WSC054 |
Electronic Systems Design with FPGAs |
2 |
20 |
O |
4.5 Part D
Candidates must choose optional modules totalling 30 credits
Code |
Title |
Semester |
Modular Weight |
C/O |
WSD030 |
Advanced Project |
1 + 2 |
50 |
C |
WSD034 |
Applying Management Theory |
1 + 2 |
10 |
C |
WSD568 |
Sensors and Actuators for Control |
1 |
15 |
C |
WSD527 |
Systems Modelling for Control Engineering |
1 |
15 |
C |
WSD516 |
Communication Network Security |
2 |
15 |
OA |
WSD532 |
Integration of Renewables |
2 |
15 |
OA |
WSD062 |
Understanding Complexity |
2 |
15 |
OA |
WSD517 |
Mobile Network Technologies |
2 |
15 |
OA |
XXXXXX |
Options from the University Catalogue |
1 + 2 |
30 |
OB |
The optional modules listed oA are block taught in one week or two week long blocks, while those listed oB run over both semesters.
The option oB allows a free choice of modules worth 30 credits from the University Catalogue. This choice should be restricted to modules from Part C or D level, subject to the overall requirement for the Part that at least 90 credits should be from Part D level or above. The total of 120 credits should be arranged as near to 60 credits per semester as possible.
All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 Criteria for programme progression
Progression from Part A to Part B, from Part B to Part C and from Part C to Part D will be subject to the provisions set out in Regulation XX and in addition candidates must accumulate 120 credits and achieve an overall average of 55% in each part.
At the end of Parts A, B, or C candidates not meeting the progression requirements for the MEng after reassessment, or at the option of the candidate, may transfer to the BEng degree programme providing they meet the minimum requirements set out in Regulation XX.
In the event of a candidate transferring onto the BEng programme following assessment (or reassessment) at the end of Part C the degree mark will be calculated by combining average marks in the ratio Part B:40 and Part C:60. The degree award in this case will be governed by the provisions set out in Regulation XX.
5.2 Degree Award
To qualify for the award of the degree of Master of Engineering, candidates must accumulate 100 credits from Part D, with no module marks less than 30%, in addition to the provisions of Regulation XX.
In addition, candidates must achieve a minimum mark of 50% in all modules with the prefix WSD5xx in order to accumulate credit.
Should a candidate fail to qualify for the MEng award at the end of part D following reassessment (or at the option of the candidate) the BEng degree will be awarded on the basis of performance at Parts B and C. The degree mark will be calculated by combining average marks in the ratio Part B:40 and Part C:60
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
A candidate's final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments at Parts B, C and D in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 20: Part C 40: Part D 40 to determine the final Programme Mark.
Programme Specification
EL MEng (Hons) Electronic and Computer Systems Engineering (2019 Entry)
Academic Year: 2019/20
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET)
|
Final award | MEng/ MEng + DIS/ MEng + DPS/ MEng + DPS/ MEng + DIntS |
Programme title | Electronic and Computer Systems Engineering |
Programme code | WSUM30 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is 8 semesters or 10 semesters if taken with either the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS), Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) or the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS). The programme is only available on a full-time basis. |
UCAS code | H612, H613 |
Admissions criteria | |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
To meet the aims of the MEng programme in Electronic and Computer Systems Engineering and to further enhance a student’s learning experience by providing a high quality educational experience, for well motivated high achievers, that:
- A1. increases the depth and breadth of technical study to the level expected of Masters level graduates;
- A2. develops knowledge and skills, to a depth and breadth expected of Masters level graduates, as a preparation for a career in the electronic and electrical engineering industry;
- A3. develops an enhanced capacity for independent learning, planning and self–reliance;
- A4. enhances teamwork and leadership skills, equipping graduates of the programme to play leading roles in industry and potentially take responsibility for future innovation and change
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence: Engineering Technician, Incorporated Engineer and Chartered Engineer Standard, Engineering Council UK, 3rd edition, 2013.
UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence: The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes, Engineering Council UK, 3rd edition, 2014.
Guidance Note on Academic Accreditation, Engineering Council UK, July 2014.
The UK Quality Code for Higher Education, The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, April 2012.
Subject Benchmark Statement: Engineering: The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, November 2010.
Master's Degree Characteristics, The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, March 2010.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate a knowledge and understanding of:
- K1. mathematical methods appropriate to electronic and electrical engineering and related disciplines, including their limitations and range of applicability
- K2. principles of engineering appropriate to electronic and electrical engineering and related disciplines, including their range of applicability;
- K3. principles of Information Technology and Communications appropriate to electronic and electrical engineering and related disciplines;
- K4. design principles and techniques appropriate to relevant components, equipment and associated software;
- K5. characteristics of relevant engineering components;
- K6. management and business practices appropriate to engineering industries, their application and limitations;
- K7. codes of practice and regulatory frameworks relevant to electronic and electrical engineering and related disciplines;
- K8. operational practices and requirements for safe operation relevant to electronic and electrical engineering and related disciplines;
- K9. the professional and ethical responsibilities of engineers;
- K10. team roles, team-working skills and leadership skills;
- K11. relevant research methods.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate:
- C1. an understanding of standard mathematical and computer based methods for modelling and analysing a range of practical and hypothetical engineering problems, and the essential principles of modelling and analysing routine engineering systems, processes, components and products;
- C2. an ability to develop innovative solutions to practical engineering problems;
- C3. a competence in defining and solving practical engineering problems;
- C4. the ability to apply engineering processes in a range practical contexts.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- P1. use appropriate or novel mathematical methods for modelling and analysing pertinent engineering problems;
- P2. select and use relevant test and measurement equipment;
- P3. plan and execute safely novel or unfamiliar experimental laboratory work;
- P4. select and use computational tools and packages (including programming languages where appropriate);
- P5. design, and where appropriate construct, new systems, components or processes;
- P6. undertake testing of design ideas in the laboratory or by simulation, and analyse and critically evaluate the results;
- P7. search for, retrieve and evaluate information, ideas and data from a variety of sources;
- P8. manage a project and produce technical reports, papers, diagrams and drawings at an appropriate level.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- T1. manipulate, sort and present data in a range of forms;
- T2. use evidence based methods in the solution of complex problems;
- T3. work with limited, incomplete and/or contradictory information in the solution of unfamiliar problems;
- T4. use an engineering and/or systems approach to the solution of problems in unfamiliar situations;
- T5. be creative and innovative in problem solving;
- T6. work effectively as part of a team and show potential for leadership;
- T7. use a wide range of information and communications technology;
- T8. manage time and resources;
- T9. use appropriate management tools;
- T10. communicate effectively orally, visually and in writing at an appropriate level;
- T11. learn effectively, continuously and independently in a variety of environments.
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
WSA017 | Industrial Project in Electronic and Computer Systems Engineering | 20 | 1+2 | C |
MAA103 | Core Mathematics 1 | 10 | 1 | C |
WSA010 | Programming and Software Design | 20 | 1 | C |
WSA011 | Electronic Circuits | 20 | 1 | C |
MAA203 | Core Mathematics 2 | 10 | 2 | C |
WSA012 | Electrical Science B | 20 | 2 | C |
WSA013 | Digital Systems | 20 | 2 | C |
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
Candidates must choose ONE option from Semester Two.
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
WSB013 | Robotics Project Design and Management | 20 | 1+2 | C |
MAB103 | Advanced Mathematics 1 | 10 | 1 | C |
WSB010 | Electronics | 20 | 1 | C |
WSB014 | Embedded Systems Programming | 20 | 1 | C |
MAB203 | Advanced Mathematics 2 | 10 | 2 | C |
WSB019 | Computer Architecture | 20 | 2 | C |
WSB002 | Communications | 20 | 2 | C |
WSB004 | Control Systems Design | 20 | 2 | C |
4.3 Part I
Code | Title |
WSI010 | Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS) (Non-credit bearing) |
WSI020 | Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) (Non-credit bearing) |
WSI035 | Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) (Non-credit bearing) |
For candidates who are registered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS), Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) or Diploma in International Studies (DIntS), Part I will be between Part B and C or Parts C and D and will be in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XI and Regulation XX.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
Candidates must choose ONE option from Semester One.
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
WSD001 | Team Project | 30 | 1+2 | C |
WSC018 | Embedded Systems Design and Implementation | 20 | 1 | C |
WSC200 | Engineering Management: Finance, Law and Quality | 10 | 1 | C |
WSC054 | Electronic Systems Design with FPGAs | 20 | 2 | C |
WSC055 | Digital Interfacing and Instrumentation | 20 | 2 | C |
WSC002 | Principles of Digital Communications | 20 | 1 | O |
WSC003 | Sustainable & Renewable Energy Systems | 20 | 1 | O |
WSC039 | Microwave Communications | 20 | 1 | O |
WSC041 | Digital and State Space Control | 20 | 1 | O |
4.5 Part D - Degree Modules
Candidates must choose optional modules totalling 20 credits.
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
WSD030 | Advanced Project | 50 | 1+2 | C |
WSD034 | Applying Management Theory | 10 | 1+2 | C |
WSD530 | Programming Multi/many-core Systems | 15 | 1 | C |
WSD525 | Advanced Electrical Engineering Applications | 15 | 2 | C |
WSD506 | Fundamentals of Digital Signal Processing | 15 | 1 | OA |
WSD509 | Communication Networks | 15 | 1 | OA |
WSD510 | Personal Radio Communications | 15 | 1 | OA |
WSD511 | Information Theory and Coding | 15 | 1 | OA |
WSD515 | Communication Channels | 15 | 1 | OA |
WSD568 | Sensors and Actuators for Control | 15 | 1 | OA |
WSD508 | Digital Signal Processing for Software Defined Radio | 15 | 2 | OA |
WSD516 | Telecommunication Network Security | 15 | 2 | OA |
WSD517 | Mobile Network Technologies | 15 | 2 | OA |
WSD032 | Microwave Circuits Laboratory | 15 | 1+2 | OB |
XXXXXX | Options from the University Catalogue | 30 | 1+2 | OC |
The optional modules listed oA are block taught in one week or two week long blocks, while those listed oB run over both semesters.
The option oC allows a free choice of modules worth 30 credits from the University Catalogue. This choice should be restricted to modules from Part C or D level, subject to the overall requirement for the Part that at least 90 credits should be from Part D level or above. The total of 120 credits should be arranged as near to 60 credits per semester as possible.
All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 Criteria for programme progression
Progression from Part A to Part B, from part B to Part C and from Part C to Part D will be subject to the provisions set out in Regulation XX and in addition candidates must accumulate 120 credits and achieve an overall average of 55% in each part.
At the end of Parts A, B, or C candidates not meeting the progression requirements for the MEng after reassessment, or at the option of the candidate, may transfer to the BEng degree programme providing they meet the minimum requirements set out in Regulation XX.
In the event of a candidate transferring onto the BEng programme following assessment (or reassessment) at the end of Part C the degree mark will be calculated by combining average marks in the ratio Part B:40 and Part C:60. The degree award in this case will be governed by the provisions set out in Regulation XX.
5.2 Degree award
To qualify for the award of the Degree of Master of Engineering, candidates must accumulate 120 credits from Part D, with no module mark less than 40%, in accordance with the provision of Regulation XX.
In addition, candidates should normally obtain a mark of at least 50% in all modules with the prefix WSD5xx in order to accumulate credit.
Should a candidate fail to qualify for the MEng award at the end of Part D following reassessment (or at the option of the candidate) the BEng degree will be awarded on the basis of performance at Parts B and C. The degree mark will be calculated by combining average marks in the ratio Part B:40 and Part C:60.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
A candidate's final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments at Parts B, C and D in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 20: Part C 40: Part D 40, to determine the final Programme Mark.
Programme Specification
EL MEng (Hons) Electronic and Electrical Engineering (2019 Entry)
Academic Year: 2019/20
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET) |
Final award | MEng / MEng+DIS / MEng+DPS/ MEng+DIntS |
Programme title | Electronic and Electrical Engineering |
Programme code | WSUM10 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is 8 semesters or 10 semesters if taken with the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS), Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) or the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS). The programme is only available on a full-time basis. |
UCAS code | H601, H605 |
Admissions criteria | MEng - MEng+DIS /DPS /DIntS - |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The MEng in Electronic and Electrical Engineering aims to:
- A1. Produce high quality graduates capable of shaping the future of Electronic and Electrical Engineering by becoming leaders in their chosen career, whether in industry or academia
- A2. Provide high-quality teaching and practical experience across a complete range of core subjects in order to give students the skills to investigate new and emerging electronic and electrical engineering problems
- A3. Develop engineers capable of designing innovative systems and managing the development process in order to deliver solutions that meet the requirements of customers
- A4. Produce engineers with extensive knowledge and understanding of engineering management and business practices and of relevant ethical, business, sustainability and legal constraints
- A5. Develop graduates capable of integrating their knowledge of mathematics, science and the broader engineering context to solve complex problems.
- A6. Promote innovation in engineering by applying appropriate knowledge, skills, tools and techniques in in delivering successful solutions to both familiar and unfamiliar technical problems
- A7. Support personal and professional development, including, problem solving, leadership, team work and both oral and written presentation skills, as well as the ability to take the initiative in improving personal performance
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence: Engineering Technician, Incorporated Engineer and Chartered Engineer Standard, Engineering Council UK, 3rd edition, 2013.
- UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence: The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes, Engineering Council UK, 3rd edition, 2014.
- Guidance Note on Academic Accreditation, Engineering Council UK, July 2014.
- The UK Quality Code for Higher Education, The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, April 2012.
- Subject Benchmark Statement: Engineering, The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, November 2010.
- Master's Degree Characteristics, The Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education, March 2010.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- K1. Demonstrate a comprehensive understanding of scientific, mathematical and engineering principles appropriate to electronic and electrical engineering
- K2. Demonstrate an understanding of general engineering and broader principles relevant to engineering
- K3. Understand the commercial, economic and sustainable aspects in the application of engineering processes
- K4. Demonstrate awareness of the relevant codes of practice and regulatory frameworks and the operational practices for safe operation of engineering processes
- K5. Demonstrate extensive knowledge of the application of management and business practices appropriate to engineering industries, including their limitations
- K6. Recognise the professional and ethical responsibilities of engineers
- K7. Demonstrate awareness of developing technologies in electronic and electrical engineering
- K8. Draw on a deep understanding of electronic and electrical engineering to form original solutions to engineering problems, some of which may have incomplete specifications
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- C1. Apply engineering principles to the analysis of electronic and electrical engineering problems;
- C2. Apply mathematical and computer-based methods for modelling and analysing a range of practical and hypothetical engineering processes, components and products;
- C3. Generate innovative designs for engineering problems within the framework of economic, social, ethical and environmental issues;
- C4. Evaluate and respond to customer needs, including fitness for purpose and cost;
- C5. Follow essential design principles appropriate to relevant components, equipment and associated software.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- P1. Demonstrate a comprehensive understanding of design, modelling, simulation and analytical methods and tools appropriate to electronic and electrical engineering
- P2. Demonstrate a thorough understanding of current practice in defining and solving practical engineering problems, including its limitations and likely future direction
- P3. Demonstrate an ability to manage the design process
- P4. Use conventional laboratory equipment and relevant test and measurement equipment in an appropriate and safe manner
- P5. Apply engineering techniques taking into account relevant codes of practice, commercial constraints and industry standards
- P6. Demonstrate awareness of contractual issues and intellectual property rights
- P7. Work with technical uncertainty
- P8. Use appropriate management tools for project work.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- T1. Search and retrieve information, ideas and data from a variety of sources
- T2. Select and analyse appropriate evidence and data to solve problems;
- T3. Apply skills in problem solving, communication, team working and in the use of general software tools;
- T4. Develop a personal work plan and take responsibility for its execution, independently, as team member or as a team leader;
- T5. Produce appropriate technical reports, papers, diagrams and drawings;
- T6. Plan self-learning and be able to take the initiative in improving personal performance, as the foundation for lifelong learning
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A
Code |
Title |
Weight |
Semester |
C/O |
WSA015 |
Industrial Project in Electronic and Electrical Engineering |
20 |
1+2 |
C |
WSA011 |
Electronic Circuits |
20 |
1 |
C |
WSA010 |
Programming and Software Design |
20 |
1 |
C |
MAA103 |
Core Mathematics 1 |
10 |
1 |
C |
WSA012 |
Electrical Science A |
20 |
2 |
C |
WSA013 |
Digital Systems |
20 |
2 |
C |
MAA203 |
Core Mathematics 2 |
10 |
2 |
C |
4.2 Part B
Code |
Title |
Weight |
Semester |
C/O |
WSB013 |
Robotics Project Design and Management |
20 |
1+2 |
C |
WSB003 |
Electrical Science B |
20 |
1 |
C |
WSB010 |
Electronics |
20 |
1 |
C |
MAB103 |
Advanced Mathematics 1 |
10 |
1 |
C |
WSB002 |
Communications |
20 |
2 |
C |
WSB004 |
Control System Design |
20 |
2 |
C |
MAB203 |
Advanced Mathematics 2 |
20 |
2 |
C |
4.3 Part I
Code | Title |
WSI010 | Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS) (Non-credit bearing) |
WSI020 | Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) (Non-credit bearing) |
WSI035 | Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) (Non-credit bearing) |
For candidates who are registered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS), Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) or Diploma in International Studies (DIntS), Part I will be between Parts B and C or between Parts C and D and will be in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XI and Regulation XX.
4.4 Part C
Students must choose two options ‘o’ from each semester
Code |
Title |
Weight |
Semester |
C/O |
WSD001 |
Team Project |
30 |
1+2 |
C |
WSC200 |
Engineering Management: Finance, Law and Quality |
10 |
1 |
C |
WSC002 |
Digital Communications Theory and Practice |
20 |
1 |
O |
WSC003 |
Sustainable & Renewable Energy Systems |
20 |
1 |
O |
WSC018 |
Embedded Systems Design and Implementation |
20 |
1 |
O |
WSC039 |
Microwave Communications |
20 |
1 |
O |
WSC041 |
Digital and State Space Control |
20 |
1 |
O |
WSC004 |
Computer Networks |
20 |
2 |
O |
WSC014 |
Bioelectricity and Biophotonics Engineering |
20 |
2 |
O |
WSC022 |
Power Electronics |
20 |
2 |
O |
WSC054 |
Electronic Systems Design with FPGAs |
20 |
2 |
O |
WSC055 |
Digital Interfacing and Instrumentation |
20 |
2 |
O |
4.5 Part D
Students must choose optional modules totalling 60 credits.
Code |
Title |
Weight |
Semester |
C/O |
WSD030 |
Advanced Project |
50 |
50 |
c |
WSD034 |
Applying Management Theory |
10 |
10 |
c |
WSD506 |
Fundamentals of Digital Signal Processing |
15 |
15 |
oA |
WSD509 |
Communication Networks |
15 |
15 |
oA |
WSD510 |
Personal Radio Communications |
15 |
15 |
oA |
WSD511 |
Information Theory and Coding |
15 |
15 |
oA |
WSD515 |
Communication Channels |
15 |
15 |
oA |
WSD521 |
Advanced FPGA Design |
15 |
15 |
oA |
WSD531 |
Sustainability and Energy Systems |
15 |
15 |
oA |
WSD533 |
Solar Power |
15 |
15 |
oA |
WSD534 |
Wind Power 1 |
15 |
15 |
oA |
WSD535 |
Water Power |
15 |
15 |
oA |
WSD536 |
Biomass 1 |
15 |
15 |
oA |
WSD568 |
Sensors and Actuators for Control |
15 |
15 |
oA |
WSD508 |
Digital Signal Processing for Software Defined Radio |
15 |
15 |
oA |
WSD516 |
Communications Network Security |
15 |
15 |
oA |
WSD517 |
Mobile Network Technologies |
15 |
15 |
oA |
WSD523 |
Antennas |
15 |
15 |
oA |
WSD526 |
Radio Frequency and Microwave Integrated Circuit Design |
15 |
15 |
oA |
WSD532 |
Integration of Renewables |
15 |
15 |
oA |
WSD538 |
Energy Storage |
10 |
10 |
oA |
WSD539 |
Solar Thermal Systems |
10 |
10 |
oA |
WSD540 |
Advanced Photovoltaics |
10 |
10 |
oA |
WSD032 |
Microwave Circuits Laboratory |
15 |
15 |
oB |
XXXXXX |
Options from the University Catalogue |
30 |
30 |
oC |
The optional modules listed oA are block taught in one week or two week long blocks, while those listed oB run over both semesters.
The option oC allows a free choice of modules worth 30 credits from the University Catalogue. This choice should be restricted to modules from Part C or D level, subject to the overall requirement for the Part that at least 90 credits should be from Part D level or above. The total of 120 credits should be arranged as near to 60 credits per semester as possible.
All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 Criteria for programme progression
Progression from Part A to Part B, from Part B to Part C and from Part C to Part D will be subject to the provisions set out in Regulation XX and in addition candidates must accumulate 120 credits and achieve an overall average of 55% in each part.
At the end of Parts A, B, or C candidates not meeting the progression requirements for the MEng after reassessment, or at the option of the candidate, may transfer to the BEng degree programme providing they meet the minimum requirements set out in Regulation XX.
In the event of a candidate transferring onto the BEng programme following assessment (or reassessment) at the end of Part C the degree mark will be calculated by combining average marks in the ratio Part B:40 and Part C:60. The degree award in this case will be governed by the provisions set out in Regulation XX.
5.2 Degree Award
To qualify for the award of the degree of Master of Engineering, candidates must accumulate 120 credits from Part D, with no module marks less than 40%, in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XX.
In addition, candidates must achieve a minimum mark of 50% in all modules with the prefix WSD5xx in order to accumulate credit.
Should a candidate fail to qualify for the MEng award at the end of part D following reassessment (or at the option of the candidate) the BEng degree will be awarded on the basis of performance at Parts B and C. The degree mark will be calculated by combining average marks in the ratio Part B:40 and Part C:60
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
A candidate's final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments at Parts B, C and D in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 20: Part C 40: Part D 40 to determine the final Programme Mark.
Programme Specification
MM MEng (Hons) Mechanical Engineering (2019 Entry)
Academic Year: 2019/20
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET) Institution of Mechanical Engineers (IMechE) |
Final award | MEng / MEng+DIS / MEng+DPS / MEng+DInts |
Programme title | Mechanical Engineering |
Programme code | WSUM03 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is either 8 semesters, or 10 semesters if the students undertake the additional period of study normally between Parts B and C for the award of the Diploma of Industrial Studies, the Diploma of International Studies or the Diploma of Professional Studies. |
UCAS code | H302, H303 |
Admissions criteria | MEng -
MEng+DIS /DInts - |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
Aims:
- A1. To prepare highly skilled graduates to meet the business and leadership requirements of industry and to pursue careers in Mechanical Engineering across a range of industries and activities including design, development, and analysis of complex systems
- A2. To provide as high-quality learning experience across a complete range of core subjects in order to give students the necessary technical skills to understand mechanical systems and solve engineering problems
- A3. To promote high-quality engineering practice by applying appropriate knowledge, skills, tools and techniques in the analysis, diagnosis and solution of industry-related problems.
- A4. To develop engineers capable of designing systems and managing the development process in order to deliver solutions that meet the requirements of customers
- A5. To impart an appreciation of the essential practical and commercial, ethical, business, sustainability and legal constraints of professional engineering
- A6. To support personal and professional development and foster creativity, develop design capability and teach the communication skills necessary to put ideas into practice
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- UK Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education (QAA) – ‘Subject Benchmark Statement for Engineering’, (Feb.2015)
-
Engineering Council (UK). ‘UK-SPEC, UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence’, 3rd Edition, Jan 2014
-
Engineering Council (UK). ‘The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes’, 3rd Edition, May 2014
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
- K1. The underpinning scientific, mathematical and engineering principles associated with mechanical engineering;
- K2. The characteristics of engineering materials, equipment and processes and an awareness of basis mechanical workshop practices;
- K3. Engineering principles, quantitative methods, mathematical and computer models;
- K4. Relevant codes of practice and regulatory framework and operational practices for safe operation of engineering processes;
- K5. Recognise the professional and ethic responsibilities of engineers;
- K6. Principles of industrial design, engineering design and manufacturing design;
- K7. Management techniques and an understanding of the commercial and economical context of the engineering business.
- K8. Developing technologies in areas of specialization and understanding of concepts from areas peripheral to mechanical engineering, including a thorough appreciation of microprocessors and machine control software.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- C1. Apply the principles of engineering science in developing solutions to practical mechanical engineering problems;
- C2. Create new engineering components and processes through the synthesis of ideas from a range of sources using appropriate design principles, techniques and codes of practice;
- C3. Integrate, evaluate and make use of information and data from a wide variety of sources including other engineering disciplines;
- C4. Generate innovative designs by evaluating and responding to customer needs, including fitness for purpose and cost;
- C5. Analyse complex mechanical systems, processes and components;
- C6. Investigate and define engineering problems within the framework of economic, social, ethical and environmental issues and show the ability to assess risk;
- C7. Investigate new and emerging technologies using fundamental knowledge and learn new theories, concepts and methods in an familiar situations.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- P1. Apply computer-based and mathematical methods to the modelling and analysis of engineering system, components and products;
- P2. Define and solve practical engineering problems;
- P3. Use laboratory and basis workshop equipment in an appropriate and safe manner;
- P4. Generate ideas for new products and develop and evaluate a range of new solutions;
- P5. Gather and interpret information and evaluate designs;
- P6. Demonstrate the ability to manage the design process and apply appropriate techniques and codes of practice to the design of components and systems;
- P7. Prepare mechanical engineering drawings, computer-graphics and technical reports and give technically competent oral presentations;
- P8. Apply relevant codes of practice and industry standards;
- P9. Demonstrate the ability to work with technical uncertainty;
- P10. Demonstrate high levels of organizational and project management skills.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- T1. Demonstrate a high level of numeracy;
- T2. Search and retrieve information, ideas and data from a variety of sources;
- T3. Adopt systematic approach to the solution of unfamiliar problems;
- T4. Select and analyse appropriate evidence and data to solve problems;
- T5. Solve problems applying engineering techniques and tools;
- T6. Communicate effectively by means of technical reports, papers, graphical aids, interpersonal and presentational skills;
- T7. Design and implement basic computer based information systems;
- T8. Organise and manage time and resources effectively: develop work plans, take responsibility for their execution;
- T9. Undertake most of the technical roles within a team and exercise leadership;
- T10. Plan self-learning and improve performance, as the foundation for lifelong learning.
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
MAA310 | Mathematics for Mechanical Engineering | 20 | 1+2 | C |
WSA101 | Statics and Dynamics | 20 | 1+2 | C |
WSA508 | Engineering Principles and Professional Skills | 20 | 1+2 | C |
WSA604 | Materials and Manufacturing Processes | 20 | 1+2 | C |
WSA800 | Thermodynamics and Fluid Mechanics | 20 | 1+2 | C |
WSA901 | Electronic Systems for Mechanical Processes | 10 | 1 | C |
WSA100 | Mechanics of Materials | 10 | 2 | C |
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
WSB300 | Engineering Computation | 10 | 1+2 | C |
WSB500 | Application of Engineering Design: Industry Based Project | 10 | 1+2 | C |
MAB110 | Mathematics for Mechanical Engineering 3 | 10 | 1 | C |
WSB100 | Mechanics of Materials 2 | 10 | 1 | C |
WSB101 | Engineering Dynamics 2 | 10 | 1 | C |
WSB104 | Control Engineering | 10 | 1 | C |
WSB800 | Thermodynamics 2 | 10 | 1 | C |
WSB045 | Electrical Power & Machines | 10 | 2 | C |
WSB403 | Design of Machine Elements | 10 | 2 | C |
WSB404 | Computer Aided Design, Manufacture and Test (CADMAT) | 10 | 2 | C |
WSB801 | Heat Transfer | 10 | 2 | C |
WSB802 | Fluid Mechanics 2 | 10 | 2 | C |
4.3 Part I – Optional Placement Year
Code | Title |
WSI010 | DIS Industrial Placement (non-credit bearing) |
WSI020 | DPS Industrial Placement (non-credit bearing) |
WSI035 | DIntS Industrial Placement (non-credit bearing) |
For candidates who are registered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS), Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) or Diploma in International Studies (DintS), Part I will be followed between Parts B and C or Part C and D and will be in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XI and Regulation XX.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
Students MUST choose 20 credits of options (O) in Semester One and 30 credits in Semester Two.
TWO modules (20 credits) must be selected from Group A or Group B (both from the same group), OR ONE module from Group A or B and ONE module from Group C.
ONE module (10 credits) must be selected from each of Group D, E, F and . Modules in Group D and E are paired with modules in Part D.
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
WSD550 | Individual Project | 50 | 1+2 | C |
WSC200 | Engineering Management: Finance, Law and Quality | 10 | 1 | C |
WSC900 | Computer Control and Instrumentation | 10 | 1 | C |
WSC801 | Advanced Heat Transfer | 10 | 1 | OA |
WSC804 | Energy Systems Analysis | 10 | 1 | OA |
WSC910 | Laser Materials Processing | 10 | 1 | OA |
WSC104 | Robotics and Control | 10 | 1 | OB |
WSC107 | Contacts Mechanics: Tribology | 10 | 1 | OB |
LAN*** | University Wide Language | 10 | 1 | OC |
WSC101 | Vibration and Noise | 10 | 2 | OD (1a) |
WSC105 | Kinematics and Dynamics of Machinery | 10 | 2 | OD (1b) |
WSC106 | Finite Element Analysis | 10 | 2 | OE (1c) |
WSC802 | Computation Fluid Dynamics I | 10 | 2 | OE (1d) |
MPC012 | Polymer Engineering - Processing and Manufacture | 10 | 2 | OE (1e) |
WSC301 | Computer Aided Engineering | 10 | 2 | OF |
WSC803 | Ballistics and Rocket Propulsion | 10 | 2 | OF |
MPC014 | Materials in Service | 10 | 2 | OF |
MPC102 | Fracture and Failure | 10 | 2 | OF |
LAN*** | University Wide Language | 10 | 2 | OF |
WSC911 | Industrial Machine Vision | 10 | 2 | OG |
All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.
4.5 Part D - Degree Modules
Students must choose 40 credits of optional modules (O) in Semester One and 40 credits in Semester Two.
ONE module (10 credits) must be from Group A. TWO modules (20 credits) must be from Group B. Modules in Group B are linked to modules in Part C.
ONE module (10 credits) must be from Group C.
No more than ONE module to be chosen from each of Groups D, E, F and G.
Students cannot register for modules already studied in Part C.
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
WSD403 | Engineering Design Management | 10 | 1 | C |
WSD503 | Project Engineering - Total Product Design | 30 | 1+2 | C |
BSD523 | Enterprise Technology | 10 | 1 | OA |
WSD500 | Project Leadership | 10 | 1 | OA |
WSD100 | Structural Integrity | 10 | 1 | OB (2c) |
WSD101 | Drive Train Dynamics | 10 | 1 | OB |
WSD102 | Non-Linear Dynamics | 10 | 1 | OB (2a) |
WSD802 | Computational Fluid Dynamics 2 | 10 | 1 | OB (2d) |
MPD014 | Polymer Engineering 2 - Properties and Design | 10 | 1 | OB (2e) |
WSC602 | Sustainable Manufacturing | 10 | 1 | OC |
WSC606 | Additive Manufacturing for Product Development | 10 | 1 | OC |
WSD900 | Mechatronics | 20 | 1+2 | OC |
LAN*** | University Wide Language | 10 | 1 | OC |
WSC301 | Computer Aided Engineering | 10 | 2 | OD |
WSC800 | Internal Combustion Engines | 20 | 2 | OD |
WSC803 | Ballistics and Rocket Propulsion | 10 | 2 | OD |
WSC610 | Healthcare Engineering | 10 | 2 | OE |
WSC700 | Sports Engineering | 10 | 2 | OE |
WSD902 | Laser & Optical Measurements | 20 | 2 | OE |
WSD407 | Sustainable Product Design | 10 | 2 | OF |
WSD606 | Additive Manufacturing and Reverse Engineering | 10 | 2 | OF |
LAN*** | University Wide Language | 10 | 2 | OG |
All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.
4.6 Studies Overseas
Students may choose to study Semester 1 (only) during their Part D, at an approved Overseas Higher Education Institution. The mix of subjects of the learning programme must first be approved by the programme director for their course. An acceptable learning programme should, where possible, include a group project and studies at an advanced/masters level.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
Progression from Part A to Part B, from Part B to Part C and from Part C to Part D will be subject to the provisions set out in Regulation XX and in addition candidates must accumulate 120 credits and achieve an overall average of 55% in each part.
To qualify for the award of the Degree of Master of Engineering, candidates must accumulate 100 credits from Part D, with no module mark less than 30%.
5.2 Criteria for candidates who do not meet the requirements for Progression or the award of a Degree.
Any candidate who fails to achieve the criteria for progression from Part A to Part B, Part B to Part C and from Part C to Part D shall have the opportunity to repeat Module Assessments in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XX. Alternatively, the candidate may elect to enter the BEng degree programme in Mechanical Engineering, before commencing Part C, provided that the candidate has satisfied the criteria for progression for that programme at the appropriate point.
In exceptional circumstances, any candidate who, having successfully completed Part C, is unable to commence or complete Part D or fails to achieve the criteria necessary for the award of the degree of MEng may, at the discretion of the Programme Board, be awarded the degree of BEng in Mechanical Engineering with a classification corresponding to the candidate’s achievements in the Part B and Part C assessments and determined on the basis of the weightings given for the BEng programme.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level modules assessments in Parts B, C and D in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The average percentage marks will be combined in the ratio Part B - 20, Part C - 40, Part D – 40 to determine the overall average percentage mark for the programme (the programme mark).
Programme Specification
MM MEng (Hons) Product Design Engineering (2019 Entry)
Academic Year: 2019/20
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | Institution of Engineering Designers (IED) Institution of Mechanical Engineers (IMechE) Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET) |
Final award | MEng/ MEng+DIS/ MEng+DPS/MEng+DInts |
Programme title | Product Design Engineering |
Programme code | WSUM02 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is 8 semesters, or 10 semesters if students undertake the additional period of study, normally between Parts B and C, leading to the award of the Diploma in Industrial Studies, the Diploma of International Studies, or the Diploma of Professional Studies. |
UCAS code | HHC7, HHD7 |
Admissions criteria | |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
This programme aims to bridge the disciplines of mechanical engineering, manufacturing engineering and product design. To provide design content which is applicable to products, processes and systems.
- A1. To deliver in-depth knowledge and understanding of key aspects of engineering science, manufacturing engineering, innovation and appropriate management techniques.
- A2. To provide opportunities for students to develop appropriate design and project engineering skills, including dealing with open-ended problems and elements of uncertainty and risk.
- A3. To develop the ability to solve a broad range of engineering problems, some complex and novel, using contemporary ideas and techniques.
- A4. To enable students to manage their own learning, communicate effectively and make use of primary source materials.
- A5. To put human and project management theory into practice through team-working and opportunities for leadership experience.
- A6. To provide insight into engineering practice and commercial aspects of engineering and design.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
-
UK Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education (QAA) – ‘Subject Benchmark Statement for Engineering’, (Feb.2015).
-
Engineering Council (UK). ‘UK-SPEC, UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence’, 3rd Edition, Jan.2014.
-
Engineering Council (UK). ‘The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes’, 3rd Edition, May 2014.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
- K1. the underpinning science, mathematics and other disciplines associated with careers related to product design engineering;
- K2. engineering principles, quantitative methods, mathematical and computer models;
- K3. the design processes and methodologies and the ability to manage a design project;
- K4. codes of practice, industry standards and quality issues, including new developments and limitations, as applicable to a product design engineering career;
- K5. intellectual property issues and of environmental, legal and ethical issues within the modern industrial world;
- K6. developing technologies in two areas of specialisation and an understanding of the broad range of concepts necessary for effective product design and manufacture;
- K7. management and business practices appropriate for a career in product design engineering and an understanding of the commercial and economic context and drivers of the engineering business;
- K8. the characteristics of engineering materials, equipment and processes and mechanical workshop practices.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
The MEng graduate will be able to use such knowledge and understanding in a creative way and be able to:
- C1. identify and define a design engineering problem in unfamiliar situations and generate innovative solutions:
- C2. apply and adapt appropriate methods to model such solutions and assess the limitations of each method;
- C3. analyse engineering solutions using contemporary computer-based systems and appreciate their limitations;
- C4. investigate new and emerging technologies using fundamental knowledge;
- C5. analyse, objectively evaluate and apply the principles of industrial design, engineering design and manufacturing design to product design and development;
- C6. extract, from given data, that which is pertinent to an unfamiliar problem and make use of it in finding a solution;
- C7. select appropriate data from a range of possible data sets and present them in alternative forms to create deeper understanding and/or greater impact;
- C8. integrate knowledge from all aspects of the programme, applying understanding to novel and challenging situations, while being aware of the limitations of solutions;
- C9. generate an innovative design for systems, components or processes to fulfil new needs.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- P1. manage and lead the design process taking account of customer constraints such as cost, health and safety, risk and environmental issues;
- P2. apply engineering techniques taking account of a range of commercial and industrial constraints;
- P3. communicate product design ideas through the presentation of concept drawings, computer visualisations and conventional sketching;
- P4. prepare engineering drawings, computer visualisations and technical reports and give technically competent oral presentations;
- P5. research information and use new methods required for novel situations;
- P6. use appropriate computer software and laboratory equipment;
- P7. recognise the capabilities and limitations of computer based methods for engineering problem solving.
- P8. demonstrate advanced organisational and management skills.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- T1. demonstrate a high level of numeracy;
- T2. apply creative and structured approaches to problem solving;
- T3. communicate effectively through written, graphical, interpersonal and presentation skills;
- T4. design and implement computer-based information systems;
- T5. work independently;
- T6. work in and lead a team;
- T7. organise and manage time and resources effectively;
- T8. learn new theories, concepts, methods etc. in an unfamiliar situation outside the discipline area.
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
MAA306 | Mathematics for Manufacturing Engineering | 20 | 1+2 | C |
WSA102 | Engineering Science 1 | 20 | 1+2 | C |
WSA401 | Product Design (Ergonomics & Visualisation) | 20 | 1+2 | C |
WSA604 | Materials and Manufacturing Processes | 20 | 1+2 | C |
WSA400 | Application of CAD for Engineering Designers | 10 | 1 | C |
WSA501 | Integrating Studies 1a | 10 | 1 | C |
WSA504 | Integrating Studies 1b | 10 | 2 | C |
WSA900 | Electronic and Electrical Technology 1 | 10 | 2 | C |
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
WSB501 | Integrating Studies | 20 | 1+2 | C |
WSB504 | Application of Product Design | 20 | 1+2 | C |
WSB112 | Engineering Science 2 | 10 | 1 | C |
WSB310 | Engineering and Management Modelling | 10 | 1 | C |
WSB400 | Industrial Design | 10 | 1 | C |
WSB610 | Manufacturing Technology | 10 | 1 | C |
WSB210 | Manufacturing Management | 10 | 2 | C |
WSB301 | Software Engineering | 10 | 2 | C |
WSB413 | Machine Design | 10 | 2 | C |
MAB206 | Statistics | 10 | 2 | C |
4.3 Part I – Optional Placement Year
Code | Title |
WSI010 | Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS) (non-credit bearing) |
WSI020 | Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) (non-credit bearing) |
WSI035 | Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) (non-credit bearing) |
For candidates who are registered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS), Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) or Diploma in International Studies (DintS), Part I will be between Parts B and C or Parts C and D and will be in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XI and Regulation XX.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
Students must choose 30 credits of Options (O). Students MUST select 10 credits from Group A (OA) and no more than 10 credits from each group.
Modules indicated with ** are paired together. For example, (1a) in part C is paired with (2a) in part D. Similarly (1e) in Part D is paired with (2e) also in part D. All students MUST COMPLETE AT LEAST TWO of these specialist module pairs during Part C or D. The second module of a pair (numbered 2) may not be taken without the prerequisite module (numbered 1) but the preliminary modules may be studied independently.
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
WSC551 | Individual Project | 50 | 1+2 | C |
WSC200 | Engineering Management: Finance, Law and Quality | 10 | 1 | C |
WSC401 | Design Methods and Communication | 10 | 1 | C |
WSC602 | Sustainable Manufacturing | 10 | 1 | C |
WSC606 | Additive Manufacturing for Product Development | 10 | 1 | C (1d) |
MPC012 | Polymer Engineering 1 - Processing and Manufacturing | 10 | 2 | OA (1b) |
WSC106 | Finite Element Analysis | 10 | 2 | OA (1c) |
WSC300 | Product Information Systems - Computer Aided Design | 10 | 2 | OB |
WSC203 | Manufacturing Planning & Control | 10 | 2 | OC |
WSC610 | Healthcare Engineering | 10 | 2 | OD |
WSC700 | Sports Engineering | 10 | 2 | OD |
All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.
4.5 Part D - Degree Modules
At least 70 weight of level 7 (D modules) must be taken in Part D.
Students must choose 70 credits of options (O). Students MUST select 10 credits from group A and 20 credits from group H. The remaining 40 credits should be no more than 10 credits from each group (B-G, I-L). Note there will be at least 20 weight of linked modules (follow on from pre-requisite modules in Part C) across both semesters.
Students who elect to study WSC900 (1e) must also study WSD900 (2e) in Part D.
Students can only choose WSD900 once (either from group F or Group H).
Students cannot choose modules already studied in Part C.
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
WSD503 | Project Engineering - Total Product Design | 30 | 1+2 | C |
WSD207 | Project Management | 10 | 1 | C |
WSD407 | Sustainable Product Design | 10 | 2 | C |
MPD014 | Polymer Engineering - Properties & Design | 10 | 1 | OA (2b) |
WSD100 | Structural Integrity | 10 | 1 | OA (2c) |
WSC600 | Advanced Manufacturing Processes and Technology 1 | 10 | 1 | OB (1a) |
WSC900 | Computer Control and Instrumentation | 10 | 1 | OB (1e) |
WSC201 | Organisation Structure and Strategy | 10 | 1 | OC |
WSC400 | Design for Assembly | 10 | 1 | OD |
WSD900 | Mechatronics | 20 | 1+2 | OF (2e) |
LAN*** | University Wide Language | 10 | 1 | OG |
WSD601 | Advanced Manufacturing Processes and Technology 2 | 10 | 2 | OH (2a) |
WSD606 | Additive Manufacturing and Reverse Engineering | 10 | 2 | OH (2d) |
WSD900 | Mechatronics | 20 | 1+2 | OH (2e) |
WSC206 | Product Innovation Management | 10 | 2 | OI |
WSC603 | Metrology | 10 | 2 | OJ |
WSC610 | Healthcare Engineering | 10 | 2 | OK |
WSC700 | Sports Engineering | 10 | 2 | OK |
LAN*** | University Wide Language | 10 | 2 | OL |
WSC911 | Industrial Machine Vision | 10 | 2 | OM |
All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.
4.6 Studies Overseas
Students may choose to study Semester 1 only, during their Part D at an approved Overseas Higher Education Institution. The mix of subjects of the learning programme must first be approved by the Programme Director. An acceptable learning programme must include a major group project and studies at an advanced/masters level with modular weight not less than 20.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 Criteria for Progression and Award of Degree
Progression from Part A to Part B, from Part B to Part C and from Part C to Part D will be subject to the provisions set out in Regulation XX and in addition candidates must accumulate 120 credits and achieve an overall average of 55% in each part.
To qualify for the Degree of Masters of Engineering, candidates must accumulate 120 credits from Part D, and no module mark below 40%.
5.2 Criteria for Candidates who do not meet the requirements for Progression or the Award of a Degree
Any candidate who fails to achieve the criteria for progression from Part A to Part B, Part B to Part C or Part C to Part D shall have the opportunity to repeat module assessments in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XX. Alternatively, the candidate may elect to enter the BEng Honours Degree programme in Product Design Engineering, provided that the candidate has satisfied the criteria for progression on the BEng programme at the appropriate point.
Any candidate who, having successfully completed Part C, is unable to commence or complete Part D or who fails to achieve the criteria necessary for the award of MEng may, at the discretion of the Programme Board, be awarded the degree of BEng in Product Design Engineering with a classification corresponding to the candidate’s achievements in the Part B and Part C assessments and determined on the basis of the weightings given for the BEng programme.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidate’s final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B, C and D in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The overall average percentage marks for each part will be combined in the ratio (Part B 20: Part C 40: Part D 40) to determine the overall average percentage mark for the Programme (the Programme Mark).
Programme Specification
MM MEng (Hons) Manufacturing Engineering (2018 Entry)
Academic Year: 2019/20
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET) Institution of Mechanical Engineers (IMechE) |
Final award | MEng / MEng+DIS / MEng+DPS / MEng+DInts |
Programme title | Manufacturing Engineering |
Programme code | WSUM01 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is eight semesters, or ten semesters if students undertake the additional period of study normally between Parts B and C for the award of the Diploma of Industrial Studies, the Diploma of International Studies or the Diploma of Professional Studies. |
UCAS code | H701, H707 |
Admissions criteria | MEng -
MEng+DPS/DIntS - |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The overall aim of this programme is to equip students with the knowledge, understanding, key skills and attributes to make a substantial impact in manufacturing enterprises. To achieve this, the course provides the core engineering science background, supported by a broad knowledge of manufacturing processes and technology. This is combined with modules covering the management of manufacturing activities that, all together, allows students to understand, monitor and enhance existing processes, and develop new manufacturing methods. The depth offered by this MEng programme will enable students to progress rapidly both technically and managerially in a range of manufacturing organisations.
Specific aims are:
• A1. To deliver technical depth in core engineering subjects and specialist applications leading to a broad understanding of engineering knowledge, and a critical awareness of current insights in the fields of manufacturing engineering and manufacturing management.
• A2. To produce high quality MEng graduates with a strong academic background and excellent communication skills able to manage their own learning and solve complex problems individually and in teams.
• A3. To equip manufacturing engineering graduates with a broad appreciation of the essential practical, commercial and social aspects of engineering enabling them to progress rapidly to a position of responsibility, and to become future technical and managerial leaders.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- UK Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education (QAA) – ‘Subject Benchmark Statement for Engineering’, (Feb.2015).
- Engineering Council (UK). ‘UKSPEC, UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence’, 3rd Edition, Jan.2014.
- Engineering Council (UK). ‘The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes’, 3rd Edition, May 2014.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
- K1. the underpinning science, mathematics and other disciplines associated with a career in manufacturing engineering;
- K2. engineering principles and relevant numerical methods and an understanding of the role of information technology in providing support for manufacturing engineers;
- K3. codes of practice, industry standards and quality issues applicable to a career in manufacturing;
- K4. the management of manufacturing methods and the wider business background appropriate to the organisation of a manufacturing enterprise;
- K5. the commercial and economic context, together with the importance of sustainability, legal, ethical and intellectual property issues within the modern industrial world;
- K6. material properties, manufacturing processes and technologies, their limitations and applicability, with an awareness of new developments in these areas;
- K7. the design process related to the manufacturing arena.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
The MEng graduate will also be able to use such knowledge and understanding in a creative way and be able to:
- C1. define an unfamiliar manufacturing related problem, evaluate its technical and business requirements and generate innovative solutions that consider the system as a whole including constraints such as economics, production capabilities and sustainability;
- C2. apply appropriate methods (including analytical and computational methods) to model and critically assess such solutions making allowance for uncertainty in the information available;
- C3. investigate methods to continuously improve manufacturing processes for enhanced quality, sustainability and economics;
- C4. research data and fundamental knowledge from other disciplines and apply the relevant aspects in the solution of unfamiliar problems;
- C5. understand the role of other engineering disciplines and their technical and business constraints.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- P1. use appropriate computer software numerical modelling methods and/or computational techniques to solve engineering problems;
- P2. use laboratory and mechanical workshop equipment competently and safely;
- P3. research information from a wide range of sources;
- P4. prepare engineering drawings and other technical data and present it in alternative forms to create good understanding and/or impact;
- P5. manage the manufacturing related design process taking account of customer constraints such as cost, health and safety and risk.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- T1. critically evaluate an existing or proposed technology;
- T2. use a range of computer based systems and adapt them to other applications;
- T3. communicate effectively through written, graphical, interpersonal and presentation skills;
- T4. develop, monitor and update a personal programme of work for themselves and/or others, to reflect changing requirements and learn independently;
- T5. gather information from a range of sources, collate it and present its key findings;
- T6. undertake different roles within a team that may include leadership.
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
MAA306 |
Mathematics for Manufacturing Engineering |
20 | 1+2 | C |
WSA102 | Engineering Science 1 | 20 | 1+2 | C |
WSA604 | Materials and Manufacturing Processes | 20 | 1+2 | C |
WSA400 | Application of CAD for Engineering Designers | 10 | 1 | C |
WSA501 | Integrating Studies 1a | 10 | 1 | C |
WSA610 | Manufacturing Technology | 10 | 1 | C |
WSA210 | Manufacturing Management | 10 | 2 | C |
WSA504 | Integrating Studies 1b | 10 | 2 | C |
WSA900 | Electronics and Electrical Technology 1 | 10 | 2 | C |
4.2 Part B Degree Modules
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
WSB501 | Integrating Studies | 20 | 1+2 | C |
WSB600 | Manufacturing Process Technology | 20 | 1+2 | C |
WSB112 | Engineering Science 2 | 10 | 1 | C |
WSB201 | Digital Manufacturing and Discrete Event Simulation | 10 | 1 | C |
WSB310 | Engineering and Management Modelling | 10 | 1 | C |
WSB505 | Manufacturing Design | 10 | 1 | C |
MAB206 | Statistics | 10 | 2 | C |
WSB203 | Manufacturing Planning and Control | 10 | 2 | C |
WSB301 | Software Engineering | 10 | 2 | C |
WSB413 | Machine Design | 10 | 2 | C |
4.3 Part I - Optional Placement Year
Code | Title |
WSI010 | Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS) (non-credit bearing) |
WSI020 | Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) (non-credit bearing) |
WSI035 |
Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) (non-credit bearing) |
For candidates who are reigstered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS), Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) or Diploma in International Studies (DIntS), Part I will be between Parts B and C or Parts C and D and will be in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XI and Regulation XX.
4.4 Part C Degree Modules
Some modules in Part C and D are paired together. For example, (1a) in part C is paired with (2a) in part D. All students MUST COMPLETE AT LEAST TWO of these specialist module pairs during part C or D. The second module of a pair (numbered 2) may not be taken without the prerequisite module (numbered 1) but the preliminary modules may be studied independently.
Students MUST choose 10 credits from Semester One and 10 credits from Semester Two.
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
WSD550 | Individual Project | 50 | 1+2 | C |
WSC600 | Advanced Manufacturing Processes and Technology 1 | 10 | 1 | C (1d) |
WSC602 | Sustainable Manufacturing | 10 | 1 | C (1c) |
WSC606 | Additive Manufacturing for Product Development | 10 | 1 | C (1e) |
WSC206 | Product Innovation Management | 10 | 2 | C |
WSC603 | Metrology | 10 | 2 | C |
WSC205 | International Project Management | 10 | 1 | O |
WSC900 | Computer Control and Instrumentation | 10 | 1 | O |
LAN*** | University Wide Language | 10 | 1 | O |
WSC106 | Finite Element Analysis | 10 | 2 | O (1a) |
WSC300 | Product Information Systems - Computer Aided Design | 10 | 2 | O |
MPC012 | Polymer Engineering - Processing and Manufacturing | 10 | 2 | O (1b) |
All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.
4.5 Part D Degree Modules
A number of modules are paired together. For example, the module marked (1a) in part C is paired with (2a) in part D. All students MUST COMPLETE AT LEAST TWO of these specialist module pairs during part C or D. The second module of a pair (numbered 2) may not be taken without the prerequisite module (numbered 1) but the preliminary modules may be studied independently.
Students MUST choose 20 credits from Semester One, with no more than 10 credits from each of the Groups A, B, C or D and 30 credits from Semester Two
When making selections, students must ensure that they choose at least 20 credits of optioanl D level modules.
Students may not select both WSC700 Sports Technology and WSC610 Healthcare Engineering.
Students cannot choose modules already studied in Part C.
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
WSD503 | Project Engineering - Total Product Design | 30 | 1+2 | C |
WSD207 | Project Management | 10 | 1 | C |
WSC400 | Design for Assembly | 10 | 1 | C |
WSC401 | Design Methods and Communication | 10 | 1 | C |
WSD203 | Lean Operations and Supply Chain Management | 10 | 2 | C |
WSC201 | Organisation Structure and Strategy | 10 | 1 | OA |
MPD014 | Polymer Engineering - Properties and Design | 10 | 1 | OB (2b) |
WSD100 | Structural Integrity | 10 | 1 | OB (2a) |
WSC108 | Manufacturing Automation and Control | 10 | 1 | OC |
WSC900 | Computer Control and Instrumentation | 10 | 1 | OC |
LAN*** | University Wide Language | 10 | 1 | OD |
WSC204 | Management of the Human Resource | 10 | 2 | O |
WSC610 | Healthcare Engineering | 10 | 2 | O |
WSC700 | Sports Technology | 10 | 2 | O |
WSC911 | Industrial Machine Vision | 10 | 2 | O |
WSD407 | Sustainable Product Design | 10 | 2 | O (2c) |
WSD601 | Advanced Manufacturing Processes and Technology 2 | 10 | 2 | O (2d) |
WSD606 | Additive Manufacturing and Reverse Engineering | 10 | 2 | O (2e) |
All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.
4.6 Studies Overseas
Students may choose to study Semester 1 only, during their Part D at an approved Overseas Higher Education Institution. The mix of subjects of the learning programme must first be approved by the Programmed Director. An acceptable learning programme must include a major group project and studies at an advanced/masters level with modular weight not less than 20.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 Criteria for Progression and Award of Degree
Progression from Part A to Part B, from Part B to Part C and from Part C to Part D will be subject to the provisions set out in Regulation XX and in addition candidates must accumulate 120 credits and achieve an overall average of 55% in each part.
To qualify for the Degree of Masters of Engineering, candidates must accumulate 100 credits from Part D, with no module mark below 30%.
5.2 Criteria for Candidates who do not meet the requirements for Progression or the Award of a Degree
Any candidate who fails to achieve the criteria for progression from Part A to Part B, Part B to Part C or Part C to Part D shall have the opportunity to repeat module assessments in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XX. Alternatively, the candidate may elect to enter the BEng Honours Degree programme in Manufacturing Engineering, provided that the candidate has satisfied the criteria for progression on the BEng programme at the appropriate point.
Any candidate who, having successfully completed Part C, is unable to commence or complete Part D or who fails to achieve the criteria necessary for the award of MEng may, at the discretion of the Programme Board, be awarded the degree of BEng in Manufacturing Engineering with a classification corresponding to the candidate’s achievements in the Part B and Part C assessments and determined on the basis of the weightings given for the BEng programme.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B, C and D in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The overall average percentage marks for each part will be combined in the ratio (Part B 20: Part C 40: Part D 40) to determine the overall average percentage mark for the Programme (the Programme Mark)
Programme Specification
MM MEng (Hons) Manufacturing Engineering (2019 Entry)
Academic Year: 2019/20
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET) Institution of Mechanical Engineers (IMechE) |
Final award | MEng / MEng+DIS / MEng+DPS / MEng+DInts |
Programme title | Manufacturing Engineering |
Programme code | WSUM01 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is eight semesters, or ten semesters if students undertake the additional period of study normally between Parts B and C for the award of the Diploma of Industrial Studies, the Diploma of International Studies or the Diploma of Professional Studies. |
UCAS code | H701, H707 |
Admissions criteria | MEng -
MEng+DPS/DIntS - |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The overall aim of this programme is to equip students with the knowledge, understanding, key skills and attributes to make a substantial impact in manufacturing enterprises. To achieve this, the course provides the core engineering science background, supported by a broad knowledge of manufacturing processes and technology. This is combined with modules covering the management of manufacturing activities that, all together, allows students to understand, monitor and enhance existing processes, and develop new manufacturing methods. The depth offered by this MEng programme will enable students to progress rapidly both technically and managerially in a range of manufacturing organisations.
Specific aims are:
• A1. To deliver technical depth in core engineering subjects and specialist applications leading to a broad understanding of engineering knowledge, and a critical awareness of current insights in the fields of manufacturing engineering and manufacturing management.
• A2. To produce high quality MEng graduates with a strong academic background and excellent communication skills able to manage their own learning and solve complex problems individually and in teams.
• A3. To equip manufacturing engineering graduates with a broad appreciation of the essential practical, commercial and social aspects of engineering enabling them to progress rapidly to a position of responsibility, and to become future technical and managerial leaders.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- UK Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education (QAA) – ‘Subject Benchmark Statement for Engineering’, (Feb.2015).
- Engineering Council (UK). ‘UKSPEC, UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence’, 3rd Edition, Jan.2014.
- Engineering Council (UK). ‘The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes’, 3rd Edition, May 2014.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
- K1. the underpinning science, mathematics and other disciplines associated with a career in manufacturing engineering;
- K2. engineering principles and relevant numerical methods and an understanding of the role of information technology in providing support for manufacturing engineers;
- K3. codes of practice, industry standards and quality issues applicable to a career in manufacturing;
- K4. the management of manufacturing methods and the wider business background appropriate to the organisation of a manufacturing enterprise;
- K5. the commercial and economic context, together with the importance of sustainability, legal, ethical and intellectual property issues within the modern industrial world;
- K6. material properties, manufacturing processes and technologies, their limitations and applicability, with an awareness of new developments in these areas;
- K7. the design process related to the manufacturing arena.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
The MEng graduate will also be able to use such knowledge and understanding in a creative way and be able to:
- C1. define an unfamiliar manufacturing related problem, evaluate its technical and business requirements and generate innovative solutions that consider the system as a whole including constraints such as economics, production capabilities and sustainability;
- C2. apply appropriate methods (including analytical and computational methods) to model and critically assess such solutions making allowance for uncertainty in the information available;
- C3. investigate methods to continuously improve manufacturing processes for enhanced quality, sustainability and economics;
- C4. research data and fundamental knowledge from other disciplines and apply the relevant aspects in the solution of unfamiliar problems;
- C5. understand the role of other engineering disciplines and their technical and business constraints.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- P1. use appropriate computer software numerical modelling methods and/or computational techniques to solve engineering problems;
- P2. use laboratory and mechanical workshop equipment competently and safely;
- P3. research information from a wide range of sources;
- P4. prepare engineering drawings and other technical data and present it in alternative forms to create good understanding and/or impact;
- P5. manage the manufacturing related design process taking account of customer constraints such as cost, health and safety and risk.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- T1. critically evaluate an existing or proposed technology;
- T2. use a range of computer based systems and adapt them to other applications;
- T3. communicate effectively through written, graphical, interpersonal and presentation skills;
- T4. develop, monitor and update a personal programme of work for themselves and/or others, to reflect changing requirements and learn independently;
- T5. gather information from a range of sources, collate it and present its key findings;
- T6. undertake different roles within a team that may include leadership.
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
MAA306 |
Mathematics for Manufacturing Engineering |
20 | 1+2 | C |
WSA102 | Engineering Science 1 | 20 | 1+2 | C |
WSA604 | Materials and Manufacturing Processes | 20 | 1+2 | C |
WSA400 | Application of CAD for Engineering Designers | 10 | 1 | C |
WSA501 | Integrating Studies 1a | 10 | 1 | C |
WSA610 | Manufacturing Technology | 10 | 1 | C |
WSA210 | Manufacturing Management | 10 | 2 | C |
WSA504 | Integrating Studies 1b | 10 | 2 | C |
WSA900 | Electronics and Electrical Technology 1 | 10 | 2 | C |
4.2 Part B Degree Modules
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
WSB501 | Integrating Studies | 20 | 1+2 | C |
WSB600 | Manufacturing Process Technology | 20 | 1+2 | C |
WSB112 | Engineering Science 2 | 10 | 1 | C |
WSB201 | Digital Manufacturing and Discrete Event Simulation | 10 | 1 | C |
WSB310 | Engineering and Management Modelling | 10 | 1 | C |
WSB505 | Manufacturing Design | 10 | 1 | C |
MAB206 | Statistics | 10 | 2 | C |
WSB203 | Manufacturing Planning and Control | 10 | 2 | C |
WSB301 | Software Engineering | 10 | 2 | C |
WSB413 | Machine Design | 10 | 2 | C |
4.3 Part I - Optional Placement Year
Code | Title |
WSI010 | Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS) (non-credit bearing) |
WSI020 | Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) (non-credit bearing) |
WSI035 |
Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) (non-credit bearing) |
For candidates who are reigstered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS), Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) or Diploma in International Studies (DIntS), Part I will be between Parts B and C or Parts C and D and will be in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XI and Regulation XX.
4.4 Part C Degree Modules
Some modules in Part C and D are paired together. For example, (1a) in part C is paired with (2a) in part D. All students MUST COMPLETE AT LEAST TWO of these specialist module pairs during part C or D. The second module of a pair (numbered 2) may not be taken without the prerequisite module (numbered 1) but the preliminary modules may be studied independently.
Students MUST choose 10 credits from Semester One and 10 credits from Semester Two.
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
WSD550 | Individual Project | 50 | 1+2 | C |
WSC600 | Advanced Manufacturing Processes and Technology 1 | 10 | 1 | C (1d) |
WSC602 | Sustainable Manufacturing | 10 | 1 | C (1c) |
WSC606 | Additive Manufacturing for Product Development | 10 | 1 | C (1e) |
WSC206 | Product Innovation Management | 10 | 2 | C |
WSC603 | Metrology | 10 | 2 | C |
WSC205 | International Project Management | 10 | 1 | O |
WSC900 | Computer Control and Instrumentation | 10 | 1 | O |
LAN*** | University Wide Language | 10 | 1 | O |
WSC106 | Finite Element Analysis | 10 | 2 | O (1a) |
WSC300 | Product Information Systems - Computer Aided Design | 10 | 2 | O |
MPC012 | Polymer Engineering - Processing and Manufacturing | 10 | 2 | O (1b) |
All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.
4.5 Part D Degree Modules
A number of modules are paired together. For example, the module marked (1a) in part C is paired with (2a) in part D. All students MUST COMPLETE AT LEAST TWO of these specialist module pairs during part C or D. The second module of a pair (numbered 2) may not be taken without the prerequisite module (numbered 1) but the preliminary modules may be studied independently.
Students MUST choose 20 credits from Semester One, with no more than 10 credits from each of the Groups A, B, C or D and 30 credits from Semester Two
When making selections, students must ensure that they choose at least 20 credits of optioanl D level modules.
Students may not select both WSC700 Sports Technology and WSC610 Healthcare Engineering.
Students cannot choose modules already studied in Part C.
Code | Title | Weight | Semester | C/O |
WSD503 | Project Engineering - Total Product Design | 30 | 1+2 | C |
WSD207 | Project Management | 10 | 1 | C |
WSC400 | Design for Assembly | 10 | 1 | C |
WSC401 | Design Methods and Communication | 10 | 1 | C |
WSD203 | Lean Operations and Supply Chain Management | 10 | 2 | C |
WSC201 | Organisation Structure and Strategy | 10 | 1 | OA |
MPD014 | Polymer Engineering - Properties and Design | 10 | 1 | OB (2b) |
WSD100 | Structural Integrity | 10 | 1 | OB (2a) |
WSC108 | Manufacturing Automation and Control | 10 | 1 | OC |
WSC900 | Computer Control and Instrumentation | 10 | 1 | OC |
LAN*** | University Wide Language | 10 | 1 | OD |
WSC204 | Management of the Human Resource | 10 | 2 | O |
WSC610 | Healthcare Engineering | 10 | 2 | O |
WSC700 | Sports Technology | 10 | 2 | O |
WSC911 | Industrial Machine Vision | 10 | 2 | O |
WSD407 | Sustainable Product Design | 10 | 2 | O (2c) |
WSD601 | Advanced Manufacturing Processes and Technology 2 | 10 | 2 | O (2d) |
WSD606 | Additive Manufacturing and Reverse Engineering | 10 | 2 | O (2e) |
All optional module choice is subject to availability, timetabling, student number restrictions and students having taken appropriate pre-requisite modules.
4.6 Studies Overseas
Students may choose to study Semester 1 only, during their Part D at an approved Overseas Higher Education Institution. The mix of subjects of the learning programme must first be approved by the Programmed Director. An acceptable learning programme must include a major group project and studies at an advanced/masters level with modular weight not less than 20.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 Criteria for Progression and Award of Degree
Progression from Part A to Part B, from Part B to Part C and from Part C to Part D will be subject to the provisions set out in Regulation XX and in addition candidates must accumulate 120 credits and achieve an overall average of 55% in each part.
To qualify for the Degree of Masters of Engineering, candidates must accumulate 120 credits from Part D, with no module mark below 40%.
5.2 Criteria for Candidates who do not meet the requirements for Progression or the Award of a Degree
Any candidate who fails to achieve the criteria for progression from Part A to Part B, Part B to Part C or Part C to Part D shall have the opportunity to repeat module assessments in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XX. Alternatively, the candidate may elect to enter the BEng Honours Degree programme in Manufacturing Engineering, provided that the candidate has satisfied the criteria for progression on the BEng programme at the appropriate point.
Any candidate who, having successfully completed Part C, is unable to commence or complete Part D or who fails to achieve the criteria necessary for the award of MEng may, at the discretion of the Programme Board, be awarded the degree of BEng in Manufacturing Engineering with a classification corresponding to the candidate’s achievements in the Part B and Part C assessments and determined on the basis of the weightings given for the BEng programme.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B, C and D in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The overall average percentage marks for each part will be combined in the ratio (Part B 20: Part C 40: Part D 40) to determine the overall average percentage mark for the Programme (the Programme Mark)
Programme Specification
MM MEng (Hons) Sports Technology
Academic Year: 2019/20
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | Wolfson School of Mechanical, Electrical and Manufacturing Engineering |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | MEng / MEng + DIS/ MEng + DPS |
Programme title | Sports Technology |
Programme code | WSUM05 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is 8 semesters, or 10 semesters if taken with either the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS) or Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS). The programme is only available on a full-time basis. |
UCAS code | C650/C651 |
Admissions criteria | |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The overall aim of this programme is to provide students with the knowledge, understanding, key skills and attributes to make a substantial impact within the sports equipment industry. To achieve this, the programme provides the relevant background in engineering and sports science, knowledge of materials, design and manufacturing processes and an understanding of the sports equipment business. In combination this equips students with the skills to conceive and develop innovative sports equipment designs and turn them into manufacturing reality and profitable products. The depth offered by this MEng programme enables students to achieve Chartered Engineer status after further industrial experience and progress rapidly both technically and managerially in a range of sports equipment related organisations.
Specific aims are:
A1. To produce high quality graduates with a strong academic background, excellent communication skills and the ability to progress to positions of responsibility
A2. To deliver technical depth in core engineering subjects and specialist applications leading to a broad understanding of engineering knowledge, and a critical awareness of current insights within sports equipment engineering and management.
A3. To support graduates to manage their own learning and solve complex problems individually and in teams.
A4. To train skilled sports engineers with a broad appreciation of the essential practical, commercial and social aspects of engineering.
A5. To provide an engineering degree programme for highly motivated students that applies engineering design and sports science principles to sports equipment
A6. To produce graduates with the analytical and transferable skills that will enable employment in a wide variety of professions and to make a valuable contribution to society.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- UK Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education (QAA) – ‘Subject Benchmark Statement for Engineering’, (Feb.2015).
- Engineering Council (UK). ‘UK-SPEC, UK Standard for Professional Engineering Competence’, 3rd Edition, Jan.2014.
- Engineering Council (UK). ‘The Accreditation of Higher Education Programmes’, 3rd Edition, May 2014.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
K1. the underpinning science, mathematics and other disciplines associated with careers related to the sports engineering / equipment design and manufacture;
K2. the characteristics of engineering materials, equipment and processes and mechanical workshop practices;
K3. the role of instrumentation and measurement techniques within sports equipment evaluation and experimental protocol design;
K4. the principles of sports equipment design, engineering design and manufacturing design and the ability to manage a design project;
K5. ergonomics and aesthetic considerations and how they impact on sports equipment design;
K6. relevant developing technologies, sustainability issues and the broad range of concepts necessary for effective sports equipment design and manufacture;
K7. principles governing the mechanics and biomechanics of sports movements;
K8. management techniques, business practices and the commercial and economic context and drivers of the sports equipment / engineering business;
K9. intellectual property issues and environmental, legal and ethical issues within the modern industrial world;
K10. engineering principles, quantitative methods, mathematical and computer models related to sports equipment design / engineering;
K11. codes of practice, industry standards and quality issues, including new developments and limitations, as applicable to a sports equipment design / engineering career.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
The MEng graduate will be able to use such knowledge and understanding in a creative way and be able to:
C1. identify and define a sports equipment design / engineering problem in unfamiliar situations and generate innovative solutions;
C2. apply and adapt appropriate methods to model such solutions and assess the limitations of each method;
C3 . analyse engineering solutions using contemporary computer-based systems and appreciate their limitations;
C4. investigate new and emerging technologies using fundamental knowledge;
C5. apply biomechanics to the analysis of movement in sport;
C6. demonstrate an awareness of form, function, fit, aesthetics, environment and safety;
C7. analyse, objectively evaluate and apply the principles of sports equipment design, engineering design and manufacturing design to product design and development;
C8. evaluate commercial risk and market trends within the sports sector;
C9. integrate knowledge from all aspects of the programme, applying understanding to novel and challenging situations, while being aware of the limitations of solutions;
C10. generate innovative designs for systems, components or processes to fulfil new needs.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
P1. research technical information and apply new methods required for novel situations;
P2. communicate design ideas through the presentation of concept drawings, computer visualisations and conventional sketching;
P3. prepare engineering drawings, computer visualisations and technical reports and give technically competent oral presentations;
P4. test design concepts via practical investigation;
P5. use appropriate computer software and laboratory equipment to collect, analyse and present mechanical and biomechanical data;
P6. present technical and business information in a variety of ways to create deeper understanding and/or greater impact;
P7. manage and lead the design process taking account of customer constraints such as cost, health and safety, risk and environmental issues;
P8. apply engineering techniques taking account of a range of commercial and industrial constraints;
P9. identify and apply methods to minimise measurement uncertainty.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
T1. demonstrate high levels of computer literacy and numeracy;
T2. apply creative, structured and evidence-based approaches to problem solving;
T3. communicate effectively through written, graphical, interpersonal and presentation skills;
T4. work effectively independently, in a team and as a team leader;
T5. demonstrate advanced organisational and management skills to meet deadlines;
T6. learn new theories, concepts, methods etc. in unfamiliar situations outside the discipline area;
T7. demonstrate self-learning to improve performance.
4. Programme structure
INTRODUCTORY MODULES
Part A
Semester 1 and 2
Compulsory modules (80 credits)
Code |
Title |
Credits |
MAA307 |
Engineering Mathematics (Sem 1: 10 credits; Sem 2: 10 credits) |
20 |
PSA721 |
Introduction to Sports Biomechanics & Kinesiology (Sem 1: 10 credits; Sem 2: 10 credits) |
20 |
WSA401 |
Product Design (Ergonomics and Visualisation) (Sem 1: 10 credits; Sem 2: 10 credits) |
20 |
WSA502 |
Applied Sports Technology 1 (Sem 1: 10 credits; Sem 2: 10 credits) |
20 |
Semester 1
Compulsory modules (20 credits)
Code |
Title |
Credits |
WSA400 |
Application of CAD for Engineering Designers |
10 |
WSA602 |
Introduction to Materials and Manufacturing Processes |
10 |
Semester 2
Compulsory modules (20 credits)
Code |
Title |
Credits |
WSA700 |
Measurement Principles |
10 |
WSA701 |
Mechanical Design in Sport |
10 |
DEGREE MODULES
Part B
Semester 1 and 2
Compulsory modules (80 credits)
Code |
Title |
Credits |
PSB722 |
Sports Biomechanics (Sem 1: 10 credits; Sem 2: 10 credits) |
20 |
WSB302 |
Engineering Computation for Sports Technology (Sem 1: 10 credits; Sem 2: 10 credits) |
20 |
WSB502 |
Applied Sports Technology 2 (Sem 1: 10 credits; Sem 2: 10 credits) |
20 |
WSB503 |
Application of Product Design in Sports (Sem 1: 10 credits; Sem 2: 10 credits) |
20 |
Semester 1
Compulsory modules (20 credits)
Code |
Title |
Credits |
WSB701 |
Measurement and Experimental Design |
10 |
WSB901 |
Electronic Systems |
10 |
Semester 2
Compulsory modules (20 credits)
Code |
Title |
Credits |
MAB206 |
Statistics |
10 |
WSB700 |
Sports Good Design, Manufacture and Test |
10 |
Part I
Code |
Title |
WSI010 |
Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS) |
WSI020 |
Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) |
For candidates who are registered for the Diploma in Industrial Studies (DIS) or Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS), Part I will be between Part B and C or Part C and D and will be in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XI and Regulation XX.
Part C
Students must select at least one of MPC012 and WSC606 in their optional modules.
Semester 1 and 2
Compulsory modules (50 credits)
Code |
Title |
Credits |
WSD550 |
Individual Project (Sem 1: 20 credits; Sem 2: 30 credits) |
50 |
Semester 1
Compulsory modules (20 credits)
Code |
Title |
Credits |
WSC200 |
Engineering Management: Finance, Law and Quality |
10 |
WSC701 |
Sports Surfaces, Footwear and Garments |
10 |
Optional modules (Students should select modules totalling 20 credits)
Code |
Title |
Credits |
WSC401 |
Design Methods and Communication |
10 |
WSC606 |
Additive Manufacturing for Product Development |
10 |
WSC602 |
Sustainable Manufacturing |
10 |
Semester 2
Compulsory modules (10 credits)
Code |
Title |
Credits |
WSC702 |
Sport Equipment Industry |
10 |
Optional modules (Students should select modules totalling 20 credits)
Code |
Title |
Credits |
WSC203 |
Manufacturing Planning & Control |
10 |
WSC300 |
Product Information Systems – Computer Aided Design |
10 |
WSC610 |
Healthcare Engineering |
10 |
MPC012 |
Polymer Engineering - Processing and Manufacture |
10 |
Part D
Students must select at least one of MPD014 and WSD606 in their optional modules.
Semester 1 and 2
Compulsory modules (50 credits)
Code |
Title |
Credits |
PSC724 |
Advanced Sports Biomechanics (Sem 1: 10 credits; Sem 2: 10 credits) |
20 |
WSD503 |
Product Engineering – Total Product Design (Sem 1: 10 credits; Sem 2: 20 credits) |
30 |
Semester 1
Compulsory modules (20 credits)
Code |
Title |
Credits |
BSD523 |
Enterprise Technology |
10 |
WSD207 |
Project Management |
10 |
Optional modules (Students should select modules totalling 20 credits)
Code |
Title |
Credits |
MPD014 |
Polymer Engineering – Properties & Design |
10 |
WSC201 |
Organisation Structure & Strategy |
10 |
WSC600 |
Advanced Manufacturing Processes & Technology 1 |
10 |
Semester 2
Compulsory modules (20 credits)
Code |
Title |
Credits |
WSC070 |
Emerging Technologies for Health and Wellbeing |
10 |
WSD407 |
Sustainable Product Design |
10 |
Optional modules (Students should select modules totalling 10 credits)
Code |
Title |
Credits |
WSC603 |
Metrology |
10 |
WSD606 |
Additive Manufacturing and Reverse Engineering |
10 |
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B, from Part B to C, from C to D and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX.
5.2 Criteria for Candidates who do not receive Permission to Progress or gain the Award of a Degree
Any candidate who fails to achieve the criteria for progression from Part A to Part B, Part B to Part C or Part C to Part D shall have the opportunity to repeat module assessments in accordance with the provisions of Regulation XX. Alternatively, the candidate may elect to enter the BEng Honours Degree programme in Sports Technology, provided that the candidate has satisfied the criteria for progression on the BEng programme at the appropriate point.
Any candidate who, having successfully completed Part C, is unable to commence or complete Part D or who fails to achieve the criteria necessary for the award of MEng may, at the discretion of the Programme Board, be awarded the degree of BEng in Sports Technology with a classification corresponding to the candidate’s achievements in the Part B and Part C assessments and determined on the basis of the weightings given for the BEng programme.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidate’s final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B, C and D in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The overall average percentage marks for each part will be combined in the ratio (Part B 20: Part C 40: Part D 40) to determine the final percentage mark.